JP2018023423A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance amusement of games during an AT period.SOLUTION: A main control board 71 of a pachinko slot machine 1 performs a shift lottery to a specific interval for making a notification of a stop operation mode advantageous to a player, and if the shift lottery is won, shifts a game state to the specific interval. The pachinko slot machine 1 is provided with a bonus state in which a notification target combination is to be determined at the moment as an internal winning combination with a high probability, and by setting the start timing of the specific interval at the start time of the bonus state, a state in which the notification target combination is likely to be determined as the internal winning combination is to be always created once during the specific interval. Thereby, a situation in which the notification target combination is not determined even once as the internal winning combination during the specific interval is set likely to be avoided.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 145

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in Patent Document 1, in order to prevent an internal winning combination from being missed in recent years, information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is provided. There is known a gaming machine for informing the above. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

JP 2010-057332 A

  In gaming machines having such an AT function, an AT machine for managing the number of games is known in which the duration of AT is managed by the number of games. By the way, in such an AT machine that manages the number of games, if the number of winning combinations (for example, push order bells) to be notified during the AT period is small, there are few medals that can be acquired during the AT period, and during the AT period Despite this, players sometimes complained.

  In addition, as a gaming machine having an AT function, a so-called navigation frequency management AT machine that manages the duration of an AT by the number of times that information advantageous to the player is notified is also known. Even in such a navigation frequency management AT machine, if the role to be notified is not established, the period of waiting for the occurrence of navigation becomes longer, and the player is in spite of the AT period. There was a risk of boring impressions.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the interest of a game from deteriorating during an AT period.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol that varies the symbol by rotating the reel based on establishment of a start condition. Based on the change means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the establishment of the start condition, the combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) that determines the winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. ), A stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and determined by the combination determining means Stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71, etc.) for stopping the variation of the symbol based on the winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means. And a specific game starting means (for example, main control board 71) that starts a specific gaming state (for example, a bonus state) when a specific symbol combination is displayed when the variation of the symbols is stopped, and a player Transition lottery means (for example, main control board) for performing transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a notification gaming state (for example, a specific section) for notifying the mode of the stopping operation (for example, the correct answer pressing order) 71), notification game control means (for example, main control board 71) for executing the notification game state based on the result of the transition lottery of the transition lottery means, and a role to be notified during the notification game state. When a notification target combination (for example, pushing order) is determined as a winning combination, notification means (for example, main control board 71, finger Monitor 147, sub-control board 72, and display unit 100), and the combination determining means determines the notification target combination as a winning combination during the specific gaming state with a higher probability than in a state other than the specific gaming state. The notification game control means starts the notification game state when the specific game start means is started by the specific game start means in a state where the transition lottery is won.

  In such a gaming machine, when transitioning to the notification gaming state, so-called AT machines or ART machines are realized in order to notify the mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination. be able to. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific gaming state is started in the state where the lottery is won, the notification gaming state is started, that is, the start of the notification gaming state is started. It is time. In this specific gaming state, the notification target role is won with a higher probability than in a state other than the specific gaming state. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the notification gaming state starts together with the specific gaming state, the notification is performed thereafter. It can be expected that the target role will win with a high probability. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult for the notification subject combination to win during the notification game state, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the notification game state.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is characterized in that the notification game control means continues to execute the notification game state even after the specific game state ends.

  In such a gaming machine, since the notification game state continues even after the specific game state in which the notification target combination is easy to win, the specific game state (bonus) can be aimed at while receiving the notification.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of games during the AT period.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a whole perspective view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a whole front view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a schematic layout diagram inside the housing of the pachislot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening part for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a rear screen mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side board of the screen housing | casing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation state of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is a figure which shows a part of display screen displayed on the sub display apparatus of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub control board of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of the alerting | reporting of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the abbreviated name of the winning combination in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium-high probability lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the mode up lottery table in CZ1 memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the point up lottery table in CZ2 memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in normal ART in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during ART memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART level determination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART medium high probability lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows CT CT lottery table during ART memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the top lottery table during normal ART memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table in CT memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the number of sets during CT memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine, and a lottery table. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the bonus in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the bonus classification lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table on the number of bonus ART games memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the bonus end time CT lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the exceptional game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the non-ART flag conversion lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the alerting | reporting performed by the main side in the said pachislot machine, and the alerting | reporting performed by the sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process according to the state of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the normal start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during CZ of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ3 of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during normal ART of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CT start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of BB start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the BB check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the CZ * ART completion | finish of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub side navigation control process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the player registration process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history management process of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen of the sub display apparatus of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT precursor in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine of another embodiment, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine of another embodiment, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during normal ART memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the top addition lottery table stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows CT meter promotion lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CZ in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ2 end lottery table memorize | stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lock lottery table memorize | stored in the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT precursor in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the alerting | reporting between MB flags in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the correspondence of the alerting | reporting performed by the main side in the pachislot machine, and the alerting | reporting performed by the sub side. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the lock state and alerting | reporting in the pachislot machine of a modification. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the alerting | reporting performed by the main side in the pachislot machine of a modification, and the alerting | reporting performed by a sub side. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting performed by the sub side in the pachislot machine of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the ratio display of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the information indicator of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a pattern of the lighting timing of the status indicator in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting method of the presence or absence of winning of the lottery to transfer to a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the basic game flow of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of each game state which the said pachislot machine has. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table and transfer lottery table which are memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the realization method of CZ in the case of performing transfer lottery to ART game state with the probability defined uniquely. It is a figure which shows the counting method of the number of limit games in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the limit process of the specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the navigation guarantee process at the time of the end of the specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a pattern of the signal output timing to the external apparatus in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation cooperated with the external apparatus performed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation cooperated with the external apparatus performed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the navigation securing method in the specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor realization method using the specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor realization method using the specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the saving method of the navigation frequency in the case of performing the specific area of the navigation frequency management in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game in the case of managing Lip Navi and Bell Navi individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game in the case of managing Lip Navi and Bell Navi individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of managing separately Lip Navi and Bell Navi during a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game in the case of managing Lip Navi and Bell Navi individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game in the case of managing Lip Navi and Bell Navi individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game in the case of managing Lip Navi and Bell Navi individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection method of CZ from which an end period differs in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the content of the control at the time of the setting change in the said pachislot machine.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachislot machine showing an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as game media. In addition, the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out game media, but is applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses game media such as a game ball and grants benefits as electronic data such as earned points when a predetermined grant condition is satisfied. It is also possible to do. Further, in the present embodiment, a function in which the replay probability is higher than normal between the assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) that is a function for navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like and the specific number of plays. A pachi-slot having a function of assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) in which RT is simultaneously operated will be described.

[Function flow of pachislot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, when a medal is inserted by a player and the start lever 6 is operated, the pachislot machine 1 is set to a single value (from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535)). Hereinafter, random numbers) are extracted.

  The internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 31 described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means determines a predetermined winning probability from a plurality of combinations based on detection of a unit game start operation on the start lever 6 by the start switch 6S (see FIG. 30) (establishment of a predetermined start condition). The internal winning combination is determined.

  By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along a winning line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as paying out medals, replaying (replaying), bonusing, etc. are given to the player, and so-called “losing”. Such a thing is provided.

  Subsequently, after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated, when the player presses the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R, reel stop control means (a main CPU 31 described later, a motor drive circuit described later). 39, stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R, which will be described later, perform control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. Do.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. . In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”, and the maximum number is the number of four symbols (the maximum number of sliding symbols). ).

  The reel stop control means, when an internal winning combination permitting display of the symbol combination related to winning is determined, uses the specified time, and the symbol combination is displayed as a winning line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”). The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible.

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the reels are used within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols so that they are not displayed along the effective line using the specified time. Stop the rotation of 3L, 3C, 3R.

  In this way, when all the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 31 described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the active line is related to winning. Determine whether or not.

  That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the combination based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line, based on the fact that the change of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means.

  When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that is performed first when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first The stop operation performed after the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, various effects are produced by using the output of light (video) performed by the display unit 100, the output of sound performed by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof in the above-described series of flows. Done.

  When the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines, by lottery, what is to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is performed by a sub-control board described later.

  When the contents of the effect are determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute the corresponding effects in conjunction with the respective triggers such as the start of reel rotation, the stop of rotation of each reel, and the determination of the presence or absence of a prize. To do. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination is a game. It is provided to the player and the player's interest can be improved.

[Pachislot machine structure]
The functional flow of the pachislot machine 1 has been described above. Next, with reference to FIG.2 and FIG.3, the structure of the pachislot machine 1 in this Embodiment is demonstrated.

  FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

A housing 60 forming the entire pachi-slot machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62 a disposed at the upper front of the cabinet 61, and a lower front of the cabinet 61. And a lower door 62b. The cabinet 61 accommodates equipment (for example, reels) used for games. The upper door 62a and the lower door 62b are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 61. The upper door 62a is provided so that the upper part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed, and the lower door 62b is provided so that the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed.
Since the cabinet 61 is a member that fixes the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b, it may be referred to as a fixed frame, and the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b may be referred to as a front door.

  The upper door 62a has the display unit 100 in the center. The display unit 100 is an effect device that performs effects according to the progress of the game, and displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, but in this embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used as will be described later.

  A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided in a substantially central portion of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on reels 3L, 3C, and 3R described later. In the display window 4, an upper right diagonal cross-up line, an upper top line, a middle center line, a lower bottom line, and a lower right diagonal cross down line are displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols out of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays 3 × 3 symbols. Five lines of the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4 are lines that linearly connect 3 × 3 symbols displayed on the display window 4.

  In the present embodiment, the center line of these five lines is an effective line, and a winning determination is made based on a combination of symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines that are not used for winning determination.

  The activated line (center line) is activated by operating a MAX bet button 11 described later or by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, the “number of inserted medals” includes both the BET number by the operation of the MAX bet button 11 and the inserted number actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22.

  In the cabinet 61, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel band in which a symbol row as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for the game is drawn on each outer peripheral surface. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The symbols drawn on each reel band can be viewed from the outside of the pachislot machine 1 through the display window 4. Further, each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute), and the symbol row is displayed in a variable manner.

  A pedestal portion 10 having a substantially horizontal plane is formed below the display window 4. Within the horizontal plane of the pedestal 10, a medal slot 22 is provided on the right side, and a MAX bet button 11 and a 1 bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, a bet button LED 103 (see FIG. 30) that is lit when a medal can be inserted is provided.

  By depressing this MAX bet button 11, the number (three) of medals used for a unit game (one game) is inserted, and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, every time the 1-bet button is pressed, one medal is inserted. When the 1-bet button is operated three times, three medals used for a unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated.

  The operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1 bet button, and the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22 (operation of inserting a medal for playing a game) are referred to as “insertion operation”.

  An information display 14 is provided at the approximate center in the horizontal plane of the pedestal 10. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up in accordance with the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter referred to as the inserted number). The information display 14 also has information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. A digital display (not shown) for digitally displaying the game to the player is provided.

  In addition, the information display 14 has an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information of a stop operation necessary for displaying a combination of symbols according to the combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. Is provided. The instruction monitor is configured by, for example, a 7-segment LED, and notifies the player of necessary stop operation information by lighting or blinking in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the stop operation information to be notified. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, “push order” is provided in which the combination of symbols displayed differs depending on the order (push order) of the stop operation. For example, “1” is displayed when the push order “1st (perform the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)” is notified. , “2” is displayed when the push order “2nd (perform the first stop operation to the middle reel 3C)” is notified, and the push order “3rd (first stop operation to the right reel 3R) is displayed. “3” is displayed when “ Details of notification of stop operation information in the instruction monitor will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 30 described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay board 74. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, the stop operation information may be notified using other means controlled by the sub-control board 72. For example, Information on the stop operation may be notified in the display unit 100 described above.

  In this case, the notification mode in the instruction monitor may be different from the notification mode in other means. That is, the instruction monitor may be notified in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information about the stop operation (for example, “1” in the instruction monitor). Even if it is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, and it cannot be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information on the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order “1st” is notified, the instruction monitor displays “1” uniquely corresponding to the push order to be notified, while the other means (display unit 100) displays the first stop operation to the left. It is good also as notifying directly about what is performed with respect to this reel 3L.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not only the control of the sub-control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify information on necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination. Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. More specifically, the stop operation information may be notified in the later-described ART gaming state (see FIG. 33) without notifying the stop operation information in the later-described general gaming state (non-ART).

  Further, on the left side of the front portion of the pedestal portion 10, there is provided a settlement button 13 for switching credit / payout of medals obtained by the player in the game by a push button operation. By switching the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout opening 15 at the lower front, and the paid out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 16.

  On the right side of the checkout button 13, a start lever 6 is provided as a start operation means for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by the player's tilting operation and starting the display of symbols in the display window 4. It is attached so that it can be tilted freely in the angle range.

  Stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R as stop operation means for stopping the rotations of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by a player's pressing operation are provided in the approximate center of the front surface portion of the base portion 10, respectively. ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) basically starts when the start lever 6 is operated, and ends when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

  A first sub display device 201 and a second sub display device 202 are provided in front of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device 202 are a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and display various information. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device 202 are located on the sides of the front surface of the lower door 62 b that are erected substantially vertically from the horizontal surface of the pedestal unit 10. The first sub display device 201 is provided on the left side (MAX bet button 11 and start lever 6 side), and the second sub display device 202 is provided on the right side (medal insertion slot 22 side).

  In at least one of the first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device 202, in this embodiment, a touch sensor 201a is provided on the display surface of the first sub display device 201, and the touch sensor 201a is interposed therebetween. The display can be switched according to the received player's operation. The touch sensor 201a operates in accordance with a predetermined operation principle such as an electrostatic capacity method, and when a player's operation is accepted, outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The first sub display device 201 is controlled by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 31) based on touch input information output from the touch sensor 201a.

  Speakers 9L and 9R that provide effects such as sound effects and voices are provided on the front of the lower part of the lower door 62b, and a medal payout opening 15 through which medals are paid out is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R. ing. A medal receiving portion 16 for storing the paid-out medals is provided at the lowermost part of the lower door 62b.

  The lower panel 62b has a front panel sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R and the medal receiving part 16, and a waist panel 25 with a design corresponding to the model motif. It is attached. The waist panel 25 is irradiated by a waist panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind.

[Display unit structure]
Next, the structure of the display unit 100 provided in the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Display unit 100)
As shown in FIG. 4, a display unit 100 is provided inside the cabinet 61 on the rear side of the upper door 62a. As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit 100 is detachably provided on an intermediate support plate 301 in the cabinet 61. The intermediate support plate 301 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 61. The display unit 100 is a so-called projection mapping apparatus that includes an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is irradiated. .

  Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object. For example, the position (projection distance or angle) of an object that is a screen described later is used. Etc.) and an image corresponding to the production information generated based on the shape is projected, thereby enabling an advanced and powerful production.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation light device B includes a projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward, and a screen that is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and that has the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 disposed obliquely downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B <b> 2 is disposed at the rear part in the cabinet 61. The projector mechanism B2 has a flat base member B22 arranged horizontally. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is disposed so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  In addition, exhaust heat mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 are arranged on the right and left sides of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The exhaust heat mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct through which air is circulated and a fan that sends out air. By blowing out air to the rear, the heat generated when the irradiation light is generated is forced to the rear. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 2, vent holes 21 a of the cabinet 61 are arranged in the air flow direction in the heat exhaust mechanisms B <b> 23 and B <b> 24. As a result, the exhaust heat mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly exhaust the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with air to the outside through the vent hole 21a.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (in the direction of emission of irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 accommodated in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As shown in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B31 is formed in a plate shape having a rectangular front surface. At each corner portion of the mirror holder B31, an angle adjustment hole B311 is formed, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface with the angle adjustment hole B311 as the center. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrically between the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

  A mirror holding part B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding part B313 is formed in the center part, and is formed in a size that does not overlap with the angle adjustment hole B311 and the attachment hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are respectively provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding part B313. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and attachment holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjustment holes B331, B341 and the mounting holes B334, B344 in the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjustment holes B311, B311 and the mounting holes B314, B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap with the mirror holding part B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both sides in the left-right direction of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding part B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is disposed so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door 62a is opened. The reflector holding part B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11, and this screw passes through the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws that pass through the angle adjustment holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are provided on the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. Screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

  When the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed through the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344, so that the optical mirror is interposed between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is sandwiched. Thus, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as the mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. Thus, the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corner portions of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341 are provided. By increasing or decreasing the distance to B3, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 can be finely adjusted.

  Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding unit B11, so that the reflector holding unit B11 and the mirror holder B31 Is sandwiched between. And the screw penetrated from angle adjustment hole B111 of reflector holding part B11 has penetrated the spring concerned. Thereby, even if the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases with the rotation of the screw, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11 by the biasing force of the spring. It can be prevented that the screw head protrudes from the angle adjustment hole B111 and the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw is destroyed.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are accommodated in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes a horizontally disposed upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 disposed on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13 and B13 disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And have. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward from the cabinet 61 of FIG. At the center of the front side of the upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 is formed so as to protrude forward, and the above-described mirror mechanism B3 is held in the space formed by the protrusion so that the angle can be adjusted. .

  Further, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding in the horizontal direction from the lower end portion. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet 61, and is set to a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 61. Has been. On the other hand, when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet 61, the second protrusion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the rear space from the opening of the cabinet 61, and is larger than the width of the rear space. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, each side wall B13, B13 is formed so that the width of the second protrusion B131b is wider than the width of the first protrusion B131a. Accordingly, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet 61.

  A perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal having a plurality of holes formed by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed to be substantially evenly distributed over the entire surface of the porous plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and enables air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and the number of the holes B151 are set such that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

  The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protrusion B131a and the second protrusion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. As shown in FIG. 12, the perforated plate B15 has a front side upper part B15a, a middle side inclined part B15b, and a rear side lower part B15c. The upper part B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined part B15b is formed by being bent obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper part B15a. The lower part B15c is formed by being bent in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined part B15b.

  The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall parts B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from the lower side with the upper part B15a and cover the lower part with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. Yes. As shown in FIG. 10, a front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is disposed below the perforated plate B15.

  As will be described in detail later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position that is disposed on the upper side that is a standby posture that prohibits the appearance of an image by irradiation light, and a lower side that is an exposure posture that permits the appearance of an image by irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is in an inclined posture that is close to and substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the porous plate B15, and air present in the space portion reaches the porous plate B15 without flow resistance, By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and increase the cooling efficiency.

  Further, the perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the player's line-of-sight position is the center of the screen device C in the vertical and horizontal directions. Even if the irradiation light device B is looked up from the position of the line of sight, the inside of the irradiation light device B is not visually observed by the perforated plate B15.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 14, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. Thereby, the display unit 100 can unitarily handle the irradiation light device B and the screen device C as a unit.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen casing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen casing C10. As shown also in FIG. 15, the screen casing C10 includes a horizontally disposed bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. Accordingly, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side where the player is located and the upper side where the irradiation light device B is located are formed. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 constituting the screen casing C10 are independently formed in a predetermined shape, and a predetermined functional component such as a fixed screen mechanism D can be attached. Has been. As a result, even if the unit of the screen device C cannot be shared as a whole, it is possible to share the unit for each plate member of the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4. Moreover, since the partial change for every board | plate member is possible, it is possible to change a specification easily for every model of the game machine 1. FIG.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Bottom plate C1)
More specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, there is a central placement portion C11 disposed at the center, and a right placement portion C12 and a left placement portion C13 disposed in the left-right direction around the center placement portion C11. Yes. These placement parts C11, C12, C13 are formed in a concave shape. The center placement portion C11 places the fixed screen mechanism D so that it can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting portion C12 and the left mounting portion C13 position the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 by fitting the lower ends of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. It is placed as possible.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the tip end portion is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side C14. As shown in FIG. 5, the front side portion C <b> 14 is brought into contact with the front surface of the intermediate support plate 301 when the display unit 100 is assembled while being placed on the intermediate support plate 301 of the cabinet 61. It is possible to perform backward positioning. The display unit 100 can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet 61 by being screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 61 through the through hole C141 of the front side C14. It is possible.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen casing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit 100 can be carried by hooking the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The opening portions C21 and C31 for operation are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction coincides with the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set to such an extent that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is assembled in the cabinet 61, first, the display unit 100 is taken out from the front side of the cabinet 61 with the upper door 62a opened. Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet 61 releases the screw fastening of the display unit 100 to the cabinet 61 and removes the screw. Then, the hand is extended into the cabinet 61, the operation openings C <b> 21 and C <b> 31 of the display unit 100 are held with both hands, and the display unit 100 is taken out of the cabinet 61. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 17, a hand is reached from one operation opening C21 of the removed display unit 100 into the screen device C, and the crank gear E21 visible in the horizontal direction is rotated from the operation opening C21. Thus, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

  In the state where the upper door 62a is opened, a hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet 61 into the space between the side wall 302 of the cabinet 61 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and from the operation opening C21. The crank gear E21 can be rotated by operating the crank gear E21. In this case, the front screen mechanism E1 can be unlocked without removing the display unit 100 from the cabinet 61.

  Further, a motor housing portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The motor housing portion C22 houses the drive motor F21 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen casing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 18, the back plate C4 of the screen casing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a relay substrate CK is provided on the back surface. The relay substrate CK collects a plurality of signal lines in the display unit 100 and enables wiring with the outside of the display unit 100 at one place. The relay substrate CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4, so that it is disposed in front of the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61. That is, the relay substrate CK is disposed in the gap between the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 5, a through hole 303 of an intermediate support plate 301 that supports the display unit 100 is disposed below the relay substrate CK, and a signal line of the relay substrate CK is inserted therethrough.

  As a result, the relay board is arranged outside the screen device C, thereby facilitating the wiring work and making it unnecessary to secure an installation space for the relay substrate CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the device C is expanded.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 18, the opening C41 for operation is formed in the backplate C4. The operation opening C41 is disposed at the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Thereby, after the display unit 100 is assembled in the cabinet 61, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is moved manually, the display unit 100 is first removed from the cabinet 61. After that, reaching out from the operation opening C41 into the screen device C and rotating the intermediate gear E23 visible in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for causing an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so as to switch irradiation targets. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D, E1, F1 will be described later.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen position relationship)
As shown in FIG. 19, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 20, the front screen mechanism E1 is provided to be rotatable between a front exposure position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that an image of the irradiated light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the reel screen mechanism F1 is provided so as to be rotatable between a reel exposure position and a reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set so that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists ahead of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that an image by irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing at the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is disposed behind the fixed screen mechanism D. Thereby, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is made shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are different in the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 so that the overlapping of the operation areas due to the rotation is minimized. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set higher than the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. Thereby, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the minimum.

  Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 exists at the standby position. Thereby, interference at the time of rotation of screen mechanism E1, F1 is prevented.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed to the bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 by screw fastening. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflection part D1, a right surface reflection part D2, a left surface reflection part D3, and a lower surface reflection part D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting portions D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B.

  In addition, if the fixed screen mechanism D is a structure which has a reflective surface of several different angles with respect to the optical axis of irradiation light, it may have a reflective part of 2 surfaces, 3 surfaces, 5 surfaces, for example, Or you may provide the reflective part of the curved or circular-arc-shaped reflective surface in which the curvature center point which becomes an continuously different angle with respect to an optical axis is located in the front side.

  The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface opposed to the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B disposed in the upper front portion of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. It is set to be. The right side reflection part D2 and the left side reflection part D3 are joined to the right side part and the left side part of the front reflection part D1, and are arranged symmetrically about the front reflection part D1. The right side reflection part D2 and the left side reflection part D3 are arranged such that the width between the front end parts is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflection part D1. As a result, the right-side reflection part D2 and the left-side reflection part D3 make the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface easier to face in the direction of the front reflection part D1, so that a part of the irradiation light appears in front while the image by the irradiation light appears. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflection part D1. In addition, with respect to the lower surface reflection portion D4, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface is easily directed toward the front reflection portion D1, a part of the irradiation light is caused to appear in the direction of the front reflection portion D1 while causing an image of the irradiation light to appear. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D described above, the brightness of the reflecting surface is set lower than the brightness of each reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, which will be described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting surface of the irradiation light is made smaller than the amount of light reflected by the reflecting surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D is prevented from being blurred due to light mixing due to irregular reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflection parts D2, D3, D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflection part D1. In this case, since the reflection of the irradiation light to the front reflection part D1 in the other reflection parts D2, D3, D4 can be reduced, white blur can be reduced while causing an image to appear strongly in the front reflection part D1.

As brightness, Brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) or the L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as other colors can be expressed by relative values with white as a reference.

  The lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If it is lower than the brightness of a surface, it will not specifically limit. For example, the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value lower by about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) than the brightness of the reflecting surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. What is necessary is just to make it black rather than the color of the coating material apply | coated to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the coating material applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the coating material applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1. What added the black pigment to the coating material apply | coated to a base material should just be used.

  In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 includes only a white pigment among white pigment and black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both a white pigment and a black pigment may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment (for example, 5 to 25% (or 5% to 25%) (or the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D is higher than the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It may be increased by about 10 to 20%). In addition, as a coating material applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, a conventionally known screen coating material can be appropriately employed and can be adjusted according to a screen type (for example, a diffusion type or a reflection type). .

  Note that the black pigment is not dispersed in the coating material applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but before the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is molded. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored to lower the brightness of the base material itself.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing irregular reflection of light, members constituting the screen casing C10 such as peripheral walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4), and the interior of the screen casing C10. It is desirable that the brightness of the other members (members other than the screen) disposed in the panel is also lowered. The brightness of these members is desirably lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen for the surrounding wall. The lower the better. That is, it is desirable that the color of the surrounding wall is closer to black.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 22, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface, and a front screen support E12 having patterns such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 has a projection surface E11a formed in a flat shape so that an image without distortion appears when irradiated with irradiation light.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 that holds the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to that of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. In addition, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of a deep part and a shallow part. The shallow portion is realized by a stepped portion E121a formed at the peripheral portion of the front screen support base E12 and a stepped portion E121b formed linearly at both ends in the short direction passing through the center portion.

  Accordingly, the front screen member E11 accommodated in the holding recess E121 is abutted and supported by the stepped portion E121a at the peripheral edge and the linear stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing distortion on the projection surface E11a.

  Further, the front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial region around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to a game effect is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 configured as described above are formed separately and then integrated by bonding with an adhesive. Thus, the front screen mechanism E1 is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11 even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to sink marks on the projection surface E11a.

  Note that the method for fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening may be employed.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 are each produced by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) that can cause sink marks when injection molding is performed is appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front screen drive mechanism E2 includes a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end of the front screen mechanism E1, and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. And a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B includes a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The upper end (one end) of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is coupled to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 25, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported on the right movable body base C5 of FIG. 15 at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 is capable of rotating the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) with the intermediate position E22a as the rotation center.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 25, the center line in the upper region (the straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint of the upper end side of the crank member E22) is in the vertical direction in the standby posture. Is set to On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint at the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set so that the lower side is inclined more forward than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape when viewed from the side. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and in the slide groove E22b, a surface corresponding to the straight portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 is set parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (distance between the two straight portions) is substantially equal to the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. Further, the upper end portion of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 contacts the upper end surface (surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end portion of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 in FIG. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is a line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, and the intermediate position E22a and the slide member in the crank member E22. It is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of E26.

  As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force is applied in the direction in which the lower region of the crank member E22 is rotated, the rotation center position in the direction in which all components of this force are applied. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having zero degrees of freedom with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as a free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The motor shaft gear E24 is connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor E25. Thereby, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all the components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. As shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, a line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is an intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. Since it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the slide member E26, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26 when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts rotating.

  When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and a one-degree-of-freedom two-joint link is formed in which the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface. When the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates about the intermediate position E22a, and the upper region of the crank member E22 rotates. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is in the stop state 0 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, and gradually increases to an intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposure posture (FIG. 27). After the maximum speed is reached, the vehicle gradually decelerates and becomes the stop state 0 when the exposure posture and the standby posture are reached. Thus, the rotation can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration of the crank gear E21 is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failures and wear due to overloading of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

  As shown in FIG. 15, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3 so that the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. Yes.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 made of a curved plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. And a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end.

  The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape that approximates the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface that is the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is made visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position. Further, the surface of the reel screen portion F11 is formed with a pattern at the peripheral edge, and the inner peripheral area of the peripheral edge is a projection surface. On the projection surface, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposure position, an image can appear by irradiation of irradiation light.

  One ends of the left and right reel screen support portions F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen portion F11. On the other hand, the other end portions of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 have protrusions (not shown). The protruding portion protrudes in the horizontal direction outside the reel screen support portions F12 and F13, and is connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to be a rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Production by screen device)
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are executed using the display unit 100 described above. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms that cause an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, an effect using a flat image display, a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) It is possible to execute an effect using a certain video display and an effect using a curved video display.

  For example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the front screen mechanism E1, the image appears on the flat projection surface E11a, thereby distorting when irradiating the irradiation light. An image with no image can appear, and an effect using this planar image can be executed.

  Further, for example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the fixed screen mechanism D, a plurality of reflection portions of the fixed screen mechanism D cause a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect). It is possible to cause a video with a depth to appear and to perform an effect using the video with a sense of depth.

  Further, for example, when the screen mechanism for causing an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the reel screen mechanism F1, by causing the image to appear on the reel screen portion F11 formed of a curved flat plate, A curved image can appear, and an effect using the curved image can be executed.

[Display example of first sub display device]
Next, a display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a part of a display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201. As shown in FIG. 29, the first sub display device 201 displays a plurality of display screens including a top screen 211, a menu screen 212, and game information screens 213, 214, and 215. The plurality of display screens are switched according to the player's operation received via the touch sensor 201a.

  The top screen 211 is an initial screen among the display screens displayed on the first sub display device 201, and displays a menu button 211a and a summary game history 211b. The menu button 211a is an operation button for calling the menu screen 212 when operated (tapped) by the player. The outline game history 211b displays a part of the game history (outline game history) in the game history in the pachislot machine 1. In the present embodiment, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (the number of games) in the pachislot machine 1 are displayed as the outline game history.

  The menu screen 212 is a menu of a display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201. The return button 212a, the registration button 212b, the explanation button 212c, the array payout button 212d, the reach eye button 212e, and the WEB A site button 212f and a volume button 212g are displayed. The return button 212a is an operation button that calls the top screen 211 when operated by the player. Also, the registration button 212b to the volume button 212g are operation buttons that call up corresponding display screens when operated by the player.

  For example, when the registration button 212b is operated by the player, a registration screen (not shown) for registering the player who is playing the game is called. In recent pachislot machines, a service is widely available in which a player is registered for each model, and various information such as the achievement status of a defined mission is managed based on the player's previous game history. . The registration screen called by the registration button 212b is a display screen for registering a player when receiving provision of this service.

  When the explanation button 212c is operated by the player, an explanation screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. The contents to be explained on the explanation screen include, for example, descriptions of the specifications of the pachislot machine 1 such as a bonus winning probability and an ART winning probability for each set value, and an introduction of characters appearing in the production of the pachislot machine 1.

  Further, when the array payout button 212d is operated by the player, an array payout screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. On the array payout screen, for example, the correspondence (payout table) between the combination of symbols determined to be a prize in the pachislot machine 1 and the benefits when determined to be a winning, or the symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R Columns (reel arrangement) etc. are displayed.

  When the reach eye button 212e is operated by the player, the reach eye screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. Reach eyes in the pachi-slot machine 1 are displayed on the reach eye screen. In addition, the reach eyes are a combination of symbols to which a special privilege is given by being displayed along the active line. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the reach eyes of the reach eyes shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. This is a combination of symbols. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a combination of reach-lip patterns is displayed along the active line, a state advantageous for the player (for example, a bonus state, normal ART or CT (FIG. 33)) is displayed. See))).

  When the WEB site button 212f is operated by the player, the WEB introduction screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. On the WEB introduction screen, a two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) indicating a URL of an arbitrary WEB site such as a special WEB site provided for each model of the pachislot machine 1 or a WEB site of the manufacturer of the pachislot machine 1 Is displayed. The player can access the corresponding WEB site by reading the two-dimensional code displayed on the WEB introduction screen with a mobile phone or the like.

  When the volume button 212g is operated by the player, a volume adjustment screen (not shown) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 9L and 9R is called. The player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of the pachislot machine 1 via the volume adjustment screen.

  Here, since the first sub display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs an effect, the first sub-display device 201 can be controlled separately from the display unit 100, and during the game (ie, the display unit 100 executes the effect). Medium), the display of the first sub-display device 201 can be switched. For the player, for example, there is a case where it is desired to know a character appearing in an effect on the display unit 100. In such a case, the explanation button 212c is operated to call up the explanation screen, and the relationship between the characters can be obtained. It can be grasped during the game. Further, from the viewpoint of the player, there is a case where it is desired to grasp a symbol to be used as a guide for winning a rare combination during reel rotation when a so-called rare combination is won. The reel arrangement can be grasped by operating and calling the array payout screen.

  The game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are display screens that display a detailed game history including a summary game history displayed on the top screen of the game histories of the pachislot machine 1. The game information screen 213 displays a return button 213a, a menu button 213b, a previous button 213c, a next button 213d, and a game history 213e. The return button 213a and the menu button 213b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. Further, the previous button 213c and the next button 213d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen when operated by the player. When the previous button 213c is operated, the game information screen is displayed from the game information screen 213. When the display screen is switched to 215 and the next button 213d is operated, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 213 to the game information screen 214. The game history 213e displays the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (games) in the pachislot machine 1.

  The game information screen 214 displays a return button 214a, a menu button 214b, a previous button 214c, a next button 214d, and a game history 214e. The return button 214a and the menu button 214b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. Further, the previous button 214c and the next button 214d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order by being operated by the player. The game history 214e displays the number of CZ (chance zone) entry and success in the pachislot machine 1. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, since CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 are included as CZ, the number of rushes and the number of successes of CZ1 to CZ3 are displayed in the game history 214e.

  The game information screen 215 displays a return button 215a, a menu button 215b, a previous button 215c, a next button 215d, and a game history 215e. The return button 215a and the menu button 215b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. Further, the previous button 215c and the next button 215d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order by being operated by the player. In addition, the game history 215e displays the number of wins of the so-called small role in the pachislot machine 1 and the winning probability (the fraction in which the numerator is 1).

  The display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 may be switched based on a tap operation on an operation button displayed on each display screen, or may be switched based on a swipe operation on the display screen. It is good.

[Circuit configuration of pachislot machine]
This completes the description of the structure of the pachislot machine 1. Next, with reference to FIG.30 and FIG.31, the structure of the circuit with which the pachislot machine 1 in this Embodiment is provided is demonstrated. The pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, an external concentration terminal board 73 and peripheral devices (actuators) that are electrically connected to these.

<Main control board>
FIG. 30 shows an electrical configuration mainly including the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

(Microcomputer)
The main control board 71 includes the microcomputer 30 installed on the circuit board as a main component. The microcomputer 30 includes a CPU (hereinafter, main CPU) 31, a ROM (hereinafter, main ROM) 32, and a RAM (hereinafter, main RAM) 33.

  The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control board 72, and the like. The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

(Random number generator, etc.)
The main CPU 31 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate clock pulses.

  The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts at least one value from the generated random numbers according to the application.

(Peripheral devices and circuits)
Peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 30 include stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R and a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper) 40. The input / output ports of the microcomputer 30 include a motor drive circuit 39, a hopper drive circuit 41, a reel position detection circuit 50, a payout completion signal circuit 51, an external concentration terminal board 73, Various circuits such as the door relay board 74 and various boards are connected.

  The motor drive circuit 39 constitutes symbol variation means and controls the driving of stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. That is, the motor drive circuit 39 changes the symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition.

  The reel position detection circuit 50 detects a reel index indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part according to each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation.

  The stepping motors 49L, 49C, and 49R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of output pulses and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is transmitted to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time one pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate at a constant angle.

  The main CPU 31 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. Thereby, the main CPU 31 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

  Next, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 33. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 33 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 50.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 31 manages the symbol counter to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  The hopper drive circuit 41 controls the operation of the hopper 40. The payout completion signal circuit 51 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 40S provided in the hopper 40, and checks whether or not the medals paid out from the hopper 40 have reached the payout number. .

(External concentration terminal board)
The external concentration terminal board 73 receives signals such as the number of inserted / withdrawn medals from the main control board 71, the number of games, information on whether or not bonus is activated, and displays such signals as the number of games and the number of bonus operations. Output to an external display or game room host computer. The external indicator is installed, for example, above the pachislot machine 1, and updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and the bonus operation, or notifies the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

  Here, the medal insertion signal is a signal that makes it possible to recognize the medal insertion and is output when the start lever 6 is operated. The medal payout signal is a signal that enables recognition of medal payout or replay, and is output at the time of medal payout (including credit storage) or replay operation.

(Door relay board)
The door relay board 74 is a board that relays wiring between the main control board 71 and various buttons and switches and the information display 14. Further, the door relay board 74 is connected to the sub control board 72 through the sub relay board 75. The door relay board 74 is connected to the sub relay board 75 so as to be able to transmit information only, and information is not sent from the sub relay board 75. As a result, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are set to one-way communication capable of transmitting information only from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72.

  The door relay board 74 is connected to a start switch 6S, a stop switch 7S, a medal sensor 42S, a MAX bet switch 11S, a 1 bet switch (not shown), and a settlement switch 13S.

  The start switch 6S constitutes a start operation detecting means, and detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation). Further, the stop switch 7S constitutes a stop operation detecting means, and detects that each of the three stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R is pressed (stop operation) by the player.

  The medal sensor 42S detects that the medal received in the medal insertion slot 22 has passed through the selector. The MAX bet switch 11S detects that the MAX bet button 11 has been pressed by the player. The 1-bet switch detects that the 1-bet button has been pressed by the player. The main CPU 31 validates the active line based on the detection results of the medal sensor 42S, or the MAX bet switch 11S and the 1 bet switch. Further, the settlement switch 13S detects that the settlement button 13 has been pressed by the player.

  Further, the door relay board 74 is provided inside the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, respectively, and the stop button internal LEDs 107L, 107C, and 107R for displaying the receiving state, and the number of medals and an advantageous stop operation are uniquely defined. Is connected to an information display 14 (instruction monitor) for informing the user.

<Sub control board>
FIG. 31 shows an electrical configuration mainly including the sub-control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The sub control board 72 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control board 71.

  The sub-control board 72 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter referred to as sub CPU) 81, a ROM cartridge board 82, a RAM (hereinafter referred to as sub RAM) 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86.

  The sub CPU 81 performs video, sound, and light output control according to a control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82 in accordance with a command transmitted from the main control substrate 71. The ROM cartridge substrate 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. The control program stored in the program storage area includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board 71, a production random number value, and the production content (production data) determination. An effect registration task for performing registration, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the display unit 100 based on the determined contents of the effect, a lamp control task for controlling the output of light by various LEDs 101, a speaker 9L, A program such as a voice control task for controlling sound output by 9R is included.

  In the data storage area, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting various effects, a storage area for storing animation data relating to creation of video, and sound data relating to BGM and sound effects And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern.

  The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the display unit 100, the first sub display device 201, and the second sub display device 202 are connected to the sub control substrate 72 via a predetermined relay substrate. For example, the sub-control board 72 is connected to the display unit 100 through an accessory relay board (not shown), and the first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device are connected via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). 202 is connected. The display unit 100, the first sub display device 201, and the second sub display device 202 are individually controlled under the control of the sub control board 72.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, a sub-relay board 75 is provided between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, and relays wiring that connects the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. The sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 and various peripheral devices by relaying the wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 72. . For example, the sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 to the various LEDs 101, the reel illuminator 102, and the bet button LED 103 via an LED board (not shown). The sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 and the speakers 9L and 9R via a sound I / O board (not shown), and the sub control board 75 via a touch sensor relay board (not shown). 72 and the touch sensor 201a are connected.

[Pachislot machine game state transition flow]
Next, a gaming state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 31) of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment and its transition flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. FIG.

<Basic game state transition flow>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of bonus winning / acting, the type of internal winning combination related to replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 32, the main control board 71 distinguishes a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state based on whether or not the bonus (F_BB1, 2) is won / actuated. Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state where the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated, and the inter-flag state is a state where the bonus is won and the bonus is not activated, and the bonus state. Is a state in which the bonus is activated.

  Whether or not a bonus is won is managed based on data stored in an internal winning combination storing area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33, and whether or not a bonus is activated is determined by a game state flag provided in the main RAM 33. Management is based on data stored in a storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the bonus winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, the main control board 71 provides six types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state, in which the type of internal winning combination related to replay and the winning probability are different from each other. Note that the RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 gaming state is an internal winning combination related to replay. Is a gaming state in which the probability determined as a medium probability is medium. In addition, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the combination related to replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high.

  These RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state are managed based on data stored in a gaming state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. Specifically, the pachislot machine 1 has five flags, an RT1 gaming state flag to an RT5 gaming state flag, and manages the RT gaming state by managing on / off of these flags by the main RAM 33. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT gaming state corresponding to the RT gaming state flag that is on as the current RT gaming state. When all the RT gaming state flags are OFF, the main control board 71 specifies that the current RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the main control board 71 (1) in the bonus non-winning state, when the bonus winning combination (F_BB1, 2) is determined as the internal winning combination, the game from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state Transition state. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state when (2) a bonus-related combination is won in the inter-flag state.

  Further, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state when the number of medals exceeding the prescribed number (216) is paid out in (3) bonus state, and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state. In this RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 (4) transitions the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state when 20 games have elapsed, and (5) displays the bell spilling points before the 20 games have elapsed. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. In the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when (5) bell spillage is displayed.

  In addition, when the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the (6) RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and (7) the RT4 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Further, the main control board 71 (8) transitions the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when the bell spill or RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state. When a spill or RT2 transition lip is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

  Here, the bell spilled eyes are determined for each push order bell type when the push order bells (F_3 choice bell_1st, F_3 choice bell_2nd, F_3 choice bell_3rd) to be described later are determined as internal winning combinations. This is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. In addition, RT2 transition lip is not in the pressing order determined for each type of maintenance lip when a later-described maintenance lip (F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, F_maintenance lip_3rd) is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, RT3 transition lip is the order of pressing determined for each RT3 lip type when RT3 lip (F_RT3 lip_1st, F_RT3 lip_213, F_RT3 lip_231, F_RT3 lip_3rd) described later is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, the RT4 transition lip is determined in the order of pressing determined for each RT4 lip type when an RT4 lip (F_RT4 lip_123, F_RT4 lip_132, F_RT4 lip_2nd, F_RT4 lip_3rd) described later is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct.

<Game state transition flow regarding presence / absence of notification>
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of bonus winning / acting, the type of internal winning combination related to replay, and the winning probability thereof, while notifying the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. The game state is managed based on whether or not to do so. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a game state transition flow regarding the presence or absence of notification.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 distinguishes between the general gaming state and the ART gaming state based on the presence / absence of notification. The general game state is basically a game state (non-ART) in which the content of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a disadvantageous game state for the player. On the other hand, the ART gaming state is a gaming state in which a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player will play a game from the general gaming state (with a bonus state depending on the situation) to shift to an ART gaming state that is advantageous to the player. .

  The general gaming state is a gaming state that is not win for ART among the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 33, the general gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a CZ (chance zone). The normal game state and the CZ are game states in which the game state of the transfer destination is different, and in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the game state is changed from the normal game state to the CZ, and from CZ to the ART game state. Is done.

  The normal gaming state is the most unfavorable gaming state in the pachislot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 33, the normal gaming state may shift to CZ. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the lottery for transition to CZ is performed. (A) When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to CZ.

  CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with a high expectation for transitioning to the ART gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of transitioning from CZ to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, in CZ, a lottery for transitioning to ART is performed. (B) When this transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from CZ to the normal gaming state. When winning the transition lottery, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) through the ART preparation.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which an RT is won among the RT4 gaming states, and starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after winning the ART. As shown in FIG. 32, since the RT4 gaming state transitions from the RT0 to RT2 gaming state via the RT3 gaming state, the ART gaming state is not immediately started even after the ART win. Absent. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the period until the transition to the RT4 gaming state after winning the ART is determined as being prepared for ART, and a stop operation necessary for transitioning to the RT4 gaming state is notified during the ART preparation.

  Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which an ART is won in the RT4 gaming state. As shown in FIG. 33, the ART gaming state is normally composed of ART and CT. Normal ART and CT are game states having different game characteristics, and normal ART displays a stop operation (for example, a combination of symbols having a large number of medals to be paid out) for a predetermined number of games. And a stop operation necessary for maintaining the RT4 gaming state), and the CT notifies the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and adds an additional duration of the normal ART. It is a gaming state that functions as a chance zone. In addition, during CT, a game is normally performed without digesting the duration of ART.

  As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility that the normal ART shifts to the CT or the general gaming state. Specifically, in the normal ART, a lottery for transition to CT is performed. (D) When the lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to CT. Further, the duration of the normal ART is managed, and (E) When this duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). Although the normal ART duration management method is arbitrary, the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment manages the duration based on the number of games. Of course, the duration may be managed not by the number of games but by the number of medals or the number of medals paid out during normal ART, and the number of notifications that affect the payout of medals during normal ART (navigation) The duration may be managed according to the number of times.

  As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from CT to normal ART. Specifically, the duration of the CT is managed, and (F) When this duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from CT to normal ART. In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, CT is managed by the duration of one set of eight games, which will be described in detail later (see FIG. 63).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility that a transition is made from a general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ) and ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to a bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, (2) when a bonus role is won in the general gaming state and the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 changes the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state. To migrate.

  In the bonus state, a lottery for shifting to ART is performed. (G) If the winning lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). (However, if the game state has shifted from the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state, the main control board 71 does not change from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). ) To shift the gaming state). Further, when (H) the winning lottery in the bonus state is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state is completed, the game state shifts to the RT1 game state. Therefore, when the game state is shifted from the bonus state to the ART game state, the main control board 71 is preparing for the ART. The game state is transferred to the ART game state via the route.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Pattern arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the twenty symbol positions “0” to “19” and symbols corresponding to these symbol positions.

  Symbol positions “0” to “19” indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “19” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The design types are “White 7”, “Blue 7”, “Chile 1”, “Chile 2”, “Chile”, “Replay”, “Hat”, “Cactus 1”, “Cactus 2”. And “Cactus 3”.

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34 assigns the symbol located at the middle stage of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (the symbol passing through the middle stage of the display window 4) to the symbol position “0”, and the reel 3L. Correspondence relationships are defined in which symbol positions “0” to “19” are assigned to each of the 20 symbols in the order of movement in the 3C and 3R rotation directions.

  In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of symbol positioned in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Also, as shown in FIG. 34, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 34 represents codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  As described above, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are “white 7”, “blue 7”, “top 1”, “top 2”, “bottom”, “replay”, “hat” ”,“ Cactus 1 ”,“ Cactus 2 ”and“ Cactus 3 ”.

  In the symbol code table, “00000001” is assigned as data to the “white 7” symbol (symbol code 1). “00000010” is assigned as data to the “blue 7” symbol (symbol code 2). “00000011” is assigned to the “Chile top 1” symbol (symbol code 3).

  Similarly, for “Chile top 2”, “Chile bottom”, “Replay”, “Hat”, “Cactus 1”, “Cactus 2” and “Cactus 3” (symbol codes 4 to 10) , “00000100” to “00001010” are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 33 when the symbol combination is displayed, and when the symbol combination is displayed. Stipulates the correspondence with the benefits (number of medals paid out).

  In this embodiment, a winning combination is determined when the symbol combination displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination (combination) defined in the symbol combination table. When it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given privileges such as paying out medals, replaying (replaying), and bonus game (acting equipment continuous operation device). In addition, when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line does not coincide with any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “displacement”. In other words, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “missing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination of “missing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and an item “displacement” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define “disappearance”.

  In the data column in the symbol combination table, information for identifying a symbol combination displayed along the active line is defined. Specifically, in the data column, a “storage area” in which data of a corresponding symbol combination is stored and a “data (bit corresponding to a symbol combination in 1-byte data) stored in the storage region” Data for designating “)” is defined. In the present embodiment, each symbol combination is determined by using 22 1-byte storage areas. For example, “C_BB1” illustrated in FIG. 35 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of the storage area 0.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. Each combination is defined with a combination name corresponding to the role of the combination and the type of symbol constituting the combination.

  The number of payouts defined in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 37, when the combination name “C_9 sheets A_01” is displayed, nine medals are paid out.

  The content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination. Referring to FIG. 35, for example, the combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are combinations of symbols related to BB, and when displayed along the active line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 32). ).

  Further, the combination names “R_RT transition A_01” to “R_RT transition B_02” are bell spills. When a bell spill is displayed along the active line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

  The combination names “C_maintenance lip A_01” to “C_maintenance lip G_01” are replays. The replay is a combination of symbols in which “replay-replay-replay” is displayed on any one of the three lines of the bottom line, the top line, and the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4. When the replay is displayed along the active line, the replay is activated.

  Further, the combination names “C_RT2 Lip A_01” and “C_RT2 Lip A_02” are RT2 transition Lips. The RT2 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which “Replay-Replay-Replay” is displayed on the cross-up line displayed on the display window 4. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed along the active line, the re-gaming operation is performed and the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

  Further, the combination name “C_RT3 Lip_01” is an RT3 transition reply. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which “replay-replay-replay” is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed on the display window 4. When the RT3 transition lip is displayed along the active line, the re-gaming operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

  Further, the combination names “C_RT4 Lip A_01” to “C_RT4 Lip D_02” are RT4 transition Lips. When the RT4 transition lip is displayed along the active line, the re-gaming operation is performed and the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

  Further, the combination names “C_Chilli Lip A_01” to “C_1 Chilli Lip D_01” are Chile Lip. The chili lip is a combination of symbols in which a chile symbol is displayed on the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, the symbols “Chile top 1” and the symbol “Chilli bottom” are continuously arranged on each reel. The Chile symbol is a name when the symbol “Chile top 1” and the symbol “Chile bottom” are regarded as one symbol. When the chili lip is displayed along the active line, the replay is activated.

  Of the chili lips, the combination name “C_chili lip A_01” is a combination of symbols in which the chile symbol is displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed on the display window 4. Sometimes referred to as a “single dust”. Among the chili lips, the combination names “C_chili lip B_01” and “C_chili lip C_01” are combinations of symbols in which chile symbols are displayed on two of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. In the following, it may be referred to as a “two-line chili lip”. Among the chili lips, the combination names “C_Chilli lip D_01” to “C_1 correct chili lip D_01” are combinations of symbols (or the corresponding) This is a symbol combination that is displayed when a stop operation for displaying a symbol combination fails (so-called “missing eye”), and may be hereinafter referred to as “triple lip”.

  Further, the combination names “C_reach eye lip A_01” to “C_reach eye lip P_02” are reach eye lips. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye, and is a symbol combination in which a special symbol combination is displayed on the display window 4L. For example, the combination name “C_reach eye lip A_01” is a combination of symbols in which “white 7-white 7-white 7” is displayed along the top line. When the reach lip is displayed along the active line, the re-game is activated.

  In addition, the combination names “C_RB combination A_01” to “C_RB combination G_02” are the ninth in the BB. When 9 out of BBs are displayed along the active line, 9 medals are paid out. Of the 9 BB appearances, the combination of symbols excluding the combination names “C_RB role C_01” and “C_RB role C_02” is 7 symbols (designs) on any of the 5 lines displayed on the display window 4. “White 7” or “Blue 7”) is a combination of symbols displayed side by side (or a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination is failed), Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “seven in BB”. On the other hand, the combination names “C_RB role C_01” and “C_RB role C_02” are combinations of symbols in which two symbols are displayed side by side on any of the five lines. Sometimes called.

  The combination names “C_9 sheets A_01” to “C_9 sheets H_04” are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which “hat-hat-hat” is displayed on any of the five lines displayed on the display window 4. When a bell is displayed along the active line, nine medals are paid out.

  The combination names “C_1st_A_01” to “C_2nd_B_04” are the first ones. When the first item is displayed along the active line, one medal is paid out. Further, the combination names “C_SP1_01” and “C_SP2_01” are the final outcomes. When a confirmed outcome is displayed along the active line, one medal is paid out.

  The combination names “C_3 sheets A_01” to “C_3 sheets F_01” are cacti. When the cactus is displayed along the active line, three medals are paid out. Also, the combination names “C_weak 2 sheets A_01” to “C_weak 2 sheets B_03” are weak cherries, and the combination names “C_strong 2 sheets A_01” to “C_strong 2 sheets C_09” are strong cherries. When a weak cherry or a strong cherry is displayed along the active line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Subsequently, an internal lottery table referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state and defines lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 39 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and FIG. 40 is an internal lottery table referred to in the RT5 gaming state or the bonus state.

  In the present embodiment, random numbers for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred.

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the combination to which the lottery is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random values that may be extracted (65536)”.

  In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination change according to the type of RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables in the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 39, it can be seen that the types of winning combinations and the winning probabilities determined as internal winning combinations in the respective gaming states are different. As the most characteristic point, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “F_Chill Lip (No. 25)” to “F_Leach Eye Lip D (No. 31)” are internal winning in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state without being determined as a combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when “F_chililip (No. 25)” to “F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)” is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT4 gaming state, a specific control (described later) This flag conversion will be described later.

  Even in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, “F_reach eye lip A to D” may be determined as an internal winning combination together with “F_BB1, 2” (No. 3-6, No. 15-18), “F_reach eye lip AD” is not determined as an internal winning combination alone. Therefore, when “F_reach eye lip A to D” is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state (from the player, the combination of symbols corresponding to “F_reach eye lip A to D” is When displayed, the combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is simultaneously determined as the internal winning combination.

  Further, in the RT5 gaming state, which is an inter-flag state, the bonus-related combination is carried over as an internal winning combination as described above. Therefore, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 gaming state shown in FIG. 40, the winning combination relating to the carry-over bonus is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIG. 41 to FIG. 46 are comparison tables showing the correspondence between combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the active line in each internal winning combination when each winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on the active line in the combination determined as the internal winning combination.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the game state, and when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a combination of symbols can be displayed. In the correspondence tables shown in FIGS. 42 to 48, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when a combination is determined as an internal winning combination are listed. Even combinations of symbols marked with may not be displayed.

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1, stop control (for example, a drawing to be preferentially drawn) is made different depending on a combination of symbols that can be stopped and the current gaming state. Even a combination of symbols with a mark may not be displayed. Therefore, the correspondence relationship between the type of combination and the combination of symbols actually stopped and displayed is shown in FIGS.

<Correspondence between winning combination during non-flagging and combination of symbols to be stopped>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship (a part of the combinations are omitted) between the winning combination in the gaming state excluding the inter-flag state and the combination of symbols displayed to be stopped. In the pachi-slot machine 1, “push order combination”, which is a combination in which the combination of symbols displayed according to the order of the stop operation (push order) is different, is provided as a plurality of combinations. 47. The symbol combination associated with the “push order correct answer” in FIG. 47 is a symbol combination advantageous for the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the push order, and corresponds to the “push order incorrect answer”. The attached symbol combination is a symbol combination that is disadvantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the pressing order. When a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, the correct pressing order is notified, and as a result, a combination of symbols associated with the “pressing correct answer” is displayed. Even in the ART gaming state, the push order that is incorrect may be notified, but details will be described later.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the push order represents the push order that is the correct answer. Specifically, the end “1st” of the name of the combination means that the correct pressing order is that the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L, and the end “2nd” of the name of the combination is The correct push order means that the first stop operation is for the middle reel 3C, and the last “3rd” in the name of the combination is the correct push order and the first stop operation is the right reel. It means that it is for 3R. In addition, the end “123” of the name of the role means that the correct order of pushing is “left, middle, right”, and the end of the name of the role “132” is that where the correct order is “left”. , “Right, middle” means that the end of the name of the role “213” means that the correct answer is “middle, left, right”, and the end of the name of the role “231”. Means that the correct order of pushing is “left, right, middle”.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the combination “F_Chilelip” is a combination in which the combination of symbols displayed differs depending on the pressing order. When the pressing order is correct, FIG. 41 of the Chililip (see FIG. 35). When any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 46 is displayed along the active line, and the pressing order is not correct, the replay (see FIG. 35) in FIGS. Any of the displayed displayable symbol combinations is displayed along the active line. Referring to FIG. 41 to FIG. 46, the role “F_Chillilip” cannot display the triple chililip (“C_Chillilip D_01” to “C_1 correct chililip D_01”), and can display the single chililip or the double chililip (“C_Chillilip”). A_01 ”,“ C_Chillilip B_01 ”, and“ C_Chillilip C_01 ”) can be displayed. That is, the combination “F_Chillilip” is a combination that cannot display a triple Chililip.

  In addition, the combinations “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the active line, and the push order is not correct, FIGS. 41 to 41 in the replay (see FIG. 35). One of the displayable symbol combinations shown in 46 is displayed along the active line. Referring to FIGS. 41 to 46, it can be seen that the combinations “F_accurate dust” and “F_1 accurate dust” can display triple dust. In other words, the combination “F_acceptance lip” or “F_1 accuracy lip” is a role that can display a triple lip.

  In addition, the combinations “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When the pressing order is correct, the reach eye lip ( One of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 41 to FIG. 46 in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 is displayed along the active line, and if the pressing order is not correct, replay (FIG. 35), one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the effective line.

  Note that the correct answer push order in the roles “F_Chile Lip”, “F_Challeng Lip”, “F_1 Chilli Lip” and “F_Reach Eye Lip A” to “F_Reach Eye Lip D” may be arbitrary. In the embodiment, the pressing order in which the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L is the correct pressing order. Therefore, for example, in a game in which the combination “F_reach eye lip A” is determined as the internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach lip is displayed. Will be.

  For the combinations “F_maintenance lip A” and “F_maintenance lip B”, any of the combinations of symbols that can be displayed shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 in the replay (see FIG. 35) is an effective line. It is displayed along. In addition, the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip_1st” to “F_Maintenance Lip_3rd” have different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the pressing order. If the pressing order is correct, the replay is performed (see FIG. 35). If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the active line, and the push order is not correct, the RT2 transition lip (see FIG. 35) Any one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the effective line.

  In addition, the combinations “F_RT3 Lip_1st” to “F_RT3 Lip_1rd” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition Lip (see FIG. 35). Is displayed along the effective line, and if the pressing order is not correct, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 in the replay (see FIG. 35) becomes the active line. Displayed along.

  In addition, the combinations “F_RT4 Lip_123” to “F_RT4 Lip_3rd” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT4 transition Lip (see FIG. 35). Is displayed along the effective line, and if the pressing order is not correct, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 in the replay (see FIG. 35) becomes the active line. Displayed along.

  In addition, the combinations “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” have different combinations of symbols to be displayed according to the pressing order. If the pressing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 37). Is displayed along the active line, and when the pressing order is not correct, a bell spilled eye (refer to FIG. 35) or a single item (refer to FIGS. 37 and 38) is displayed.

  For the combination “F_common bell”, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 among the bells (see FIG. 37) is displayed along the active line regardless of the pressing order. In addition, the combinations “F_Cabo 1” and “F_Cabo 2” indicate that any one of the combinations of symbols that can be displayed shown in FIGS. Displayed.

  In addition, for the combination “weak chilli”, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 among the weak cherries (see FIG. 38) is displayed along the active line regardless of the pressing order. For the combinations “F_Strong 1” and “F_Strong 2”, any of the combinations of symbols that can be displayed shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the strong cherries (see FIG. 38) is valid regardless of the pressing order. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence relationship between winning combination between flags and combination of symbols to be stopped>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a winning combination in the inter-flag state and a combination of symbols to be displayed in a stopped state (some combinations are omitted). In particular, BB (“C_BB1” is displayed during the inter-flag state. “C_BB2”) is displayed. In FIG. 48, “◯” indicates that BB can be displayed, and “X” indicates that BB cannot be displayed.

  In addition, when BB cannot be displayed, the combination of symbols according to the combination other than the combination related to the bonus determined as the internal winning combination is displayed. The combinations of symbols displayed in accordance with the combination other than the combination related to the bonus are as shown in FIG. For example, in the combination “F_BB1 + F_Chillilip”, BB cannot be displayed, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination “F_Chillilip” in FIG. 47 is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, it is possible to display only the combination of symbols displayed in the correct push order shown in FIG. 47, or display only the combination of symbols displayed in the incorrect push order. It may be.

  For example, in the combination “F_BB1 + F_3 selection bell_1st”, since BB cannot be displayed, the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” in FIG. 47 is displayed. In this case, only the bells that are displayed when the pressing order is correct may be displayed, and the bell spilled or the first sheet that is displayed when the pressing order is incorrect may not be displayed. Further, in the case of the combination “F_BB1 + F_RT3 Lip_1st”, only the replay displayed when the pressing order is incorrect may be displayed, and the RT3 transition lip displayed when the pressing order is correct may be disabled.

  As shown in FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, when any of the combination related to the bonus and “out of”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, or “F_special 3” is determined as the internal winning combination, BB can be displayed.

<Abbreviation of the winning role>
As described above, the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the combination of symbols to be stopped is described. Subsequently, a data table used when performing various types of lottery in a general gaming state, an ART gaming state, and the like will be described. However, in the following, since the winning combination used when referring to the data table is abbreviated, the data table The abbreviations for the winning combination will be described before the explanation. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing abbreviations for winning combinations.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the following, the roles “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” are called the role “BB”, and the roles “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” are called the roles “push order bell”, The role “F_Common Bell” is called the role “Common Bell”, the roles “F_Sabo 1” and “F_Cabo 2” are called the role “Cactus”, the role “F_Weak Chile” is called the role “Weak Cherry”, and the role “F_Strong” “Chile 1” and “F_Strong Chile 2” are called “Strong Cherry”.

  In addition, the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chicking Lip” are called “Triple Chile Lip” when winning the flag conversion lottery, and “Replay” when not winning the flag conversion lottery. Similarly, the combinations “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” are called “reach eye lip” when winning the flag conversion lottery, and “replay” when not winning the flag conversion lottery.

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, the flag conversion lottery will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the RT4 gaming state, any one of the roles “F_Challenging Lip”, “F_1 Chanting Lip”, “F_Leach Eye Lip A” to “F_Reach Eye Lip D” is independently used as an internal winning combination. When determined, a flag conversion lottery is performed. And in the pachislot machine 1, when winning this flag conversion lottery, a special privilege (for example, adding the number of ART games or CT winning) is given.

  As shown in FIG. 47, for the combinations “F_Chief Lip” and “F_1 Chilli Lip”, the combination of “Triple Chilli Lip” is displayed when the correct answer is pressed, and the “Replay” symbol is combined when the answer is incorrect. Is displayed. When the pachislot machine 1 wins the flag conversion lottery, the combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chilli Lip” are treated as the “Triple Chilli Lip”, and the information for displaying the symbol combination of “Triple Chilli Lip” is displayed. (For example, press down to target the Chile symbol). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combinations “F_Challenged Lip” and “F_1 Chick Lip” are treated as “Replay” and information for displaying the combination of symbols of “Replay” is notified (for example, , The push order other than the forward push is notified).

  Similarly, for the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the combination of symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed at the correct pressing order and the combination of "replay" at the incorrect pressing order Is displayed. In the pachislot machine 1, when winning the flag conversion lottery, the roles “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” are treated as the role “reach eye lip”, and the combination of the symbols of “reach eye lip” is used. Information to be displayed is notified (for example, the symbol “white 7” is aimed by pressing forward). On the other hand, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, information for displaying the combination of symbols of “Replay” by treating the combinations “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” as the role “replay”. Is notified.

  By performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification, when winning the flag conversion lottery, a combination of symbols of “three-line chili lip” or “reach eye lip” is displayed and a special privilege is given. From the pachislot machine 1, a special privilege is given in response to winning the flag conversion lottery, but from the player, a special privilege is given by displaying the combination of “triple chili lip” symbols. You will feel granted.

  In order to improve the gameability of the pachislot machine, it may be preferable that the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given is different depending on the state. Since stop control (combination of displayed symbols) varies depending on the type of internal winning combination, as a method of varying the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which a privilege is given depending on the state, the winning probability of the combination is varied. (In the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination can be varied depending on whether the bonus is activated or the RT gaming state. For example, only the RT4 gaming state is the gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state. In addition, other game states such as RT6 gaming state and RT7 gaming state may be provided). However, since the opportunity to change the winning combination probability (RT gaming state transition opportunity) is limited, this method lacks flexibility.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the bonus is obtained by performing notification based on the flag conversion lottery and the lottery result in addition to the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination without changing the winning probability of the winning combination. The appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to be given can be flexibly changed according to the state. That is, in the state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, the appearance frequency of the symbol combination to which the privilege is given can be increased. On the contrary, in the state where it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, the combination of the symbol to which the privilege is given The appearance frequency of can be lowered.

  In the following description, the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Challenging Lip” will be determined by winning the flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chanting Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination. "Chilip" is sometimes referred to as "converting to Chilelip" (or simply "triple lip"), and the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as internal winning combinations Winning the flag conversion lottery of “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is converted to “reach eye lip” (or simply converted to “reach eye lip”). There is.

[Flow of game during general game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the flow of the game during the general game state will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, the normal gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to the general gaming state CZ, and then the general gaming state CZ is changed to the ART gaming state, so that the general gaming state (non-ART) is changed to the ART gaming state. (See FIG. 33). FIG. 50A is a diagram illustrating a game flow when the normal game state in the general game state shifts to CZ in the general game state.

  As shown in FIG. 50A, the normal gaming state has a low probability state and a high probability state as the lottery state of CZ. The low-probability state and the high-probability state are states having different degrees of expectation for winning the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state. The low-probability state is difficult to win the CZ lottery, and the high-probability state wins the CZ lottery. It is easy to do. Note that when the CZ lottery performed in the normal gaming state is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the CZ (see FIG. 33).

  The pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of chance zones CZ1, CZ2 and CZ3 as CZ (chance zones). These CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones having different degrees of expectation for winning an ART lottery performed during CZ, CZ3 is a chance zone that must win an ART lottery, and CZ1 and CZ2 are ART lotteries with a predetermined probability. It is a chance zone to win. In the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state, the CZ that shifts from the normal gaming state is lottery among these CZ1 to CZ3.

  Next, FIG. 50 (B) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the general gaming state CZ1, CZ2 to the ART gaming state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half and a second half. The first half is a period in which ranks having different expectations for winning an ART lottery performed during CZ are promoted, and the second half is a period in which a lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by a battle effect.

  During CZ1, a six-level mode is used as the rank, and the higher the mode, the higher the degree of expectation for winning an ART lottery. The first half of CZ1 continues for the first number of games (for example, a maximum of 12 games), and performs mode promotion lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game in the second half of CZ1.

  Also, during CZ2, ten points are used as ranks, and the higher the points, the higher the degree of expectation for winning an ART lottery. The first half of CZ2 continues for the second number of games (for example, a maximum of 15 games), and performs a lottery promotion for points based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the points promoted in the first half of the first game in the second half of CZ2.

  In the second half of CZ1, a battle effect is played in which the teammate character and the enemy character A battle each other. In the second half of CZ2, a battle effect is played in which the teammate character and the enemy character B battle each other. This battle effect continues for the third number of games (for example, a maximum of 4 games), and wins and losses are managed based on the result of the ART lottery. If the player wins the ART lottery, the teammate character wins and is not won. If so, the enemy character wins. In the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, an ART lottery is performed based on each game and an internal winning combination, and when the ART lottery is won, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, when a so-called rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination during a battle performance, an ART lottery is performed, and the result of the battle performance is rewritten based on the result.

  In CZ1 and CZ2, when the ART is not won, the player is defeated in the latter half battle effect, and basically, the gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if CZ1 or CZ2 wins the ART, the player wins in the second half battle effect, and then the gaming state shifts to the normal ART via the ART preparation. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, freezing may occur. In this case, the gaming state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) instead of normal ART (via the ART preparation).

  Next, FIG. 50 (C) is a diagram showing a flow of the game when shifting from the general gaming state CZ3 to the ART gaming state. CZ3 continues the fourth number of games (for example, 17 games at the maximum), and performs ART lottery based on the internal winning combination for each game. CZ3 ends when the ART lottery is won, and the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) from the next game through ART preparation. In CZ3, a freeze may occur. In this case, the game state is shifted from the next game to the CT (additional chance zone) via the ART preparation. On the other hand, when the fourth game number has passed while the ART lottery in CZ3 has not been won, the game state shifts to normal ART via ART preparation. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is confirmed at the time of transition.

[Data table used during the general gaming state]
Next, a data table used during the general gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Normal medium-to-high probability lottery table>
FIG. 51 is a normal medium / high probability lottery table used for the transition lottery in the CZ lottery state (low probability and high probability). In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CZ lottery state is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the CZ lottery state is also shifted at the end of the bonus or at the end of CZ or ART. FIG. 51A is a normal medium / high probability lottery table used when shifting the CZ lottery state based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to for each game during the normal gaming state. FIG. 51B is a normal medium / high probability lottery table used when shifting the CZ lottery state at the end of the bonus, and is referred to when the setting is changed, at the end of the bonus, or at the end of CZ, ART.

  The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51A defines lottery value information about the CZ lottery state after the transition in association with the current CZ lottery state and winning combination.

  The various data tables shown below conceptually show lottery value information. In the figure, “0” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “0%” is defined, and “extremely low” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “0% to less than 1%” is set. “Low” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “less than 1% to 10%” is prescribed, and “Low” means a lottery probability “10%”. Means that a lottery value corresponding to “less than 30%” is defined, “medium” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “less than 30% to less than 60%” is defined, “High” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “60% to less than 80%” is defined, and “very high” means a lottery corresponding to a lottery probability “80% to less than 99%”. Means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “99% to less than 100%” is prescribed. Means that are "determined" means that the lottery value corresponding to lottery probability "100%" is defined.

  In the various data tables shown below, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (“0 to 255” when the probability denominator is 256, “0 to 65535” when the probability denominator is 65536). An internal lottery is performed by sequentially subtracting the random number for lottery with the specified lottery value and determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). Is called.

  Referring to the normal medium / high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51A, it can be seen that if the current CZ lottery state has a low probability, it is easy to shift to a high probability when the weak cherry is an internal winning combination. . In addition, when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, it is understood that any of the common bell, cactus, weak cherry, and strong cherry is determined as the internal winning combination, thereby maintaining the high probability. .

  The normal middle / high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (B) defines lottery value information regarding the CZ lottery state after the transition according to the situation at the time of reference. Referring to the normal middle / high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (B), it can be seen that the lottery state of CZ always shifts to a high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
FIG. 52 is a CZ lottery table used for CZ lottery, and FIG. 52A is a CZ lottery table used when CZ lottery is performed based on an internal winning combination during a normal gaming state. B) is a CZ lottery table used when performing CZ lottery on whether or not to pull back CZ when CZ fails or when ART ends.

  The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52A defines lottery value information related to the winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 in association with the current CZ lottery state and internal winning combination. Referring to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52A, it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, the probability of winning the CZ lottery is higher than when the CZ lottery state has a low probability.

  The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52B defines lottery value information related to the winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3. When the CZ fails (when the ART lottery in CZ1 and CZ2 is not won) or at the end of the ART gaming state, the CZ pullback lottery is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG.

<CZ1 medium mode up lottery table>
FIG. 53 is a CZ1 middle mode up lottery table used for CZ1 mode up lottery in the first half of CZ1. The mode up lottery table during CZ1 defines lottery value information on the result of the mode up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55A, which will be described later, in CZ1, the probability of winning an ART lottery increases as the mode goes up. The lottery result “mode 1 UP” means that the CZ1 mode increases by 1, and the lottery result “mode 2 UP” means that the CZ1 mode increases by 2. That is, in the situation where the current mode is “2”, when “mode 2 UP” is won, the mode of CZ1 is increased from “2” to “4”. In addition, when a lottery result “Mode 6 UP_Freeze” is won, a freeze occurs, and an ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<CZ2 medium point lottery table>
FIG. 54 is a CZ2 middle point lottery table used for CZ2 point-up lottery in the first half of CZ2. The point lottery table in CZ2 defines lottery value information about the result of the point up lottery in association with the current point and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55B, which will be described later, in CZ2, the probability of winning an ART lottery increases as the point increases, and when the point increases to 10, the ART lottery is always won. In addition, “point 2 UP” of the lottery result means that the point of CZ2 is increased by 2, for example, when the current point is “2” and the player wins “point 2 UP”, the point of CZ2 is “ It will rise from “2” to “4”. In addition, when the lottery result “Point 10 UP_Freeze” is won, a freeze is generated, and an ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
FIGS. 55 and 56 are CZ ART lottery tables used for ART lottery in CZ, and FIG. 55A is a CZ ART lottery table (for CZ1) used for the first game in the latter half of CZ1. 55 (B) is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ2) used for the first game of the second half of CZ2, and FIG. 55 (C) is the CZ used for the second half of CZ1 and CZ2. FIG. 55 (D) is a medium ART lottery table (for CZ3) used for ART lottery in CZ3.

  The ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ1) shown in FIG. 55A defines lottery value information regarding the presence / absence of an ART lottery in association with the current mode. In addition, an ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ2) shown in FIG. 55B defines lottery value information regarding the presence / absence of an ART lottery in association with the current point. Referring to the ART lottery table during CZ (for CZ1) and the ART lottery table during CZ (for CZ2), it can be seen that the higher the rank (mode or point) of the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, the easier it is to win the ART lottery.

  The ART lottery table during CZ shown in FIG. 55C (common for CZ1 and CZ2 during the second half battle) defines lottery value information regarding the presence / absence of an ART lottery in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the ART lottery table during CZ (CZ1, CZ2 common for the latter half of the battle), if a rare combination (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as an internal winning combination in the latter half of CZ1, CZ2, You can see that you win the ART lottery with a probability.

  The ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ3) shown in FIG. 56 (D) defines lottery value information regarding the presence / absence of an ART lottery in association with the number of continuous games and the internal winning combination of CZ3. Referring to the CZ ART lottery table (for CZ3), it can be seen that during CZ3, winning an ART lottery will always win CT.

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the flow of games during normal ART will be described. The pachislot machine 1 has a normal ART and a CT as an ART gaming state (see FIG. 33), and is added as a chance zone during the CT. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, during the normal ART, a game is played aiming at the transition to CT. FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram showing a flow of lottery for transition to CT during normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (A), the pachislot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT lottery state as states that affect various lotteries performed during normal ART. The ART level is provided in four stages from level 1 to level 4, and is controlled mainly based on the number of continuous games during normal ART. The ART level affects the determination of the CT lottery state and the flag conversion lottery during normal ART described later. In addition, the CT lottery state is provided in four stages of low probability, normal, high probability, and extremely high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination during normal ART. The CT lottery state affects a CT lottery performed during normal ART and a flag conversion lottery during normal ART described later.

(Normal flag conversion during ART)
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the RT4 gaming state (that is, during the ART gaming state), the roles “F_Challenging Lip”, “F_1 Chanting Lip”, “F_Leaching Lip A” to “F_Leaching” When any one of “Lip D” is determined as an internal winning combination alone, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special privilege (for example, the addition of the number of ART games or CT winning) is given according to the lottery result. FIG. 57 (B) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (B), the pachislot machine 1 performs flag conversion lottery with reference to the ART level and CT lottery state during normal ART. As a result, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given and a notification (for example, in order) is displayed for displaying a combination of symbols of “triple chili lip” and a symbol combination of “reach eye lip”. Notification that a predetermined pattern is aimed at by pressing). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying a combination of symbols of “replay” (for example, notification of a pressing order other than a forward pressing) is performed. When the player performs a stop operation in accordance with this notification, a combination of symbols corresponding to the notification content, that is, a combination of symbols of “triple chili lip” or a symbol of “reach eye lip” when winning the flag conversion lottery When the flag conversion lottery is not won, the symbol combination “Replay” is displayed.

[Data table used during normal ART]
Next, a data table used during normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS.

<ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 58 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery during normal ART. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, flag conversion lottery during normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chicking Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, first, the first stage flag conversion lottery is performed, and when this first stage flag conversion lottery is won, Thereafter, the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed. When the flag conversion lottery of the second stage is won, the combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chilli Lip” are converted to “Triple Chile Lip”, and the flag conversion lottery of the first stage or the flag conversion lottery of the second stage. If it is not won, it is treated as “replay” without converting the roles “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” to “triple lip”.

  58A is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the first stage flag conversion lottery, and FIG. 58B is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the second stage flag conversion lottery. is there. The ART flag conversion lottery table shown in FIG. 58 (A) defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the first-stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachislot machine 1, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is performed only for the roles “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chanting Lip”, and for the roles “F_Leaching Lip A” to “F_Leaching Lip D” Only the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed.

  The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 58 (B) defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the second stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the CT lottery state. Until the CT is won once in normal ART, the “first time (until CT wins once)” column of the item “ART level” is referred to.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B), in each of the ART flag conversion lottery tables, random numbers (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, the two-stage flag conversion lottery can be simulated as a lottery performed using random numbers in the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent pachislot machines, it has been required to perform lottery (ART lottery, etc.) related to playing balls, which has conventionally been performed on the sub side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited. Therefore, there is a need for a mechanism that enables lottery without reducing the capacity while reducing the capacity.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention, since the probability denominator 256536 can be lottered by performing the probability denominator 256 in two stages, the capacity can be suppressed. In addition, by referring to the ART level and CT lottery status for the second stage lottery, flag conversion lottery can be performed not only according to the internal winning combination but also according to the current state. A flag conversion lottery can be performed.

<ART level determination table>
FIG. 59 is an ART level determination table used for determining the ART level. The determination of the ART level is performed at the time of ART winning when the transition to the ART gaming state is determined and during normal ART. FIG. 59A is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level when the ART is won, and FIG. 59B is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level during normal ART.

  The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59A defines lottery value information for each ART level. If a freeze has occurred when the ART is won (see FIG. 53, etc.), ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59 (B) defines lottery value information for the ART level of the transfer destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games in the normal ART. Further, the ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59 (B) defines lottery value information for the ART level of the transfer destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuing games in the normal ART at the time of CT entry. . That is, during the normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continued games, and the ART level also shifts at the timing when the normal ART enters the CT.

<Normal ART medium-high probability lottery table>
FIG. 60 is a normal ART high probability lottery table for lottering the CT lottery state during normal ART. The normal ART medium / high probability lottery table defines lottery value information about the CT lottery state of the transfer destination in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. Referring to the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table, the role “3 consecutive chili rips (winning“ F_definite chili lip ”“ F_1 definite chili lip ”wins flag conversion lottery at the time of winning)” In “A” to “F_reach eye lip D”, winning the flag conversion lottery), it can be seen that the CT lottery state easily shifts (falls) to “low probability”. In the above description, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given. Therefore, it seems that the CT lottery state is likely to fall, contrary to the above description, but FIG. As will be described later, the winning combination “three consecutive chili lips” and “reach eye lip” must win the CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery state falls, a special privilege called CT winning is still given.

<Cart lottery table during ART>
FIG. 61 is a CT lottery table during ART used for CT lottery during normal ART. The CT lottery table during ART defines lottery value information about the lottery result of CT lottery in association with the current CT lottery state and internal winning combination. In the CT lottery table during ART, when “cactus”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “triple chili lip”, “reach eye lip” and “BB” are determined as internal winning combinations, CT lottery is performed using a random value. On the other hand, when other combinations (for example, replay, common bell, push order bell, etc.) are determined as internal winning combinations, CT lottery is performed using random numbers in the range of probability denominator 65536.

  The pachislot machine 1 has “normal CT” and “highly accurate CT” as CT. “Normal CT” and “highly accurate CT” have different expectations of the number of ART games to be added during CT (additional chance zone), and “highly accurate CT” has a larger number of ART games than “normal CT”. Is easily added (see FIG. 66).

<Normal lottery table during ART>
FIG. 62 is a normal ART extra lottery table used for extra lottery for adding the number of ART games during normal ART. The extra lottery table during the normal ART defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Game flow during CT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the flow of games during CT will be described. As shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, CT is performed by 8 games per set. During CT, the lottery of the number of ART games is performed based on the internal winning combination. When the winning lottery is won, the number of games is not subtracted, and the number of games is subtracted only when the additional lottery is not won. Is done. For this reason, a game in which the number of ART games is added does not end during the CT, and is ended when a game in which the number of ART games is not added in the same set is performed eight times.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, when the winning combination “three consecutive dust lips” is won during CT (that is, when winning the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the winning combinations “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Challenging Lip”). ) One set of 8 games is reset. For example, if a game in which the number of ART games is not added in the same set is played seven times, the CT will be terminated if a game in which the number of ART games is not added once is performed, but the role “Triple Chile Lip” If the player wins, the CT is reset, and as a result, the CT will not end until a game is played in which the number of ART games is not added eight times. Therefore, CT becomes easier to continue as the combination “Triple Chile Lip” wins.

(Flag conversion during CT)
FIG. 63C is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during CT. During the CT, the winning combination “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” are always converted to the “triple chilling”. As described above, if the winning combination “Triple Chile Lip” is won during CT, CT will be reset. Therefore, if the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” or “F_1 Chilli Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, CT will be restarted. Will be set.

  On the other hand, for the combinations “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D”, the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the three-stage table (tables 0 to 2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63C, table 0 has the lowest probability of conversion to “reach eye lip”, table 1 has the next lowest probability of conversion to “reach eye lip”, and table 2 Has the highest probability of conversion to “reach eye lip”. In addition, when a winning combination “reach eye lip” is won during CT, CT is newly given as shown in FIG. 67 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 63C, in normal CT, a table is determined based on the ART level. In the case of high probability CT, table 0 is always determined regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Subsequently, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Table lottery table during CT>
FIG. 64 is a CT table lottery table for determining a table to be used for flag conversion lottery from the three-stage tables. The intra-CT table lottery table defines lottery value information for a table used for flag conversion lottery in association with the state such as the ART level and the type of CT to be executed. When the CT lottery table is determined to win the CT lottery and shift to the CT, or is referred to at the start of CT, the table used for flag conversion lottery during CT is determined.

<CT flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 65 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery during CT. The CT flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. Referring to the flag conversion lottery table during CT, it can be seen that during the CT, the winning combination “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” are always converted to the winning “triple chilli lip”.

<Casting lottery table during CT>
FIG. 66 is an extra lottery table during CT used for extra lottery for adding the number of ART games during CT. The extra lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination. It should be noted that the winning combinations other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 66 are not won in the extra lottery during CT.

  In addition, in the extra lottery during the normal CT, the number of extra games varies depending on the number of times the winning combination “three consecutive chili lips” is won. Specifically, when the number of winning the “three-line chili lip” is “1-8 times” during the same CT, “10 games” is easily determined as the number of additional games, and during the same CT When the number of wins for the role “Triple Chile Lip” is “9-16 times”, “20 games” is easily determined as the number of additional games, and the number of times that the “Triple Chile Lip” is won during the same CT Is “17 to 24 times”, it is easy to determine “30 games” as the number of additional games, and when the number of winning “3 consecutive chili rips” during the same CT is “25 times or more” In addition, “50 games” is easily determined as the number of additional games.

  More specifically, in the extra lottery table during CT, if the number of winning “3 consecutive chili lips” is “1-8 times” during the same CT, The number of added games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely high” is “10 games”, and the number of added games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely low” is “20 games”. Then, when the number of wins for the “3 consecutive Chile Lip” in the same CT becomes “9 times or more”, the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely high” of the 3 “Chile Repeat” in the figure is “ Promoted to “20 games”. Further, when the number of winning “3 consecutive chili lips” in the same CT becomes “17 times or more”, it corresponds to the lottery values “very high” and “very low” of the “3 consecutive chili lip” in the figure. The number of added games is promoted to “30 games”. Similarly, if the number of wins for the “Triple Chile Lip” in the same CT becomes “25 times or more”, it corresponds to the lottery values “Extremely High” and “Extremely Low” of the “Triple Chile Lip” in the figure. The number of additional games to be promoted is promoted to “50 games”.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the number of games to be added per game is increased according to the number of times the winning combination “three consecutive lips” is won during CT. As described above, as long as the number of ART games is added, CT will not end, and CT will be reset if the winning combination “Triple Chile Lip” is won. The more you continue, the more you can expect the additional amount per time to increase, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, the number of times to increase the additional amount per time is more (9 times or more) than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT. Can be prevented, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

<Lottery table with additional number of sets during CT>
FIG. 67 is a lottery table for adding the number of sets in CT used for lottery for adding a new CT during CT. The set number extra lottery table during CT defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the type of CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 67, when a winning combination “reach eye lip” is won during CT, a new CT is given. When a new CT is given as a result of adding the number of sets, a new CT is started again at the timing when the CT being executed ends.

  The number of wins for the above-mentioned “Triple Chile Lip” is counted only during the same CT, but this “In the same CT” is when a lottery is won by adding the number of sets performed during CT. It is good also as including the new CT provided to, and not including it.

[Game flow in bonus state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the flow of the game during the bonus state will be described. FIG. 68 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when transitioning to the bonus state during the general gaming state (ART non-winning), and FIG. 68 (B) is the case when transitioning to the bonus state during normal ART. FIG. 68 (C) is a diagram showing a game flow when a transition is made to a bonus state during CT. As shown in FIGS. 68 (A) to 68 (C), the pachislot machine 1 has a normal BB and a special BB as bonus types, and determines the bonus type at the transition to the bonus state. At this time, if the special BB is determined, after completing the bonus state, the process proceeds to CT via the ART preparation. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow differs depending on the state before the transition to the bonus state.

  Referring to FIG. 68 (A), when the normal gaming state is shifted to the normal BB, the ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination during the normal BB. If this ART lottery is won, after the bonus state is ended, the state shifts to normal ART through the ART preparation. After winning the ART lottery, the number of ART games is added and lottery is performed during the bonus state.

  Referring to FIG. 68B, when the normal ART is shifted to the normal BB, CT lottery is performed at the end of the normal BB. This CT lottery is won with a probability of 50%, and if it is won, it will shift to CT via the ART preparation after completion of the bonus state, and if it is not won, it will transfer to the normal ART via the ART preparation after completion of the bonus state To do. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, the number of ART games is added and lottery is also performed.

  Referring to FIG. 68 (C), when the transition from CT to normal BB or special BB is made, the transition to CT is made via ART preparations after the end of the bonus state. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, the number of ART games is added and lottery is also performed.

[Data table used during bonus status]
Subsequently, a data table used during the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 69 is a bonus type lottery table for determining a bonus type (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state, and defines lottery value information for the bonus type in association with the state before the transition to the bonus state.

<Bonus table with bonus ART games added>
FIG. 70 is a bonus lottery table for the number of ART games in bonus used for the lottery and the number of ART games to be added during the bonus state. The bonus ART game number extra lottery table defines the lottery result of the ART lottery and the lottery value information regarding the extra game number in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

  The lottery table added with the number of bonus ART games is used for the ART lottery in the ART non-winning state (until the ART lottery is won in the normal BB shifted from the general gaming state). In other words, when 1 or more (in reality, at least 50 games) are determined as the number of additional games in the ART non-winning state, an ART lottery is won and a corresponding number of games is given. On the other hand, in the state after the ART win, the bonus ART game number addition lottery table is used for the ART game number addition lottery.

<CT lottery table at the end of bonus>
FIG. 71 is a bonus lottery CT lottery table used for CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The CT lottery table at the end of the bonus defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the bonus type and the gaming state before the transition to the bonus state. Referring to the bonus end CT lottery table shown in FIG. 71, for example, when a normal BB is performed during a normal ART, it is found that a CT is won with a probability of 50% at the end of the bonus state.

[Exceptional game flow in the general gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, an exceptional game flow during the general game state will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, basically, the normal gaming state is shifted to the CZ during the general gaming state, and the ART gaming state is aimed by winning the ART lottery in the CZ. Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the ART gaming state is realized by performing notification during the RT4 gaming state, and the RT gaming state is controlled according to the combination of symbols displayed as shown in FIG. doing. As shown in FIG. 47, since the combination of symbols for shifting the RT gaming state is displayed according to the order (pushing order) of the player's stop operation, even if notification is not performed In some cases, the RT4 gaming state may be entered accidentally.

  Further, in the RT4 gaming state, since the roles “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” may be determined as internal winning combinations, even in the general gaming state (non-ART) A reach eye (reach eye lip) to which a special privilege is given can be displayed. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when the game mode is changed to the RT4 game state accidentally during the general game state (non-ART), the combination of symbols of “reach eye lip” can be displayed. If it becomes a state, it becomes possible to shift to the ART gaming state (normal ART) without going through the CZ.

  More specifically, when the combination “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT4 gaming state, the flag conversion lottery is performed. When the flag conversion lottery is won, a notice for displaying the symbol combination of “reach eye lip” is given and the ART right is granted. On the other hand, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying the “replay” symbol combination is performed, and control is performed so that the symbol combination “reach eye lip” is not displayed.

<Non-ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 73 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery performed in the general gaming state and the RT4 gaming state. The non-ART flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by control on the main side]
Conventionally, in the pachislot machine, the stop operation information (push order, etc.) is reported under the control of the sub (sub control board 72) side in the ART machine. In recent years, it has been required to perform notification on the main (main control board 71) side that manages the player's profit. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an instruction monitor for notifying information on the stop operation is provided on the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71, and the information on the stop operation is notified under the control of the main side. I am going to do that.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between notification (navigation) performed on the main side and notification (navigation) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 74, the main control board 71 notifies the stop operation information by displaying numerical values “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values “1” to “11” uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each, and “1” to “3” indicate the types of reels that perform the first stop operation, respectively. “1” means that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, and “2” means that the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and “3”. Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

  Also, “4” to “9” indicate the pressing order to be notified respectively, “4” means that the pressing order is “left, middle, right”, and “5” indicates that the pressing order is “ “6” means “middle, left, right”, and “7” means “middle, right, left”. “8” means that the push order is “right, left, middle”, and “9” means that the push order is “right, middle, left”.

  Further, “10” and “11” notify the bonus-related combination, and “10” means a symbol combination “C_BB1” composed of “white 7-white 7-white 7”, and “11”. Means a symbol combination “C_BB2” composed of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7”.

  Here, although the numerical values “1” to “11” notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the content of the stop operation to be notified, it is not always possible for all players to clearly understand the notification content. Absent. That is, there is a possibility that the notification content cannot be grasped by some players just by displaying “6” on the instruction monitor on the main side.

  Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 notifies the details of the stop operation on the sub side as well as the notification on the main side. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a display unit 100 that is controlled by the sub-control board 72, and notifies the stop operation information under the control of the sub-side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is to be performed on the left reel 3L, “1” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the left reel 3L of the display unit 100 is displayed on the sub side. “1” is displayed above to notify that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when the pressing order “middle, left, right” is notified, “6” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and “1” is displayed above the reel 3C in the display unit 100 on the sub side. "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L and "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R to notify that the pressing order is "middle, left, right". When “F_BB1” is determined as an internal winning combination, “10” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and “white 7-white 7-white 7” is displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Is displayed, and a symbol to be aimed at is notified to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (A), during the ART preparation, “Bell Navi”, “Maintenance Lip Navi”, “RT 3 Transition Lip Navi”, and “RT 4 Transition Lip Navi” are performed under the control of the main side. “Bell Navi” informs the roles “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols of “bell”. Further, “Maintenance Lip Navi” notifies the combination “F_Maintenance Lip_1st” to “F_Maintenance Lip_3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination “Replay”. In addition, “RT3 transition Lip navigator” notifies the combination “F_RT3 transition Lip_1st” to “F_RT3 transition Lip_3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols “RT3 transition Lip”. In addition, “RT4 transition Lip navigator” notifies the combinations “F_RT4 transition Lip_123” to “F_RT4 transition Lip_3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols of “RT4 transition Lip”.

  Note that the timing of notification on the main side may be at least during one game in which notification is performed, and is arbitrary. For example, notification on the main side may be performed at the timing when the start operation is received, or notification on the main side may be performed when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation are performed. It is good also as notifying on the main side at the timing which received either. On the other hand, it is preferable that the notification timing on the sub side is at least a timing before the first stop operation. In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, notification is performed on both the main side and the sub side at the timing when the start operation is received or when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start to rotate. Thereby, before the player performs the stop operation, information on the stop operation is notified on both the main-side instruction monitor and the sub-side display unit 100.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), during the ART gaming state, “Bell Navi”, “Maintenance Lip Navi”, “RT 3 Transition Lip Navi” and “RT 4 Transition Lip Navi” are performed under the control of the main side. During the ART gaming state (RT4 gaming state), a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a push for displaying a combination of symbols of “triple chilli lip”, “reach eye lip” or “replay” based on the lottery result. The order is notified, but this notification is not performed on the main side but only on the sub-side.

  As described above, since the combination of the symbols “Triple Chile Lip” and “Reach Eye Lip” is related to the provision of a special privilege, the presence or absence of notification seems to affect the player's profit (out) It can also be considered. However, in the pachislot machine 1, in practice, a special privilege is given based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, and the displayed symbol combination does not affect the given privilege. That is, when winning the flag conversion lottery, even if the symbol combination of “Replay” is displayed, a special privilege is given, and conversely, the flag conversion lottery is not won. In such a case, even if a combination of symbols of “triple chili lip” and “reach eye lip” can be displayed, no special privilege is given.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed in this way does not affect the player's profit (out of play), the sub monitor does not perform notification on the main instruction monitor. Notification on the display unit 100 is performed only on the side.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (C) and 74 (D), during the RT5 gaming state (inter-flag state), notification is made to aim for a combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus carried over as an internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), when the role “F_BB1” is carried over, “White 7 Navi” is performed, and as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the role “F_BB2” is carried over. If so, perform “Blue 7 Navi”. “White 7 Navi” notifies the combination “F_BB1” of the stop operation information for displaying the symbol combination “C_BB1”, and “Blue 7 Navi” displays the combination “F_BB2”. Information on the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination “C_BB2” is notified.

  Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, the combination relating to the bonus and “out of”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, or “F_special 3” are determined as the internal winning combinations. The combination of BB symbols can be displayed, and when the other combination is determined as an internal winning combination together with the bonus combination, the combination of BB symbols cannot be displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 74 (C) and 74 (D), when the main control board 71 performs control on the main side, the main game board 71 and the F_special role 1 and the F_special role are not related to the bonuses that are carried over. “White 7 Navi” or “Blue 7 Navi” is performed only when either “2” or “F_Special Role 3” is determined as the internal winning combination. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing at which the winning combination can be won.

  The main control board 71 may perform “White 7 Navi” or “Blue 7 Navi” only after notifying (bonus notification) that the bonus-related combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Here, the bonus notification is performed, for example, by displaying a bonus confirmation screen or lighting a bonus confirmation lamp.

  As an example, when a combination related to a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination, an effect performed over several games (so-called continuous effect) is performed, and a bonus confirmation screen is displayed according to the result of this continuous effect. Generally done. If “white 7 navigation” or the like is performed on the main side during this continuous production, the result of the continuous production may be known on the way, which may impair interest. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 performs “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” only after the bonus notification is made. It should be noted that a method for enabling the main side to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made is arbitrary.

  As one method, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required until the bonus notification, and after digesting the number of games, “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 A method of performing “navigation” can be considered. More specifically, when the number of games required for bonus notification is determined, the main control board 71 notifies the sub control board 72 of the number of games. The sub-control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games, and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games is exhausted, so that the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side can be grasped. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games after determining the bonus winning combination as an internal winning combination without carrying over the bonus winning combination, and after the count result reaches a predetermined number When a combination related to the bonus and any one of “out of”, “F_special combination 1”, “F_special combination 2”, and “F_special combination 3” is determined as an internal winning combination, “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” I do.

  As another method, a method of controlling the bonus notification on the main side instead of the sub side is conceivable. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines that the bonus winning combination is an internal winning combination without carrying over the bonus winning combination, the main control board 71 performs an effect (at least the number of games required for the effect) to be executed on the display unit 100. Determine and notify the sub-control board 72. The sub-control board 72 executes the notified effect and displays the bonus confirmation screen, whereby the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side can be grasped.

  Of course, it is also possible to make it possible for the main side to grasp the timing when the bonus notification is made by other methods. In this case, since the main control board 71 cannot accept a signal from the sub-control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made based on the signal that can be accepted by the main control board 71. . For example, since the signal associated with the stop operation can be received by the main control board 71, a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than forward pressing) is performed in a state where the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In the event of a loss, a bonus notification may be given. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 acquires information on the internal winning combination and information on the stop operation from the main control board 71, and the combination of these information is a predetermined combination (internal winning combination “bonus related combination”). In the case of a stop operation “other than forward press”), a bonus notification is made. Since such a bonus notification can be grasped by the main control board 71 as well, the timing at which the bonus notification is performed on the main side can be grasped.

[Description of main control board operation]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 31 of the main control board 71 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU>
First, the procedure of main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 31 will be described with reference to a flowchart shown in FIG. 75 (hereinafter referred to as main flow).

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process when the power is turned on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been normally performed or the setting has been appropriately changed, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 33 is cleared. The designated storage area here is a storage area that needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a medal acceptance / start check process (S3). In this process, input checks of the medal sensor 42S and the start switch 6S are performed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 31 refers to an internal lottery table (FIGS. 39 and 40) corresponding to the current gaming state, and lottery is determined from among a plurality of winning combinations. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the winning combinations “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” are determined as internal winning combinations in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). When the winning combinations “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” are determined as internal winning combinations (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently turns on the RT5 gaming state flag and sets the gaming state to the inter-flag gaming state (S6).

  Subsequent to the processing of S6 or when it is determined that the winning combinations “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” have not been determined as internal winning combinations in S5 (NO), the main CPU 31 continues to state by state described later in FIG. A game control process is performed (S7).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs main-side navigation control processing (S8). In this process, the main CPU 31 sets navigation data according to the current gaming state and the internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub-control board 72. In addition, notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop initial setting process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 (S9). In this process, reel stop control information used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 33 and used in the reel stop control process of S12.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates start command data and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. The start command data includes various kinds of information necessary for effects such as an internal winning combination.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel rotation start process after performing a wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 31 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). It is controlled so that a constant speed is maintained.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop control process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 (S12). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S9, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C, and the right stop button 7R are pressed. The

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R being stopped, based on the combination of symbols displayed along the active line, depending on the combination of symbols such as medal payout and re-game operation. Give a profit. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates data for a winning action command and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. The winning action command data includes various types of information such as combinations of symbols displayed along the active line.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a BB check process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls the operation and end of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs RT check processing described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90 (S16). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs control to shift the RT gaming state based on the displayed symbol combination.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs CZ / ART termination processing, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 (S17). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs CZ pull-back lottery. When the CZ / ART end process is performed, the main CPU 31 determines that one game (unit game) has ended and returns the process to S2.

<Control processing by state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the state-specific control processing will be described. In the state-specific control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S31). When it is in the RT4 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process described later with reference to FIG. 77 (S32).

  Subsequent to the processing of S32 or when it is determined that the RT4 gaming state is not in S31 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S33). ). If it is in the normal gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs normal start processing described later with reference to FIG. 78 (S34), and ends the state-specific control processing.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is CZ (S35). If it is during CZ (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a start process during CZ, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 79 (S36), and ends the control process by state.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is normal ART (S37). When the normal ART is being performed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal ART start process described later with reference to FIG. 83 (S38), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal ART (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is CT (S39). When the CT is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a start process during CT, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 (S40), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a start process during BB described later with reference to FIG. 85 (S42), and ends the control process by state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 31 performs other processing (S43) and ends the state-specific control processing. For example, when the ART is being prepared, the main CPU 31 performs processing corresponding to the preparation.

<Flag conversion process>
Next, the flag conversion process will be described with reference to FIG. In the flag conversion process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is a CT start time (S50). When it is time to start CT (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the CT flag conversion table lottery table (FIG. 64) and lots and sets the table number used for the flag conversion lottery during CT. (S51).

  Subsequent to the processing of S51 or when it is not the time of CT start in S50 (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a flag conversion lottery table corresponding to the current state (S52). For example, if the current state is a non-ART RT4 gaming state, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 73) is set, and if the current state is a normal ART RT4 gaming state , The flag conversion lottery table during ART (FIG. 58) is set, and if the current state is the RT4 gaming state during CT, the flag conversion lottery table during CT (FIG. 65) is set.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and then determines whether or not it is won (S54). When the flag conversion lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process (S55). In this process, for example, when the winning combination “F — 1 Chilli Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, processing is performed so that the winning “F — 1 Chilli Lip” is handled as the “Triple Chilli Lip”.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is non-ART (S56). That is, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 gaming state has been performed accidentally in response to the player's stop operation in a state where the general gaming state (non-ART) notification is not performed. judge. If the current gaming state is non-ART (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S57), and then sets the next game to be ready for ART (S58), flag The conversion process ends. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not in a non-ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the flag conversion process.

  If the flag conversion lottery is not won in S54 (NO), the main CPU 31 performs a flag maintenance process (S59) and ends the flag conversion process. In this flag maintenance process, for example, when the winning combination “F_1 correct Chile Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, processing is performed so that the winning “F_1 correct Chile Lip” is handled as the winning “Replay”.

<Normal start processing>
Next, the normal start process will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal start process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52A, and performs CZ lottery based on the current CZ lottery state and internal winning combination (S61).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ lottery has been won (S62). If the CZ lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the type of CZ won for the next game (S63), and then sets the value corresponding to the type of CZ won in the CZ game number counter. (S64). Note that the CZ game number counter is a counter that counts the duration of CZ. When the player wins CZ1, the first game number (for example, 12) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half) If CZ2 is won, the second game number (for example, 15) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), and if CZ3 is won, the fourth game number is set in the CZ game number counter. (For example, 17) is set.

  Following the processing of S64, or when the CZ lottery is not won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the normal medium / high probability lottery table of FIG. Based on the winning combination, the CZ lottery state transition lottery is performed (S65), the CZ lottery state is updated based on the result of the transition lottery (S66), and the normal start time process is terminated.

<Processing at start during CZ>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the processing at the start during CZ will be described. In the start process during CZ, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is CZ1 (S71). If it is during CZ1 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a process during CZ1 (CZ2), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 (S72), and ends the process during start during CZ.

  On the other hand, if it is not in CZ1 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If it is during CZ2 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a process during CZ1 (CZ2), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 (S74), and ends the process during start during CZ. In the present embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 differ only in ranks (modes or points) having different degrees of expectation for winning an ART lottery, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the process in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one process in CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ2 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the process in CZ3 described later with reference to FIG. 82 (S75), and ends the process at the start in CZ.

<Medium treatment in CZ1 (CZ2)>
Next, the processing in CZ1 (CZ2) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the middle process of CZ1 (CZ2), first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). If it is the first half (YES), the main CPU 31 moves the process to S82, and if it is not the first half (the second half) (NO), the main CPU 31 moves the process to S91 of FIG.

  If it is the first half of CZ1, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ1 mode-up lottery table (FIG. 53) and performs mode-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Similarly, when it is the first half of CZ2, the main CPU 31 refers to the point lottery table during CZ2 (FIG. 54) and performs point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 updates the mode (or point) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freezing is won in the lottery of S82 (S84). If the game is won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S85). In this process, the main CPU 31 further determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59A). When freeze occurs, “ART level 2” is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S86), and ends processing in CZ1 (CZ2).

  On the other hand, if the freezing is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 31 decrements the CZ game number counter (first half) by 1 (S87). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (S88). If the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ1 (CZ2) process.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 to the next game (S89) and ends the processing in CZ1 (CZ2). To do.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 81, when it is the second half of CZ1 or CZ2, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first game of the second half (S91). If it is the first game of the second half, the ART lottery is performed based on the mode or points of the first half with reference to the ART lottery table during CZ (FIGS. 55A and 55B) (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S93).

  When the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59A). , Set (S94). Following the processing of S94 or when the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value in the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 31 sets “4” in the CZ game number counter (second half) when winning the ART lottery, and “3” in the CZ game number counter (second half) when not winning the ART lottery. "Is set.

  Following the processing of S95 or when it is not one game of the latter half in S91 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ ART lottery table (FIG. 55C) and plays an internal winning combination. Based on the ART lottery (S96), it is determined whether or not the ART lottery is won (S97). When the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and draws the ART level by referring to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59A). And set (S98).

  Subsequent to the processing of S98 or when the ART lottery is not won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 31 decrements the CZ game number counter (second half) by 1 (S99). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (S100). When the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ1 (CZ2) process.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the ART set number is 1 or more (S101). When the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S102), and ends processing in CZ1 (CZ2). . On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CZ failure time (S103) and ends the processing in CZ1 (CZ2).

<Processing during CZ3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the process during CZ3 will be described. In the process during CZ3, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the ART lottery table during CZ (FIG. 56 (D)), performs an ART lottery based on the internal winning combination (S121), and wins this ART lottery. It is determined whether or not (S122).

  If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 then adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freezing is won in the ART lottery of S121 (S124). If the game is won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the game (S125).

  Following the processing of S125 or when freezing has not been won in S124 (NO), the main CPU 31 continues to determine the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59A). And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress to the next game (S127), and ends CZ3 processing.

  On the other hand, when the ART lottery is not won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (S128). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). When the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ3 in-process.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the ART set number, and also determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59A). (S130). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress to the next game (S131), and ends CZ3 processing.

<Normal start processing during ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, normal start processing during ART will be described. In the normal ART start process, first, the main CPU 31 increments the ART continuing game number counter by 1 (S141). The ART continued game number counter is a counter that counts the number of games that the normal ART has continued. In this embodiment, in addition to the ART continuing game number counter, an ART end game number counter that counts the number of games that the normal ART can continue is provided. Then, the pachislot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuing game number counter with the value of the ART end game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuing game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter, finish.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 61), performs a CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142), and determines whether or not the CT lottery is won. Is determined (S143). When the CT lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the CT set number and sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S144), and then the type of the type won for the next game. CT is set (S145).

  Following the processing of S145 or when the CT lottery is not won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (B)), and continues the ART continued game number counter. Based on this value, the ART level is determined and set (S146). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal ART medium / high probability lottery table (FIG. 60), and lots and sets the destination CT lottery state based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S147). .

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the extra lottery table during normal ART (FIG. 62), performs an extra lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S148), and determines whether or not the extra lottery is won. Determination is made (S149). When the winning lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S150).

  Subsequent to the processing of S150 or when the extra lottery is not won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 31 continues to reach the value of the ART end game number counter in the ART continuing game number counter. It is determined whether or not (S151). When the value of the ART continuing game number counter has not reached the value of the ART end game number counter (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the normal start processing during ART.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ART continuing game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter (YES), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the ART set number (S152), and then determines the ART end time. It is set (S153) and the processing at the start during normal ART is terminated.

<Processing during CT start>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a start process during CT will be described. In the start process during CT, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the extra lottery table during CT (FIG. 66) and performs an extra lottery on the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S161). It is determined whether or not the player has won (S162).

  When the winning lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S163). Note that, as described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the additional amount per time increases as the number of times the winning combination “triple chili lip” is won during the same CT.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a combination “triple chip” (that is, whether or not it has been converted to a “triple trip” in the flag conversion process of FIG. 77) (S164). ). If the internal winning combination is a “triple chililip” (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently resets the CT game number counter to 8 (S165), and the CT start process ends. On the other hand, when the internal winning combination is not the “three-time chilelip” (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the start-time processing during CT.

  If the winning lottery has not been won in S162 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the set number adding lottery table during CT (FIG. 67) to determine the number of CT sets based on the internal winning combination. An additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won for this number of CT sets (S167). If it is determined that the number of CT sets has been added and lottery is selected (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S168), and ends the start-up process during CT.

  On the other hand, if the number of CT sets has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT game number counter (S169), and then, as a result of the subtraction, the CT game number counter Whether or not becomes 0 is determined (S170). When the CT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the start time process during CT.

  When the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of CT sets is 1 or more (S172). If the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S173), and the CT start process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 ends CT, sets normal ART to the next game (S174), and ends the start time processing during CT.

<Process during start during BB>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the processing during start during BB will be described. In the BB start process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the bonus ART game number extra lottery table (FIG. 70) and performs an extra lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not the extra lottery is won (S182). If the winning lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the start-time processing during BB.

  On the other hand, when the winning lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S183). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). If the number of ART sets is not 0, the main CPU 31 ends the start processing during BB. On the other hand, if the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185), and ends the processing at the start during BB.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, the reel stop initial setting process will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop initial setting process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to a rotation stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires a rotation stop number based on an internal winning combination or the like (S191). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the spinning cylinder stop initial setting table and acquires each piece of information based on the spinning cylinder stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 31 acquires various types of information associated with the number for stopping the spinning, such as determination data for each pressing order.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 31 sets the bits of all symbol code storage areas (excluding unused areas) to “1”. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194), and ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operating counter is used to determine the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R that have not been stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 33.

<Reel stop control process>
Subsequently, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process for determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch 7S. When the main CPU 31 determines that a valid stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S201.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 31 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 31 selects a pressing order storage area (not shown) and an operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 5) according to the pressed stop button. (Not shown) is updated (S202). That is, the main CPU 31 manages the type of the pressed stop button by updating the operation stop button storage area, and updates the pressing order storage area based on the type and order of the pressed stop button. The order of the stop operation (push order) is managed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 33 based on the symbol counter (S204). S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 7S.

  Next, the main CPU 31 executes a sliding piece number determination process (S206). In this sliding piece number determination process, the number of sliding pieces defined at the stop start position is determined based on the reel stop control information (stop table group) selected based on the internal winning combination from the turning stop initial setting table. It is processing.

  Next, the main CPU 31 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 33. Generation processing is executed (S167). The reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines a scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the sliding piece number determination data, and stores it in the main RAM 33 (S208). The scheduled stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any of predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and the symbol position where the reel rotation stops. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 31 sets the scheduled stop position as a search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 31 executes a symbol code storing process (S210). In the symbol code storing process, a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 31 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S211). Next, the main CPU 31 performs a control change process (S212). In this control change process, the stop information group used to stop the reel is updated when the control stop process is in a specific stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S213). This process is a process for determining whether or not a signal is no longer output from the stop switch 7S.

  When determining that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S213. On the other hand, when determining that the pressed stop button has been released (YES), the main CPU 31 transmits a reel stop command (S214).

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). Here, when it is determined that the stop button non-operating counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 executes the pull-in priority storage process (S216), and executes the process of step S201. In this drawing priority order storing process, the drawing priority order of all symbols on the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the reel stop control process.

<BB check processing>
Subsequently, the BB check process will be described with reference to FIG. In the BB check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is in a bonus state (S221). If the bonus state is in effect (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently receives a winning determination medal payout process from the BB payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state (S13 in FIG. 75). In step S222, the payout number of medals paid out in step S222 is subtracted.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the BB payout number counter has become less than 0 (S223). If the BB payout number counter is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is terminated, while if the BB payout number counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 continues to A bonus end process is performed (S224). In this process, the main CPU 31 clears various information in the bonus state and sets the RT1 gaming state flag to ON.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the bonus lottery CT lottery table (FIG. 71), performs a CT lottery at the bonus end (S225), and determines whether or not the CT lottery is won (S226). If the CT lottery is won, the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S227). If the CT lottery is won when the number of ART sets is 0, 1 is added to the number of CT sets and 1 is also added to the number of ART sets in S227.

  Subsequent to the process of S227 or when the CT lottery is not won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more ( S228). If the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state, sets the next game to be ready for ART (S229), and performs the BB check process. finish.

  On the other hand, if neither the ART set number nor the CT set number is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal game state to the next game (S230). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal medium / high probability lottery table (FIG. 51B), lotteries the CZ lottery state, sets it (S231), and ends the BB check process.

  If the bonus state is not set in S221 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether a BB symbol combination (C_BB1, 2) is displayed (S232). When the BB symbol combination is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB check process.

  On the other hand, when the combination of symbols of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the bonus type lottery table (FIG. 69) and lots and sets the bonus type (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB payout number counter (S234), performs a bonus start process (S235), and ends the BB check process. In the bonus start process, the main CPU 31 performs various processes such as starting a bonus operation and setting a bonus state in the next game.

<RT check processing>
Subsequently, the RT check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is in the RT5 gaming state (S241). When in the RT5 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 terminates the RT check process, while when not in the RT5 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 continues to be in the RT0 gaming state. It is determined whether or not (S242).

  When the game is in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of “bell spilled eyes” is displayed (S243). When “bell spilled eyes” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while when “bell spilled eyes” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 Subsequently, the RT2 gaming state flag is set to ON, the RT0 gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (S244), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state (S245). If it is in the RT1 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a symbol combination of “bell spilled eyes” is displayed (S246). When “bell spilling” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the RT2 gaming state flag on and also turns the RT1 gaming state flag off, and shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. (S247), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if “bell spill” is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether 20 games have elapsed in the RT1 gaming state (S248). If 20 games have not elapsed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, whereas if 20 games have elapsed (YES), the main CPU 31 turns off the RT1 gaming state flag and RT1. The gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state (S249), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT1 gaming state in S245 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state (S250). When it is in the RT2 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the symbol combination “RT3 transition lip” is displayed (S251). When “RT3 transition lip” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while when “RT3 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 Subsequently, the RT3 gaming state flag is set on and the RT2 gaming state flag is turned off to shift from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state (S252), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the RT2 gaming state in S250 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT3 gaming state (S261). When the game is in the RT3 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a symbol combination of “bell spill” or “RT2 transition lip” is displayed (S262). When “Bell spilling eyes” or “RT2 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON and turns off the RT3 gaming state flag, and from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. The state is shifted to (S263), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if neither “Bell Spilled Eye” nor “RT2 Transition Lip” is displayed in S262, the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols “RT4 Transition Lip” is displayed. (S264). When “RT4 transition lip” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while when “RT4 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 Subsequently, the RT4 gaming state flag is set to ON and the RT3 gaming state flag is turned off to shift from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state (S265).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the ART preparation is set (S266). When the ART preparation is not set (NO), the main CPU 31 terminates the RT check process, while when the ART preparation is set (YES), the main CPU 31 determines the number of CT sets. Is determined to be 1 or more (S267).

  When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 sets CT in the next game, sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, if the CT set number is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 sets the normal ART in the next game, sets a predetermined value in the ART end game number counter (S269), and ends the RT check process. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the RT3 gaming state in S261 (NO), since it is in the RT4 gaming state, the main CPU 31 subsequently displays the symbol combination of “Bell spilling eyes” or “RT2 transition lip”. It is determined whether or not (S270). When neither “bell spilling eyes” nor “RT2 transition lip” is displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while “bell spilling eyes” or “RT2 transition lip” is displayed. If displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON and also turns the RT4 gaming state flag off to shift from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (S271), and performs the RT check process. finish.

<CZ / ART end processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the CZ / ART termination process will be described. In the CZ / ART end process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is a CZ failure time or ART end time (S281). If it is neither CZ failure nor ART termination (NO), the main CPU 31 terminates the CZ / ART termination processing, while if CZ failure or ART termination (YES), Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 52 (B)), performs a CZ pullback lottery (S282), and determines whether or not it has won the pullback lottery (S283).

  When the winning lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the type of CZ won for the next game (S284), and sets the value corresponding to the type of CZ won to the CZ game number counter. In step S285, the CZ / ART termination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the winning lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the normal gaming state in the next game (S286). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal middle / high probability lottery table (FIG. 51 (B)), lotteries the CZ lottery state, sets it (S287), and ends the CZ / ART termination process.

[Description of sub-control board operation]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control board 72 using a program will be described.

<Sub navigation control processing>
First, the sub-side navigation control process will be described with reference to FIG. In the sub-side navigation control process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not navigation data has been acquired (S301). The sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data determined by the main control board 71 from the start command data received from the main control board 71. In the processing of S301, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not navigation data is included in the received start command data.

  When the navigation data is acquired (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the sub navigation data according to the navigation data (S302). Referring to FIG. 74, for example, when the navigation CPU “4” is acquired, the sub CPU 81 sets navigation data for informing the push order “left, middle, right” as sub navigation data. To do. Thereby, the content of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

  On the other hand, when the navigation data is not acquired (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not navigation (notification of the stop operation) is necessary (S303). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 needs to navigate, for example, when a flag conversion lottery is performed on the main control board 71 or when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination on the main control board 71. Is determined. The result of the flag conversion lottery and the type of the internal winning combination are included in the start command data, and the sub CPU 81 can determine whether or not navigation is necessary from various information included in the start command data. .

  When it is determined that navigation is not necessary (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the sub-side navigation control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that navigation is necessary (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets sub side navigation data corresponding to various lottery results (S304), and ends the sub side navigation control processing. For example, the sub-CPU 81 displays navigation data for displaying a combination of symbols of “triple chili lip” when the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination and winning the flag conversion lottery. (For example, navigation data that targets the Chile symbol by pushing forward) is set, and if the combination “F_Challenging Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the symbol of “Replay” Navi data for displaying the combination (for example, navigation data indicating a pressing order other than the normal pressing) is set. Thereby, even if it is a case where the content of stop operation is not alert | reported by the main side, the content of stop operation can be alert | reported independently by the sub side.

<Player registration process>
Next, the player registration process will be described with reference to FIG. In the player registration process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a registration operation has been accepted (S311). For example, when a predetermined operation is received on the registration screen displayed when the operation of the registration button 212b is received on the menu screen 212 (see FIG. 29) of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration operation has been received. To do.

  When the registration operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets a player registration state (S312). As will be described later, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the sub CPU 81 can display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201. The display screen 201 is controlled.

  On the other hand, if the registration operation has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a registration deletion operation has been received (S313). For example, when a specific operation is accepted on the registration screen of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that a registration deletion operation has been accepted. If the registration deletion operation has not been accepted (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the player registration process.

  On the other hand, when the registration deletion operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the player registration state. As will be described later, in a situation where the player registration state is cleared, the sub CPU 81 makes the first sub display incapable of displaying the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201. The display screen of the apparatus 201 is controlled.

<History management processing>
Next, the history management process will be described with reference to FIG. In the history management process, first, the sub CPU 81 obtains a game result from various command data received from the main control board 71 (S321). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the game history (S322) and ends the history management process. For example, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination from the start command data, and the combination of symbols displayed from the winning action command data (that is, determined as the internal winning combination) Whether or not a role has been won can be ascertained. Further, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the current gaming state and the transition state of the gaming state from, for example, start command data. From these game results acquired from the various command data, the sub CPU 81, for example, includes various information such as the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, the number of games (the number of games), the number of CZs, the number of successful CZs, Can manage game history.

[Switching the display screen of the first sub display device]
Next, a method for switching the display screen of the first sub display device 201 in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (A) is a transition example of the display screen of the first sub display device 201 in a situation where the player registration state is not set, and FIG. 95 (B) is the player registration state being set. It is an example of a transition of the display screen of the first sub display device 201 in the situation.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (A), in the situation where the player registration state is not set, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 81) displays the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 as the top screen 211, the menu. Control is performed so that transition is possible only between various display screens that can be transitioned from the screen 212 and the menu screen 212. Specifically, the sub control board 72 uses the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 based on a touch operation (for example, a tap operation on a predetermined button or a swipe operation on the display screen) acquired via the touch sensor 201a. The display screen between. On the other hand, in a situation where the player registration state is not set, the sub-control board 72 controls the display of the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 to be impossible. That is, in a situation where the player registration state is not set, the player cannot display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 on the first sub display device 201.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), in the situation where the player registration state is set, the sub control board 72 displays the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 as the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212. In addition to the various display screens that can be changed from the menu screen 212, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are also controlled to be able to change. That is, the sub-control board 72 controls not only the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 but also the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 based on the touch operation acquired through the touch sensor 201a. Thereby, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the player can display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 on the first sub display device 201.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (B), the order of transition of the display screen among the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 is arbitrary. For example, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 may be directly transitioned from the top screen 211, and the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 may be transitioned only from the top screen 211 via the menu screen 212. Good.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not possible to make a direct transition from the top screen 211 to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, and only through the menu screen 212, the game information screens 213, 214, 215. It is possible to transition to. More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a transition to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 is made possible by performing a swipe operation on the menu screen 212.

  Here, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are not display screens provided with buttons corresponding to the menu screen 212, but display screens provided completely independently from the menu screen 212. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, information indicating a game result that the player has a strong interest in the game, such as a game history, is obtained from related information that is not related to a game result such as a payout arrangement or volume control. Display independently. The pachislot machine 1 allows transition to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 without requiring a menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 in a situation where the player registration state is set. As a result, the pachislot machine 1 can facilitate access to information (game history) that the player wants to confirm in a situation where the player registration state is set.

  On the other hand, the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 cannot be changed to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215, and the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 cannot be changed without performing a swipe operation that is not in the menu display. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the operation for transition to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 can be handled as a hidden command in the situation where the player registration state is set. From the player's perspective, the player's own knowledge of the pachislot machine 1 allows the player to see a more detailed game history that cannot be seen by other players with less knowledge. As a result, it can be expected to play games actively.

(Display the top screen from the game information screen)
In the pachislot machine 1, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 transition to the top screen 211 manually or automatically by the player. Specifically, when the return button is operated on the game information screens 213, 214, and 215, the display screen transitions from the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 to the top screen 211 (manual transition). Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211 regardless of the player's operation (automatic transition).

  More specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, in the state where the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the insertion operation (the operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1 bet button, and the medal insertion slot 22) When the input operation is performed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211. Note that in a state where there is a high probability (high lip state) that a replay role that performs replay operation is determined as an internal winning combination (high lip state) as in the ART game state, the medal is automatically generated by the replay operation associated with the replay winning a prize. As a result, the opportunity to display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 may be limited in the high lip state. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, when a medal is automatically inserted by the re-game operation, when the start operation is performed instead of the medal insertion, the top screen is automatically displayed from the game information screens 213, 214, 215. Transition to 211.

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1, when the re-game is being performed, when the start operation is performed, the game information screen 213, 214, 215 automatically transitions to the top screen 211, and the re-game is activated. If the game is not performed, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are automatically transitioned to the top screen 211 when the input operation is performed.

(Display from the display screen corresponding to the menu to the top screen (or menu screen))
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the player can change from various display screens (a registration screen, an explanation screen, an array payout screen, a reach eye screen, a WEB introduction screen, and a volume adjustment screen) that can be changed by a menu selection operation on the menu screen 212. Transition to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) manually or automatically. Specifically, when a predetermined button (for example, a top button) is operated on various display screens, the display screen is transitioned from the various display screens to the top screen 211, and a specific button (for example, , The return button) is operated, the display screen transitions from the various display screens to the menu screen 212 (manual transition). Further, when a predetermined time elapses while various display screens are displayed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) regardless of the player's operation.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the time for transitioning to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is varied depending on the type of display screen currently displayed. For example, if the volume adjustment screen for adjusting the volume output from the pachislot machine 1 is displayed for a long time, the volume may be adjusted to an unintended volume due to an erroneous operation, and other players may become uncomfortable due to an erroneous operation. Since there is a possibility that it will occur, the screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212) in a shorter time than other display screens. On the other hand, the registration screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a longer time than other display screens in order to facilitate player registration.

  That is, the time for transitioning to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is set on the various display screens, the time shorter than the other display screens is set on the volume adjustment screen, The registration screen has a longer time than other display screens.

(Function to select whether or not to operate the menu)
In the pachislot machine 1, the player transitions from the menu screen 212 to a registration screen, an explanation screen, an array payout screen, a reach eye screen, a WEB introduction screen, and a volume adjustment screen. Operations can be performed and various information can be confirmed. Here, the functions that can be selected by the player may be limited in accordance with the settings on the game store side.

  For example, the game store can restrict volume control by the player by restricting the transition from the menu screen 212 to the volume control screen (for example, the volume button 212g is not displayed on the menu screen 212). .

[Modification of First Embodiment]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment has been described above. Then, the modification of the pachislot machine 1 of 1st Embodiment is demonstrated.

<Typical CT game and notification lottery during normal ART>
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when an advantageous state (for example, CT) is won, the next game is immediately shifted to an advantageous state. In a pachislot machine, when advantageous control is performed for a player, the advantageous control may be performed after a predetermined number of games, instead of immediately performing the advantageous control. This predetermined number of games is called a so-called precursor game. In this modification, for example, when a CT lottery is won during normal ART, a pachislot machine 1 that does not immediately perform CT but sandwiches a predetermined number of precursor games will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 96A, during normal ART, CT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination using the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 61). Winning this CT lottery shifts to a state advantageous to the player called CT (additional chance zone), so various lotteries for CT lottery are performed on the main side (main control board 71) until CT wins. . Specifically, the main control board 71 performs an internal lottery to determine the internal winning combination, and also serves as the internal winning combination “F_Challenging Lip”, “F_1 Chick Lip”, “F_Reach Eye Lip A” to “F_Reach Eye Lip”. If any of “D” is determined, flag conversion lottery is performed using the ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 58).

  On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 according to this modification, during the CT sign after winning the CT lottery, the CT based on the combination after the flag conversion lottery (that is, the combination “three consecutive chili lip” or the combination “reach eye lip”) A lottery that gives a privilege to a player such as a lottery is not performed. Then, during this CT precursor, flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side (sub control board 72), and the notification content performed on the sub side is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on this sub side. For example, when the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, information for displaying the symbol combination of “reach eye lip” is displayed on the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won , Information for displaying a combination of symbols of “Replay” is displayed on the display unit 100.

  As described above, in the recent pachislot machines, it is required to perform a lottery that affects the player's profit (out of play) on the main side, but in the pachislot machine 1 of this modification, the lottery of the flag conversion lottery A period during which the result does not have any influence on the player's profit (during CT sign) is provided, and flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side only during this period. As a result, for example, in a situation where the grant of a privilege that is CT precursor is decided, it is possible to increase the opportunity to display a special symbol combination of “reach eye lip”, and the variation in how to show the symbol combination increases. Therefore, an improvement in playability can be expected.

  FIG. 96 (B) is a flag conversion lottery table in the CT precursor used for the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82. The flag conversion lottery table indicating the CT sign defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the flag conversion lottery table for the CT precursor, during the CT precursor, the roles “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” are converted to the role “reach eye lip” with a very high probability. I understand. As a result, when the combination “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is determined as an internal winning combination during the CT precursor, the combination of “reach eye lip” symbols is displayed with a high probability. As a result, it can be suggested to the player that a sign is in progress. In addition, although it repeats, when the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, although the notification for displaying the symbol combination of “reach eye lip” is performed, no privilege is given.

  Of course, the flag conversion lottery during CT sign may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery on the sub side during the period that does not affect the player's profit as in this modification, the main side Data capacity and processing load can be reduced, which is preferable.

<Another example of the push order for triple dust display>
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, when the combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chick Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, when the correct answer is given in the pressing order, the combination of symbols of “Triple Chilli Lip” is displayed. If the answer is incorrect, the combination of symbols “Replay” is displayed (FIG. 47). Further, it is assumed that the correct answer push order is “forward push” with respect to the roles “F_Challenged Lip” and “F_1 Chilly Lip”.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present modification, the combination of symbols displayed at the time of incorrect answer is increased in the order of pressing when the winning combinations “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” are determined as internal winning combinations. , The order of pushing correct answers is made different for each of the roles “F_acceptance lip” and “F_1 credibility”.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present modification, the role “F_accuracy lip” is “correctly pressed” (the first stop operation is the left reel). 3L) ”, and the incorrect pressing order is“ middle pressing (reel 3C in which the first stop operation is middle) ”and“ reverse pressing (first stop operation is on the right reel 3R) ”. The combination “F_CHILILIPP” is displayed with the symbol combination of “Triple Chililip” when pressed forward, and the symbol combination of “REPLAY” is displayed when pressed with “Middle press”. "Is displayed, the combination of symbols of" Two-time Chile Lip "is displayed.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present modification, the role “F_1 correct chililip” has the correct push order “reverse push” and the wrong push order “forward push” and “middle push”. And The combination “F_1 Chilli Lip” is displayed with the symbol combination “Triple Chilli Lip” when pressed reversely, and the symbol combination “Replay” is displayed when pressed “Middle Press”. "Is displayed, the combination of symbols of" Two-time Chile Lip "is displayed.

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present modification, when any of the combination “F_accuracy lip” and “F_1 accuracy lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the type of the winning combination is determined by “forward pressing”. Depending on the type of the winning combination, “Triple Chile Lip” or “Two Chile Lip” will be displayed. . On the other hand, if any of the combination “F_Challenging Lip” or “F_1 Challenging Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of “Replay” symbols regardless of the type of winning combination when “Cushing” Is displayed.

  By doing in this way, for example, when the winning combination “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, various navigations (notifications) for targeting the Chile symbol are possible. Specifically, it is possible to perform both “navigation that targets the Chile symbol by pressing forward” and “navigation that targets the Chile symbol by pressing backward”. When the role “F_Chili Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, “Navi that targets the Chile symbol by pressing forward” is a navigation to display “Triple Chilli Lip”. The “navigation that aims at the Chile symbol” is a navigation for preventing the display of “triple chilli lip” (double chilli lip is displayed). On the other hand, when the role “F_1 certain chili lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, “navigation that targets the Chile symbol by pushing forward” is a navigation for preventing “triple chili lip” from being displayed. “Navigation to aim at Chile symbol by pressing” is a navigation for displaying “Triple Chile Lip” (double Chile Lip is displayed).

  In the pachislot machine 1 of this modification, whether or not to perform these navigations is managed by a flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, and the navigation is performed under the control of the sub side based on the result of the flag conversion lottery on the main side. Is executed.

  FIG. 97 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the main-side flag conversion lottery during normal ART and the sub-side navigation. During the normal ART, when the winning combination “F_accurate lipping” and “F_1 certain lipping” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 performs a two-stage flag conversion lottery (see FIG. 58). On the sub side, the result of the two-stage flag conversion lottery is acquired from the start command data, and navigation to be performed by the display unit 100 is determined based on the result of the two-stage flag conversion lottery.

  Specifically, in the case of non-winning at the time of the first stage flag conversion lottery among the two stages of flag conversion lottery, the sub-control board 72 performs “replay navigation”. In this “replay navigation”, the sub-control board 72 notifies the player to press the middle. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), the combination of symbols of “Replay” is displayed when the character is “F_accurate lip” or “F_1 credible lip”, when it is pressed halfway.

  In addition, when the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won in the two-stage flag conversion lottery and the second-stage flag conversion lottery is not won, the sub-control board 72 performs “chile-repelling navigation”. In this “Chilli Lip Rotation Navi”, the sub-control board 72 informs that if the role “F_Challenging Lip” is an internal winning role, the reverse “F_1 Chilli Lip” is aimed at the Chile symbol, and the role “F_1 Chilli Lip” is internal. If it is a winning combination, it will notify you so that you can aim the Chile symbol by pushing forward. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), when the combination “F_accurate lip” is pressed in reverse and when the combination “F_1 cred. Will be.

  In addition, when the flag conversion lottery of both the first stage and the second stage among the two stages of flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 performs “chili rip matching navigation”. In this “Chilli Lip Matching Navi”, the sub-control board 72 informs that the Chile symbol is aimed by pushing forward when the role “F_Accurate Chile Lip” is an internal winning combination, In the case of a winning combination, a notice is given so that the Chile symbol can be aimed by reverse pressing. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), a combination of symbols of “triple chili lip” is displayed at any time when the role “F_accurate lip” is pressed forward and when the role “F_1 cred. Will be.

  As described above, since the notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery does not affect profits (although the flag conversion lottery itself affects profits, the combination of symbols displayed as a result affects profits) The notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery is not performed on the main side (instruction monitor) but only on the sub side (display unit 100). In this respect, as in this modified example, not only “Chilli lip matching navigation” but also “Chilli lip navigation” can be used to perform navigation that does not affect profits in various ways on the sub-side. Will improve.

[Effect of pachislot machine]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Management of duration during CT)
In the pachislot machine 1, CT is provided as an extra chance zone for extending the duration of normal ART, and the number of ART games is added based on the internal winning combination in the CT. CT is performed by 8 games per set, but if the number of ART games can be added during CT, the number of games is not subtracted, and the number of games is subtracted only when it cannot be added. . For the player, it is not known how long the CT will continue, and as long as the addition is performed, the CT will not end, so that the interest of the game during the CT can be enhanced.

  At this time, the pachislot machine 1 resets the game 8 times per set when an extra is made in accordance with the “three-line chili lip” during CT. As a result, even if the CT is about to end, it will be restarted from the beginning by being added according to the role “triple chili lip”, so there is a strong interest in the game during CT The game can be continued without being bored, and the interest of the game during CT can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the addition according to the combination “three consecutive chili rips” is performed only when winning the flag conversion lottery when the “F_definite chili lip” and “F_1 definite chili lip” are determined as internal winning combinations, the player Can be prevented from giving excessive profits, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced. In the pachislot machine 1 described above, the flag conversion lottery for the roles “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 credible lip” is always won during CT (see FIG. 65), but the winning probability is only an example. This does not prevent the player and the amusement store from taking appropriate measures in accordance with the balance of profits.

(Number of extra games based on the role of “Triple Chile Lip” in CT)
In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, when the number of times that the addition based on the combination “triple chili lip” is performed during CT exceeds a certain number, the number of games to be added per time is increased. As described above, as long as the number of ART games is added, CT will not end, and CT will be reset if the winning combination “Triple Chile Lip” is won. The more you continue, the more you can expect the additional amount per time to increase, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, the number of times to increase the additional amount per time is more (9 times or more) than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT. Can be prevented, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

(Bonus notification on the main side)
Further, the pachislot machine 1 uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the combination related to the bonus “10” (or “11”) on the instruction monitor of the information display 14. By displaying, bonus notification is performed on the main side. Here, in the case of a pachislot machine, the priority order of the symbols to be drawn is usually determined, and when the bonus winning combination and other winning combinations are determined as internal winning combinations, the bonus winning combination is determined according to the priority ranking. Depending on the design, the combination of symbols may be withdrawn or may not be withdrawn.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the combination relating to the bonus and any of “out of”, “F_special combination 1”, “F_special combination 2”, and “F_special combination 3” are determined as internal winning combinations. In some cases, a combination of symbols can be drawn in according to the combination related to the bonus. However, if another combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to the bonus can be drawn in. I can't. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, an instruction is given only when the combination related to the bonus and any one of “out of”, “F_special combination 1”, “F_special combination 2”, and “F_special combination 3” is determined as the internal winning combination. Display “10” (or “11”) on the monitor. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing at which the winning combination can be won.

  In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, even if the combination related to the bonus and any one of “out of”, “F_special combination 1”, “F_special combination 2”, and “F_special combination 3” is determined as the internal winning combination, The indication monitor does not display “10” (or “11”) on the instruction monitor until the predetermined number of games elapses after the winning combination is first won, on the condition that the predetermined number of games elapse. Display “10” (or “11”).

  For example, there may be an effect (so-called continuous effect) that is performed over a plurality of games triggered by winning the role related to the bonus. During the continuous effect, “10” (or “ 11 ") is displayed, the meaning of the continuous performance is lost, and there is a possibility that the interest is impaired. In this regard, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment does not display on the instruction monitor until a predetermined number of games have elapsed, and performs display on the instruction monitor after the predetermined number of games have elapsed. The bonus notification on the main side can be performed without loss.

(Informing on the main / sub side and informing on the sub side alone)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, a plurality of types of combinations having different combinations of symbols displayed according to the mode (pushing order) of the stop operation are provided (see FIG. 47), and the symbols to be displayed are included in these types of combinations. A combination that gives a different privilege depending on the combination and a combination that gives the same privilege even if the combination of displayed symbols is different.

  For example, the number of medals to be paid out is different between the case where the symbol combination “bell” is displayed and the case where the symbol combination “bell spill” is displayed, and the symbol combination “replay” is displayed. Since the combination of the symbols of “RT2 transition lip” is displayed and whether or not the transition of the RT gaming state is performed in addition to the re-game operation, the combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” The combination “F_Maintenance Lip_1st” is a combination that gives different privileges depending on the combination of symbols to be displayed. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol combination “Triple Chile Lip” is displayed and in the case where the symbol combination “Replay” is displayed, both only re-activate the game. “Chi Chililip” is a combination that gives the same privilege even if the combination of the displayed symbols is different (Note that the combination “F_Chililip” has different privileges depending on the result of the flag conversion lottery. The combination of the displayed symbols does not affect the privilege to be granted).

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the role that gives different privileges depending on the combination of displayed symbols is notified on both the main and sub sides, but the same even if the displayed combination of symbols is different. The combination that gives the privilege is not notified on the main instruction monitor, but only on the display unit 100 on the sub side. As a result, the notification affecting the privilege can be appropriately performed on the instruction monitor on the main side that manages the privilege, and the notification that does not affect the privilege can be performed with a variety of navigations on the display unit 100 on the sub side. .

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
In addition, since the notification on the sub side at the time of winning the combination “F_Challenging Lip” is performed based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, the lottery (notification lottery) on whether to perform the notification is the main side It is managed by. In other words, when the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” is won, the privilege to be given differs depending on the result of the flag conversion lottery. Therefore, the flag conversion lottery is a lottery that affects the privilege and is strictly managed on the main side.

  On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1, there is a case where a notification as a production is completely performed without affecting the privilege to be given. On the sub-side. For example, during CT precursors, the grant of CT benefits has already been decided, and it is possible to increase the opportunity to display a special symbol combination of “reach eye lip” (in contrast, no benefits are granted) If it is displayed, it will be dissatisfied with the player and cannot be displayed.)

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, when the winning combination “F_reach eye lip A to D” is given during the CT sign, a flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub-side, and the combination of “reach eye lip” symbols is based on the lottery result. A notification for display is performed. Thereby, in the situation where the grant of the privilege that is CT precursor is decided, the variation in how to show the combination of symbols is increased, so that it is possible to expect an improvement in gameability. Further, it is preferable to perform the information lottery (flag conversion lottery) on the sub-side during a period that does not affect the privilege on the sub-side, so that the main-side data capacity and processing load can be reduced.

(How to display game history)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, a first sub display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100, and various information useful to the player is displayed on the first sub display device 201. For example, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a top screen 211 that displays an outline game history on the first sub display device 201, a menu screen 212 that allows various operations on the pachi-slot machine 1, and game information screens 213 and 214 that show detailed game history. , 215 are displayed. The pachislot machine 1 registers a player who performs a game and provides a service specific to the player. For example, when the player registration is not accepted, the player information is accepted although the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 representing the detailed game history are not displayed on the first sub display device 201. In this case, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 representing the detailed game history are controlled to be displayed on the first sub display device 201. Since a more detailed game history can be confirmed leads to an improvement in the convenience of the player, the pachislot machine 1 can improve the convenience when accepting the registration of the player.

  Here, the first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that produces effects, and the sub-control board 72 is connected to the first sub-display device 201 (and via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown)). Since the second sub display device 202) is controlled and the display unit 100 is controlled via the accessory relay board (not shown), the first sub display device 201 can be controlled separately from the display unit 100. . Specifically, the display of the first sub-display device 201 can be switched even during a game (that is, when an effect is being executed on the display unit 100). From the viewpoint of the player, it is preferable that various information can be acquired without disturbing the effect being executed on the display unit 100 by switching the display of the first sub display device 201 during the game.

  In particular, as in the display unit 100 in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect of using a planar image display by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms that cause an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B When performing an effect using a video display with a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) and an effect using a curved video display, although the effect can be remarkably enhanced, Is not suitable for displaying unrelated information. In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since information unrelated to these effects is displayed on the first sub display device 201 provided separately from the display unit 100, the effect of the effects is not impaired. And various information, such as a game history, can be displayed appropriately.

  By the way, in general, a pachislot machine has a medal slot on the right side when viewed from the player of the pedestal, and a bet button and a start lever on the left side when viewed from the player. In this case, the player operates the right side or the left side (side) of the pedestal.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1, the first sub display device 201 is provided on the side (right side or left side) of the surface standing substantially vertically from the pedestal portion 10, and the first sub display device 201 is displayed on the screen of the first sub display device 201. A touch sensor 201a for switching the display of the sub display device 201 is provided. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the first sub display device 201 and the input device (touch sensor 201a) for controlling the display are provided at a place where the player's hand is located during the game, and the player's operability is improved. Will improve. In particular, since the first sub display device 201 with the touch sensor 201a is provided on the surface standing from the horizontal surface of the pedestal unit 10, the player can place the first sub display while placing his hand on the pedestal unit 10. The apparatus 201 can be operated, which not only improves the operability, but also reduces fatigue associated with the operation, so an improvement in operating rate can be expected.

[Second Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 109. In addition, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure and control similar to the pachislot machine 1 of 1st Embodiment.

[Game flow of the pachislot machine of the second embodiment]
Initially, with reference to FIG. 98, the game flow of the pachislot machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 98 is a game state transition flow regarding the presence / absence of notification of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment. Comparing the game state transition flow of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 98 with the game state transition flow of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 33, the first embodiment and the second embodiment are basically the same. Although the game is played in the same flow, the game is played in a different flow in the ART game state. That is, the control of CT during the ART gaming state is greatly different between the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

  Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a CT lottery is performed based on an internal winning combination during a normal ART, and when the CT lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted to CT. On the other hand, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment differs from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that CT is set between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. The MB (combination “F_MB”) is a continuous differential device related to a so-called second type special combination. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 has an MB as an internal winning combination. When determined, it is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the corresponding symbol combination (combination “C_MB”) is displayed along the active line.

  In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, the non-flags in the ART gaming state are set as normal ARTs, and CT is performed between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. That is, in the second embodiment, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state between the MB flags when the MB is determined as an internal winning combination during (H) normal ART. A game is played between the MB flags in the ART game state so that the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed, and the main control board 71 performs CT during this period. In addition, the method of playing a game so that the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is not displayed between the MB flags is already well known. For example, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is not displayed. This can be realized by performing notification or notification of a pressing order without displaying a combination of symbols according to MB.

  On the other hand, when CT ends, MB winning is prompted (notified), and (I) when a combination of symbols corresponding to MB is displayed, the gaming state shifts from between the MB flags to the MB gaming state. Thereafter, when the end condition of the (J) MB gaming state is satisfied, the gaming state shifts from the MB gaming state to the MB non-flag state, and normal ART is performed.

<Characteristics of CT performed between MB flags>
Since the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the MB flag, the stop control different from that during the non-MB flag can be performed. For example, when a predetermined small combination is determined as an internal winning combination between the MB flag and during the non-MB flag, since the MB is carried over during the MB flag, the internal winning combination is “MB + predetermined small However, during MB non-flagging, the MB is not carried over, so the internal winning combination is only the “predetermined small combination”. In the pachislot machine, stop control is performed based on the internal winning combination. Therefore, even if the same predetermined small combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flags and between the non-MB flags, different stop control is performed. Stop control can be performed based on the information, and as a result, the combination of symbols that can be displayed for a predetermined small combination can be different between MB flags and non-MB flags.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, display is difficult (or cannot be displayed) during normal ART (between MB non-flags) by changing the stop control between MB flags and between MB non-flags. By displaying the combination of symbols during CT (between MB flags), various games are realized. Hereinafter, the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described in detail while paying attention to differences from the first embodiment.

[Correspondence between winning role and stop symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG.99 and FIG.100, the relationship between the internal winning combination and the symbol combination displayed in the pachislot machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. The pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment differ in the type of combination used and the type of combination of symbols, so this point will be described first.

(Types of roles used in the second embodiment)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the roles “F_Chill Lip”, “F_Challenging Lip”, “F_1 Chick Lip”, “F_Leach Eye Lip A” to “F_Reach Eye Lip D” are used. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, instead of these roles, the roles “R_single dust 1” to “F_3 consecutive dust 4” are used.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the roles “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” are used. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” are used instead of these roles. In the following, the roles “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” may be simply referred to as “push order bell”. Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, a combination (combination “F_MB”) related to an MB that the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment does not have is used. In addition, about another role, since 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment may be common and may differ, description is abbreviate | omitted.

(Types of symbol combinations used in the second embodiment)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, combinations of symbols “Bell”, “Bell spilling eyes”, and “One-shot” are used as combinations of symbols corresponding to the roles “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd”. I used it. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, as combinations of symbols corresponding to the roles “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6”, in addition to these symbols, “MB "Cactus" symbol combination is used. The combination of symbols “MB” may be arbitrary. Also, the symbol combination of “cactus” may be the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the number of medals to be paid out when displayed is the same as the symbol combination of “bell” (9 Sheet).

<Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol during non-MB flag>
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a relationship between an internal winning combination between MB non-flags and a combination of displayed symbols. As shown in FIG. 99, during the MB non-flag period, the combinations “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and the pressing order is “ In the case of “forward press”, the symbol combination “replay” is displayed along the active line. On the other hand, when the pressing order is other than “forward pressing”, the symbol combination “Chilli Lip” is displayed along the active line in the correct pressing sequence, and the symbol combination “Replay” is displayed in the incorrect pressing sequence. Is displayed.

  More specifically, in the combinations “F_Single Chilli Lip 1” to “F_Single Chilli Lip 4”, the combination of symbols “Single Chilli Lip” is displayed in the case of the correct pressing order for each role. In the case of an incorrect answer pressing order for each combination, a symbol combination of “Replay” is displayed. In addition, in the combinations “F_2 Series Chile Lip 1” to “F_2 Series Chile Lip 4”, the combination of symbols of “2 Series Chile Lip” is displayed in the case of the correct pressing order for each role. In the case of incorrect answer pressing order, a combination of symbols of “Replay” is displayed. In addition, in the combinations “F_3 consecutive chili lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chili lip 4”, in the case of the correct pressing order for each role, the combination of symbols of “3 consecutive chili lip” is displayed. In the case of incorrect answer pressing order, a combination of symbols of “Replay” is displayed.

  In addition, during the MB non-flag, the combinations “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the push order. In the case of pressing order, the combination of symbols of “Bell” is displayed. In the case of the pressing order of incorrect answer for each role, the combination of symbols of “Bell spilling eyes” or “1 sheet appearance” is displayed. Is displayed.

<Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol between MB flags>
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a relationship between an internal winning combination between MB flags and a combination of displayed symbols. As shown in FIG. 100, among the MB flags, the combinations “F_Single Chilli Lip 4” to “F_Triple Chilli Lip 4” are displayed along the active line regardless of the pressing order. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the combination “F_MB” and any of the combinations “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations, The combination of symbols is displayed along the active line.

  More specifically, in the combinations “F_Single Chilli Lip 1” to “F_Single Chilli Lip 4”, the combination of symbols of “Single Chilli Lip” is displayed along the active line regardless of the pressing order. ~ "F_2 Series Chile Lip 4" displays the combination of symbols of "2 Series Chile Lip" along the active line regardless of the order of pressing, and "F_3 Series Chile Lip 1" to "F_3 Series Chile Lip 4" The combination of symbols of “Triple Chile Lip” is displayed along the active line.

  Comparing FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the roles “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Triple Chile Lip 4” are displayed according to the order of pressing during the non-MB flag. While the combinations are different, there is no effect on the combination of symbols for which the pressing order is displayed during the MB flag.

  In addition, among the MB flags, the combinations “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the push order, and are determined for each combination. In accordance with the pressing order, a combination of symbols “bell”, “bell spilled or one-shot”, “cactus” and “MB” is displayed. Comparing FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, during the MB flag, more types of symbol combinations are displayed when the winning “push order bell” is won than during the non-MB flag. be able to. Specifically, the combination of symbols “Bell”, “Bell spilled eyes or one piece” is displayed according to the order of pressing during the non-MB flag period, while depending on the pressing order during the MB flag period. A combination of symbols “bell”, “cactus”, “MB”, and “bell bell spilled or one-shot” is displayed.

  As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the roles “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4” and the roles “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” between MB flags. Is different from the stop control for the roles “F_single tip 1” to “F_3 consecutive tips” and “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” during the non-MB flag.

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Next, the flow of games during normal ART of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the combinations “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 continuous lip 4” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. The pachislot machine 1 performs flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination during normal ART. In order to display the combination of symbols, the number of ART games is added. On the other hand, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying a combination of symbols of “replay” is performed without adding the number of ART games.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the additional amount of ART games when winning the flag conversion lottery is determined based on the type of the combination determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, the pachislot machine 1 determines the smallest additional amount when the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the combination “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_Single Chile Lip 4”, The next smallest addition amount is determined in the case of “F_2 consecutive dust lip 1” to “F_2 consecutive dust lip 4”, and the largest additional amount is determined in the case of “F_3 consecutive dust lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive dust lip 4”. To do. As described above, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a notification is made to display a combination of symbols of “Chilelip”, and therefore, for the player, the amount of addition increases as more Chile symbols are displayed. Become.

[Data table in normal ART]
Next, a data table used during normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS. The data tables shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 101 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery performed during normal ART according to the second embodiment. The ART flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the lottery state. The ART level is information that is controlled similarly to the first embodiment, and the lottery state is information that is controlled similarly to the CT lottery state of the first embodiment.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the main control board 71 uses the flag conversion lottery table during ART to convert the roles “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” to the role “Chilli Lip”. Whether or not is determined (flag conversion lottery). When the flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 notifies the correct pushing order for each winning combination through the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, The sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order of incorrect answers for each winning combination through the display unit 100.

<Normal lottery table during ART>
Next, FIG. 102 is a normal ART extra lottery table used for an extra lottery for adding the number of ART games to be added during the normal ART of the second embodiment. The extra lottery table during the normal ART defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

  In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the main control board 71 wins the flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 performs an extra lottery using the extra lottery table during the normal ART, and responds when the extra lottery is won. The number of added games is increased (added to the ART end game number counter). In the figure, the lottery value information associated with the winning combination “Single Chile Lip” includes the internal winning combinations “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_Single Chile Lip 4” when winning the flag conversion lottery. The lottery value information referred to in this case and associated with the winning combination “Two Series Chile Lip” includes the internal winning combinations when winning the flag conversion lottery in the “F_2 Series Chile Lip 1” to “F_2 Series Chile Lip 4”. The lottery value information that is referred to in some cases and associated with the winning combination “Third-time Chile Lip” is that the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is “F_Third Chilli Lip 1” to “F_Third Chilli Lip 4”. It is referred to when

[Game flow during CT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the flow of games during CT of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment differs greatly from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the management method of the CT duration. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the duration of CT by 8 games per set, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, The control board 71 determines the duration of CT based on the number of medals to be paid out during CT (more specifically, the so-called “difference number” obtained by subtracting “the number of medals used in the game” from the “number of medals to be paid out”). Manage.

  Specifically, the main control board 71 terminates the CT when the difference number in the CT reaches the end number (50 sheets) (for example, when the winning “push order bell” wins, the main control board 71 performs a notification for winning the MB. ). Here, when the symbol combination of “bell” and “cactus” is displayed, nine medals are paid out. Therefore, when the symbol combination of “bell” is displayed during CT (more specifically, CT When the flag conversion lottery is not won), the difference number of sheets (6 sheets) in which the duration of CT has increased is consumed. On the other hand, when a combination of symbols of “cactus” is displayed during CT (more specifically, when a flag conversion lottery is won during CT), in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, Maintain the duration of CT.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 103A, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the combination “push order bell” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT. When the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 change the pressing order in which the combination of symbols of “cactus” is displayed for each combination won through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the information is notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of symbols of “bell” for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Announces the pressing order.

  When the symbol combination “bell” or “cactus” is displayed, the main control board 71 increases the difference number by six and digests the duration of the CT. In this case, the main control board 71 adds not only the difference number but also the CT end number to six. As a result, although the difference number during CT has increased by 6 along with the display of the symbol combination “cactus”, the end number of CT has also increased by 6, so if the flag conversion lottery is won, Will be maintained.

  This flag conversion lottery is performed based on the value of the CT meter. That is, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment is provided with a multi-stage CT meter from “1” to “MAX”, and the lower the CT meter, the more the flag conversion lottery is won. The probability is reduced, and the higher the CT meter, the higher the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery.

  The CT meter is promoted or demoted based on the result of the game during CT. That is, the main control board 71 promotes the CT meter with a predetermined probability when the “F_single tip 1” to “F_3 consecutive tip” are determined as internal winning combinations during CT. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the main control board 71 is the lowest when the roles “F_single lip 1” to “F_single lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations during CT. The CT meter is promoted with a probability, and when the roles “F_2 Series Chile Lip 1” to “F_2 Series Chile Lip 4” are determined as internal winning roles, the CT meter is promoted with the next lowest probability and used during the CT. When “F_3 consecutive Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chile Lip 4” are determined as the internal winning combination, the CT meter is promoted with the highest probability.

  Further, when the main control board 71 does not win the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the “push order bell” in CT, the CT meter is demoted. Note that the main control board 71 may demote the CT meter with a predetermined probability when the flag conversion lottery is not won, or may necessarily demote the CT meter.

  Also, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the winning combinations “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations, the number of ART games is added. The amount of addition of the number of ART games varies depending on the number of displayed Chile symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the main control board 71 plays a role “F_Single Chilli Lip 1” during CT. ”To“ F_Single Chilli Lip 4 ”is determined as the internal winning combination, the smallest additional amount is determined, and during the CT, the“ F_2 Series Chili Lip 1 ”to“ F_2 Series Chili Lip 4 ”is determined as the internal winning combination. The next smallest additional amount is determined, and when the combinations “F_3 consecutive dust lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive dust lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations during CT, the largest additional amount is determined.

[Data table in CT]
Subsequently, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. The data tables shown in FIGS. 104 to 106 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<CT flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 104 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery performed during CT according to the second embodiment. The CT flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination and the CT meter.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 converts the roles “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” to “cactus” using this ART flag conversion lottery table. Whether or not (flag conversion lottery). When this flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of symbols of “cactus” for each combination won through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the pressing order is notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are combined with a symbol of “bell” for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. The order of pressing for displaying is notified.

  Here, referring to FIG. 104, it is understood that the flag conversion lottery during CT is more likely to win as the value of the CT meter is higher. When the CT meter is “MAX”, the flag conversion lottery is always won. I understand that. When the flag conversion lottery is won, the duration of the CT is maintained. Therefore, when the CT meter is “MAX”, the CT continues without ending. If the CT does not end, the profit given to the player will be excessive. Therefore, when the CT meter becomes “MAX”, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing. Further, it is also possible to apply both of the demoteing of the CT meter and the upper limit of the number of finished sheets.

  When demoting a CT meter, if it is demoted immediately after being promoted to "MAX", the player's interest is impaired. Therefore, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing after the CT meter becomes “MAX”. Here, since the CT meter is provided in eight stages from “1” to “MAX”, for example, the CT meter is demoted after eight games have been played since the CT meter became “MAX”. Alternatively, the CT meter may be demoted after the flag conversion lottery is performed eight times after the CT meter becomes “MAX”. The value of the CT meter after demotion is arbitrary. For example, the CT meter may be demoted to CT meter “1”, demoted to CT meter “7”, or CT meter “1”. The value of the demoted destination may be determined by lottery from “7” to “7”.

<CT meter promotion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 105 is a CT meter promotion lottery table used for CT meter promotion lottery performed during CT according to the second embodiment. The CT meter promotion lottery table during CT defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the CT meter promotion lottery in association with the current CT meter value and internal winning combination.

  Referring to FIG. 105, the probabilities of winning the CT meter promotion lottery are the lowest in the roles “F_Single Chili Lip 1” to “F_Single Chili Lip 4”, and the “F_2 Double Chili Lip 1” to “F_2 Double Chili Lip 4”. Next, it is found that the roles “F_3 consecutive Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chile Lip 4” are the highest. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CT meter is promoted one step at a time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of steps may be promoted at a time.

<Casting lottery table during CT>
Next, FIG. 106 is an extra lottery table during CT used for extra lottery for adding the number of ART games performed during CT of the second embodiment. The extra lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 performs an extra lottery using the extra lottery table during CT, and when the extra lottery is won, the corresponding extra number of games is added (ART end) Add to the game counter).

  Referring to FIG. 106, the amount of additional ART games in CT is the smallest in the roles “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_Single Chile Lip 4”, and the “F_2 Double Chile Lip 1” to “F_2 Double Chile Lip 4” Next, it is found that there are few, and the roles “F_3 consecutive Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chile Lip 4” are the most numerous. More specifically, in the roles “F_Single Chilli Lip 1” to “F_Single Chilli Lip 4” in which one Chile symbol is displayed, the number of ART games of 10 or more games is added, and two Chile symbols are displayed. In “F_2 Series Chile Lip 1” to “F_2 Series Chile Lip 4”, the number of ART games of 20 games or more is added, and in the roles “F_3 Series Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4”, The number of ART games over 30 games is added. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the number of ART games is added according to the number of Chile symbols displayed during CT.

[Game flow in CZ]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 107, a flow of a game in the CZ of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has CZ1, 2, 3 as CZs as in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the game flow of the CZ3 is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the game flow of the CZ1 and 2 is the same as the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. Different.

  Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 are divided into the first half and the second half, and ranks (modes and points) having different degrees of expectation for winning the ART lottery in the first half are promoted, The lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by a battle effect in the second half (see FIG. 50). As shown in FIG. 107, the basic flow in the CZ1 and CZ2 is the same in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

  On the other hand, the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment in the end conditions of the first half. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first half of CZ1 and CZ2 is terminated based on the number of continuous games. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CZ1 is based on the number of continuous games. CZ2 ends the first half based on the result of the end lottery. Further, both the CZ1 and CZ2 perform the lock lottery in the first half, and when the lock lottery is won, the first half of the CZ1 and 2 is also ended.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), in the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs a lottery for each game. Since this rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 53), detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs a game and lock lottery. This lock lottery is a process of lottery whether or not to perform a game lock based on an internal winning combination. When the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of the CZ1 and performs a game lock (for example, delays the start of rotation at the start of reel rotation). On the other hand, when the lock lottery is non-winning, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of CZ1 and continues the first half of CZ1 until 15 games have elapsed in the first half of CZ1.

  The main control board 71 ends the first half of CZ1 and shifts to the second half when the first half of CZ1 wins 15 games or when a lottery is won. In the second half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. Since this ART lottery is also the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55A and 55C), detailed description will be omitted. However, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, Make sure to win the ART lottery. When the ART lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state, and when the ART lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state via the ART preparation. .

  On the other hand, in the first half of CZ2, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the main control board 71 performs a lottery for each game. Since this rank-up lottery is the same as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 54), detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, the main control board 71 performs an end lottery for each game in the first half of the CZ1, and when the end lottery is won, the first half of the CZ1 is terminated and shifted to the second half while the end lottery is not performed. In the case of winning, the first half of CZ1 is continued.

  Further, in the first half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs a lock lottery every game. When the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of the CZ2 and performs a game lock. On the other hand, when the lock lottery is non-winning, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of CZ2 and continues the first half of CZ2 until winning the end lottery.

  When the main lottery board 71 wins the end lottery or the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of the CZ2 and shifts to the second half. In the second half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs an ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. Since this ART lottery is also the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55B and 55C), a detailed description is omitted. However, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, Make sure to win the ART lottery. When the ART lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state, and when the ART lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state via the ART preparation. .

  Thus, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment differs from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that each game and lock lottery are performed in the first half of CZ1 and CZ2. Further, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment differs from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the end condition of the first half of the CZ2 is determined not by the number of continued games but by the end lottery.

[Data table in CZ]
Next, a data table used in CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. The data tables shown in FIGS. 108 and 109 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<CZ2 end lottery table>
FIG. 108 is a CZ2 end lottery table used for the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment. The CZ2 end lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the end lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

  Referring to FIG. 108, in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment, when the combination “Replay” is determined as the internal winning combination, an end lottery is performed, and this end lottery can be won with a high probability. I understand. Since CZ2 is basically performed during the RT0 to RT3 gaming state, the combination “Replay” is any one of the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip A” to “F_RT4 Lip_3rd”. In the pachislot machine, since replay is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of at least a predetermined (about 1 / 7.3) or more, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, there is a situation where the first half of the CZ2 ends. It can be seen that it occurs relatively frequently.

<Lock lottery table>
FIG. 109 is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1 and CZ2 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 109A is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1. FIG. 109B is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2. The lock lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the lock lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

  109A and 109B, it can be seen that the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 wins with a higher probability than the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the first half of CZ1 ends when the predetermined number of games (15 games) has elapsed, while the first half of CZ2 ends when the end lottery is won. Further, rank-up lottery is performed in the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, and when the first half of CZ1 and CZ2 is completed, ART lottery is performed based on the result of this rank-up lottery. Therefore, it can be said that CZ1 is a chance zone in which the ART lottery timing is fixed, and CZ2 is a chance zone in which the ART lottery timing is indefinite.

  In addition, since the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 is performed when the winning combination “Replay” is determined as an internal winning combination, a higher ranking lottery is performed during CZ2 than during CZ1. It is easy to receive fewer opportunities. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the lock lottery is performed in the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, and the probability of winning this lock lottery is higher in CZ2 than in CZ1. Thereby, even if it is CZ2 which tends to reduce the opportunity to receive a rank-up lottery, it can have an expectation for transfer to ART.

[Modification of Second Embodiment]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, a modification of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described.

<CT sign game and notification lottery>
In the above-described pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, when transitioning between MB flags during normal ART, transition from the next game to CT is immediately performed. However, transition between MB flags is performed. After that, a predetermined number of precursor games may be inserted.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), when the MB is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal ART, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from between the MB non-flags to between the MB flags. During normal ART (between MB non-flags), if the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning “F_Single Chile Lip 4” to “F_3 Chilli Lip 4” is won, the number of ART games is added (see FIG. 102). The flag conversion lottery until the transition between MB flags is performed on the main side (main control board 71) in order to affect the privilege granted to the player.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when it comes between the MB flags, the combination of symbols of “Chilli lip” is always displayed regardless of the pressing order. From the stop control (the combination of displayed symbols), the player may know that the sign game is being played. For example, as shown in FIG. 99, during MB non-flagging, the combination of “Chilli Lip” is not displayed when the combination “F_Single Chilli Lip 1” to “F_3 Continuous Chili Lip 4” is won. When the combination of symbols of “Chilelip” is displayed by pressing forward, the player knows that the MB flag is in the middle (predictor game).

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, when the combinations “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations during the MB flag, the push order is dared to be notified. As described above, when the combination “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination during the MB flag, the symbol combination “Chile Lip” is displayed regardless of the order of pressing. However, when the order of pressing is notified, the player recognizes that the symbol combination “Chilli Lip” is displayed according to the notified pressing order, and that the player is in the middle of the MB flag. It can be difficult to grasp.

  In addition, since such notification of the pushing order does not have any influence on the player's profit, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, a lottery (notification of whether to notify the pushing order during the MB flag) (Lottery) is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side. Of course, the notification lottery during the MB flag may be performed on the main side, but the main side data capacity can be determined by performing the lottery on the sub side that does not affect the player's profit as in this modification. This is preferable because the processing load can be reduced.

  FIG. 110B is a notification lottery table in the CT precursor used for the notification lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82. The notification lottery table indicating the CT sign defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the notification lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination.

  When the notification lottery using the notification lottery table indicating the CT precursor is won, the sub control board 72 notifies an arbitrary push order other than the forward push via the display unit 100.

<Navigation at the time of pushing the bell between MB flags>
Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, when the combination “push order bell” is won during the MB flag, more kinds of symbol combinations are displayed than during the MB non-flag. Specifically, during the period between MB non-flags, the combination of symbols “Bell” and “Bell spilled eyes or one piece” is displayed according to the order of pressing, while between MB flags, “ A combination of symbols of “bell”, “cactus”, “MB”, and “bell bell spilled or one-shot” is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the pressing order necessary to display the combination of “cactus” symbols that can be displayed only during the MB flag is notified during the CT between the MB flags. .

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, when the winning combination “push order bell” is won during the MB flag, the notification contents are made different according to the state until the MB start.

  Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when an MB is determined as an internal winning combination during a normal ART, the gaming state shifts between MB flags, and thereafter CT is performed. In this case, in the pachislot machine 1 that sandwiches a predetermined number of precursor games after moving between MB flags, the states between MB flags are divided into “predictor game” state, “CT” state, and “MB waiting” state. be able to.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, when an MB is won during normal ART, a “precursor game” state between MB flags is entered, after which a predetermined number of precursor games are performed and CT starts. The “CT” state during the MB flag is entered, and thereafter, when the CT ends, the “MB waiting” state is entered until the MB wins.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, the contents of notification when the winning combination “push order bell” is won differ depending on the state between these MB flags. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, in the “predictive game” state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of symbols of “bell” via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Announces the pressing order. Further, in the “CT” state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the symbol combination “bell” or “cactus” is displayed via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. That is, in the “CT” state, the push order according to either “Bell” or “Cactus” is notified based on the result of the flag conversion lottery based on the CT meter as described above.

  In the “MB standby” state after the CT is completed, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify any combination of symbols via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. For example, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify the pressing order in which the symbol combination “bell” is displayed, and the pressing order in which the symbol combination “cactus” is displayed. It is good also as notifying, and it is good also as notifying the pushing order in which the combination of the symbol of "MB" is displayed.

  On the other hand, during the normal ART, since the symbol combination “cactus” cannot be displayed, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the symbol combination “bell” is displayed.

[Effect of Pachislot Machine of Second Embodiment]
Heretofore, the second embodiment of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described. According to such a pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between MB flags)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, during the MB flag, more types of symbol combinations can be displayed when the combination “push order bell” is won than during the non-MB flag. Specifically, the combination of symbols “Bell”, “Bell spilled eyes or one piece” is displayed according to the order of pressing during the non-MB flag period, while depending on the pressing order during the MB flag period. A combination of symbols “bell”, “cactus”, “MB”, and “bell bell spilled or one-shot” is displayed.

  Thereby, without increasing the types of winning combinations, the types of symbol combinations displayed between the MB flags can be increased, and the games between the MB flags can be made diverse. Specifically, it becomes possible to display a combination of “cactus” symbols corresponding to so-called rare roles between MB flags, and the appearance frequency of rare roles without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability. Can be increased. In particular, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the combination of symbols displayed at the time of winning the “push order bell” is changed, it is possible to increase the appearance frequency of a rare combination with a medal payout.

  In addition, when the combination of symbols of “cactus” is continuously displayed during the MB flag, it is known that the MB flag is being used. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, only in the case of winning the flag conversion lottery, the symbol combination of “cactus” is notified, and in the case of non-winning, the symbol combination of “bell” is notified. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the current state, which is preferable. In addition, by controlling the notification contents by flag conversion lottery, the frequency of the symbol combination (rare role) of “cactus” between MB flags can be adjusted, and the gameability between MB flags can be diversified. Can do.

(Gameability during CT)
Also, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT, which is an extra chance zone for adding the number of ART games, is performed between the MB flags. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT is continued until the difference number reaches the end number (50 sheets) during the MB flag. During this CT, if the flag conversion lottery is not won at the time of winning the “push order bell”, the difference number increases and the duration of the CT is consumed. On the other hand, if the flag conversion lottery is won, the number of finishes increases as the difference number increases. And the duration of CT is maintained. Thus, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CT is continued while changing the stop control during the MB flag, and according to the combination of symbols to be displayed (specifically, according to the result of the flag conversion lottery). Since the period can be controlled, the gameability between MB flags can be diversified.

  At this time, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the value of the CT meter, the CT duration is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter. Can do. In addition, this CT meter is promoted when the roles “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations during CT, and demoted when non-winning the flag lottery during CT, The player has a strong interest in the result of the game during CT, and can diversify the game characteristics between MB flags.

  In particular, if the CT meter can be promoted to “MAX”, the flag conversion lottery must be won for a predetermined period. Will improve.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between MB flags and non-MB flags)
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, not only the combination of symbols displayed when winning the “push order bell” is different between the MB flags and between the MB non-flags, The combinations of symbols displayed at the time of winning “1” to “F_3 consecutive chili lips” are also different. That is, the symbol combination “Replay” or “Chile Lip” is displayed during the MB non-flag period, while the symbol combination “Replay” is displayed during the MB flag interval. Only the symbol combination of “Chilelip” is displayed.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the flag conversion lottery is performed both during the MB flag and during the non-MB flag. The flag conversion lottery between MB flags is a lottery of the combination of symbols of “Bell” or “Cactus” to be notified when the winning “push order bell” is won. The flag conversion lottery is for lottery from among the combinations of symbols of “Replay” or “Chilli Lip” to be notified when the winning combination “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip” is won. In this way, by performing flag conversion lottery both between MB flags and between MB non-flags, it is possible to control the combination of symbols displayed both between MB flags and between MB non-flags, It is possible to improve gameability between both flags and between non-flags.

  At this time, for the flag conversion lottery between MB flags, the winning probability is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter, and for the flag conversion lottery between MB non-flags, the winning probability is adjusted based on the ART level and lottery state. The Thereby, each lottery can be managed in its own mode, and the gameability based on the flag conversion lottery is improved.

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
Since the stop control is different between the MB flags and between the MB non-flags, it may be known that the MB flag is being determined from the displayed combination of symbols. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is difficult to grasp the fact that the MB flag is in between by deliberately reporting the push order that is originally unnecessary during the MB flag. Then, by managing the notification of the pushing order on the sub side, the data capacity and processing load on the main side can be reduced.

[Modification]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(Bell navigation between flags and non-flags)
For example, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the main monitor is notified by displaying a numerical value uniquely corresponding to the stop operation information on the instruction monitor. In addition, since the mode of notification on the main side is basically the same in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, an example thereof is shown in FIG. 74 of the first embodiment. Here, in FIG. 74, while “white 7 navigation” and “blue 7 navigation” are performed during the inter-flag state, “bell navigation” is not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. “Bell Navi” or the like may be performed during the state.

  In this case, the numerical value displayed on the instruction monitor may be different between the inter-flag state and the non-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 74A and 74B, when “bell navigation” is performed in the non-flag state, numerical values “1” to “3” (push order second instruction information) are displayed on the instruction monitor. ), On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 112, when “Bell Navi” is performed in the inter-flag state, numerical values “12” to “14” (push order first instruction information) are displayed on the instruction monitor. It is good. Note that the sub-side navigation performed through the display unit 100 may be common in both the inter-flag state and the non-flag state. The same applies to the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, and the numerical value for performing “Bell Navi” during the non-MB flag is different from the numerical value for performing “Bell Navi” during the MB flag. It is good.

  In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not a privilege is granted based on the result of the flag conversion lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification content is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, and as a result, the combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation is performed according to the notification. Will be different. Therefore, the main control board 71 may give a privilege based on a combination of actually displayed symbols.

  In this case, the main control board 71 gives a privilege based on the symbol combination displayed based on the notification performed according to the result of the flag conversion lottery, and based on the symbol combination displayed without following the notification. It is good also as not giving a privilege. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, since the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different, when the player ignores the notification and performs the stop operation, There is a possibility that a special symbol combination such as “Triple Chile Lip” will be displayed. However, even if a special symbol combination is displayed as a result of ignoring the notification, the privilege is granted only when the special symbol combination is displayed as a result of following the notification without giving the privilege. It is good as well.

(Information control that does not affect profits (privileges))
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification affecting the profit is performed by performing a notification lottery (flag conversion lottery) on the main side and controlling whether the notification is performed on the main side. The notification that does not affect the profit is performed by performing a lottery notification on the sub side and controlling whether or not notification is performed on the sub side. As an example of notification that does not affect the profit, the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment shows a notification of “reach eye lip” during the precursor game, and the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment “Chilli lip” notification during the MB flag is shown. In this regard, notification that does not affect profits is not limited to these.

  In recent pachislot machines, there is a case where the game is shifted to a state where it is easy (hard) to perform game lock depending on the order of the stop operation. For example, transition to a state where it is easy to perform game lock when the order is “left, middle, right”, and transition to a state where it is difficult to perform game lock when the order is “right, middle, left” There is. In such a pachislot machine, the notification of the push order makes a transition to a state where it is easy (hard) to lock the game, but if the game lock affects the profit When it is necessary to control this notification on the main side, but whether or not to perform the game lock does not affect profits, this notification may be controlled on the sub side.

  The case where whether or not the game lock is performed affects the profit is, for example, the case where the game lottery is performed as in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment and the ART lottery is won. Yes (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, the case where whether or not the game lock is performed does not affect the profit is a case where the game lock is performed as an effect. For example, during the sign game in which it is decided to grant the profit (privilege) By performing the game lock frequently, it is to show that the profit will be given in the subsequent game.

  FIG. 113A is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between the pressing order and the locked state. In the example shown in FIG. 113 (A), if a stop operation is performed in the order of pressing “left, middle, right” when winning the “F_maintenance lip A”, the lock state changes from “0” to “1”. , “Left, Right, Middle”, “Middle, Left, Right”, “Middle, Right, Left” When the stop operation is performed, the current lock state is maintained, “Right, Left, Middle”, “Right When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing “, middle, left”, the lock state transitions from “1” to “0”. Similarly, when the winning combination “F_Maintenance Lip B” is won, when the stop operation is performed in the first push order, the lock state is changed from “0” to “1”, and the second push order is followed. When the stop operation is performed, the lock state is maintained, and when the stop operation is performed in the third push order, the lock state transits from “1” to “0”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 113 (A), in order to simplify the description, the locked state “0” is set to a state where it is difficult to lock the game, and the locked state “1” is set to a state where the game is easily locked. Of course, the lock state is not limited to two stages, and the number of stages may be three or more. In addition, in the case of three or more stages, multiple stages may be transitioned at once instead of transitioning one by one.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), when the game lock affects profits, a notification lottery on whether or not to perform notification is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, and the lottery result is displayed. Based on this, a predetermined pressing order is notified on both the main side and the sub side. On the other hand, if the game lock does not affect profits, the sub lot (sub control board 72) performs a lottery for determining whether or not to make a notification, and based on the lottery result, the sub side has a predetermined push order. Is notified.

  Depending on the pachislot machine, there are pachislot machines where the game lock affects profits throughout the entire game period, there are pachislot machines where the game lock does not affect profits throughout the game period, There is a pachislot machine in which the game lock does not affect the profit during a specific period of the game while the game lock affects the profit during a predetermined period. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, during the period in which the game lock affects profits, a notification lottery on whether to perform notification is performed on the main side, and a predetermined push is performed on both the main side and the sub side based on the lottery result. While notifying the order, during the period when the game lock affects profits, the sub lot performs a notification lottery on whether or not to perform the notification, and the sub side notifies the predetermined push order based on the lottery result. It is good.

  Since the main control board 71 normally performs the game lock, the main control board 71 has a function of changing the lock state in accordance with the pushing order shown in FIG. That is, the main control board 71 determines whether or not to perform the game lock with a probability corresponding to the lock state set by the lock state setting unit that sets the lock state based on the detected order of stop operations. When the game lock determination means determined by the above and the game lock determination means determine that the game lock is performed, the game lock determination means functions as a lock execution means for temporarily stopping the progress of the game. The main control board 71 or the sub-control board 72 is a notification lottery unit that performs a notification lottery for determining whether or not to notify the push order that the lock state setting unit sets a lock state in which the lock state is easy (hard) to perform the game lock. And it functions as a notifying means for notifying the predetermined push order based on the lottery result of the notifying lottery means.

(Normal termination conditions for ART and CT)
The termination conditions for normal ART and CT are not limited to those described above, and any termination conditions can be adopted. For example, the number of medals awarded during normal ART or CT, the number of unit games during normal ART or CT, the number of times information that is advantageous to the player during normal ART or CT, the number of predetermined games (for example, 50 games) Arbitrary end conditions such as the number of sets when 1) is set and the continuation rate at the end of the set can be adopted.

  Further, as the number of medals awarded during normal ART or CT, for example, a difference number (pure increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game is used. It is good. In addition, the number of medals granted during normal ART or CT may be calculated based on the actually increased medals (calculation based on actual values), and notification is made regardless of whether or not the number actually increased. It is also possible to calculate based on the number of medals scheduled to increase when complying with (calculation based on ideal values). The number of medals awarded may not be increased depending on the type of internal winning combination. For example, with respect to some roles that have a low probability of being determined as an internal winning combination, or for a combination that switches between display / non-display of the combination of symbols depending on the timing of the stop operation, the corresponding combination is determined as an internal winning combination However, the number of awarded medals may not be increased or decreased.

(Type of notification (push order, timing))
Also, the content of the notification normally performed during ART or CT is arbitrary, and it is possible to notify the order (pushing order) of the stop operation in which the combination of symbols advantageous to the player is displayed. It is good also as notifying the timing (design which should be aimed) of stop operation required in order to be displayed.

(Other)
In addition, as an advantageous state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the re-game is not changed (or changed within a range not affecting the game playability), and the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. It is also possible to use a so-called “AT” and activate a replay high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to replaying is increased, and a stop operation advantageous to the player It is good also as using what is called "ART" which alert | reports an aspect.

  In the pachislot machine 1 described above, various display screens are displayed on the first sub display device 201 provided on the left side (the MAX bet button 11 and the start lever 6 side) of the pedestal unit 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various display screens may be displayed on the second sub display device 202 provided on the right side (the medal slot 22 side) of the pedestal unit 10. Similarly, a touch sensor may be provided on the display surface of the second sub display device 202, and the display screen of the second sub display device 202 may be switched based on touch input information output from the touch sensor.

(White 7 (blue 7) navigation and bell navigation between flags)
In the above embodiment, during the inter-flag state, any of the combination related to the bonus (“F_BB1” “F_BB2”) and “out of” “F_special 1” “F_special 2” “F_special 3” is used as the internal winning combination. In the case where the BB (“C_BB1” “C_BB2”) is controlled so that it can be displayed when it is determined, and the other combination such as the bonus combination and the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, BB is controlled so that it cannot be displayed (see FIG. 48). Such control is performed based on the pull-in priority order of a plurality of winning combinations, and in the above-described embodiment, the pulling-in priority rank is higher than the push order winning combination rather than the bonus-related winning combination. Such stop control is performed.

  By the way, depending on the pachislot machine, it is also possible to perform stop control to give priority to the combination related to the bonus combination with higher priority for the combination related to the bonus than the combination related to payout of medals such as push order. is there. Therefore, referring to FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, the white 7 or blue 7 navigation and the bell navigation in the pachislot machine that draws the bonus-related role in preference to the medal payout-related role (for example, push order). Will be described.

  In the following description, white 7 navigation is described as an example, and description of blue 7 navigation is omitted. However, blue 7 navigation has the same relationship as white 7. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the push choices of 3 choices (such as “F_3 choice bell_1st”) are used as push pushes. However, in the example shown below, in order to make the explanation clearer, 6 choices of push choices are used. It is assumed that push order (“F — 6 selection bell — 123”) is used. In this case, as described above, the end of the name of the combination in the 6-select push order means the push order that is correct.

  FIG. 114 (A) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed (some of the combinations are omitted), and corresponds to FIG. 48 in the above embodiment. It is a figure to do. FIG. 114A particularly shows whether or not BB (“C_BB1”) can be displayed during the inter-flag state. In the example shown in FIG. 114 (A), during the inter-flag state, not only when the bonus winning combination and “out of play” are determined as the internal winning combination, but also the bonus winning combination and the push order (“F — 6”). BB can also be displayed when the selection bell_123 "to" F_6 selection bell_321 ") are determined as internal winning combinations.

  Next, FIG. 114 (B) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship (a part of the combinations are omitted) between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of symbols to be stopped. In the pachislot machine 1, the stop control differs depending on the timing of the stop operation (so-called “eye press”) and the order of the stop operation (so-called “push order”). In the case where the winning combination is preferentially drawn, the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 114 (B) is displayed.

  Specifically, if the bonus-related combination (“F_BB1”) and the pressing order (“F_6 selection bell_123” to “F_6 selection bell_321”) are determined as internal winning combinations, In some cases, BB can be displayed regardless of the pressing order because the winning combination is given priority over the pressing order. On the other hand, when the eye press is not accurate, the combination of symbols displayed differs according to the order of pressing. When the pressing order is correct, the symbols of the bells ("C_9 sheets A_01" to "C_9 sheets H_04") are displayed. When the pressing order is incorrect, the combination of symbols of the bell spilled eyes ("R_RT transition A_01" to "R_RT transition B_02") or the first one ("C_1st_A_01" to The symbol combination “C_2nd_B — 04”) is displayed.

  By the way, in the case where the bonus-related combination is given priority over the push order combination, depending on the result of the stop operation, any combination of symbols of BB, bell, bell spilled eyes, and the first one may not be displayed. For example, in the case where the eye is accurately pressed in the first and second stop operations, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed in accordance with the first and second stop operations can display BB, but the bell, bell spill The combination of the eyes and the first pattern may not be displayed. In such a case, if the target of the third stop operation is incorrect, both the bonus combination and the pressing order will be missed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), when the target is not accurate, a combination of out-of-order symbols may be displayed regardless of whether the pressing order is correct / incorrect.

  Here, in a game in which the bonus winning combination and the push winning combination are determined as an internal winning combination, a combination of outlying symbols is displayed, and if any combination is missed, the player is You will remember and you will feel dissatisfied. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of this modification, the following notification (navigation) is performed during the inter-flag state. FIG. 114C is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between notification (navigation) performed on the main side and notification (navigation) performed on the sub side.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (C), in the pachislot machine 1 of this modification, in addition to the “white 7 navigation” described above, “white 7 navigation — 123”, “white 7 navigation — 132”, “white 7 navigation — 213”, “white 7” Navi_231 "," White 7 Navi_312 ", and" White 7 Navi_321 "are performed. “White 7 Navi_123” is performed when the combination “F_BB1” and the combination “F_6 selection bell_123” are determined as the internal winning combination, and “White 7 Navi_132” is combined with the combination “F_BB1” and the combination “F_6”. This is performed when “Choice Bell — 132” is determined as an internal winning combination, and “White 7 Navi — 213” is performed when a role “F_BB1” and a role “F_6 Optional Bell — 213” are determined as internal winning combinations. “White 7 Navi — 231” is performed when the combination “F_BB1” and the combination “F_6 Choice Bell — 231” are determined as internal winning combinations, and “White 7 Navi — 312” is combined with the combination “F_BB1”. This is performed when “F_6 option bell_312” is determined as an internal winning combination, and “White 7 Navi_321” is determined when a role “F_BB1” and a role “F_6 option bell_321” are determined as internal winning combinations. In line It is.

  When performing “White 7 Navi — 123”, the main control board 71 displays a numerical value of “12” on the instruction monitor, and when performing “White 7 Navi — 132”, the main control board 71 displays “13” on the instruction monitor. When performing “White 7 Navi — 213”, the main control board 71 displays “14” on the instruction monitor, and when performing “White 7 Navi — 231”, the main control board 71 When the numerical value “15” is displayed on the instruction monitor and “White 7 Navi — 312” is performed, the main control board 71 displays the numerical value “16” on the instruction monitor and performs “White 7 Navi — 321”. The main control board 71 displays a numerical value “17” on the instruction monitor.

  On the other hand, when performing “White 7 Navi — 123” to “White 7 Navi — 321”, the sub-control board 72 performs the special navigation illustrated in FIG. FIG. 115 shows an example of special navigation corresponding to “White 7 Navi — 123”, but “White 7 Navi — 213” to “White 7 Navi — 321” only differ in the order of notification. Basically, it is the same as “White 7 Navi — 123” shown in FIG.

  When “white 7 navigation_123” is performed, the sub control board 72, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), during the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the push forward combination determined as the internal winning combination. The display unit 100 displays the correct answer pressing order for “F_6 selection bell_123”. In the example shown in FIG. 115 (A), the display unit 100 displays “left, middle, right” push order, which is the correct push order for the push order “F_6 selection bell_123”.

  As in the pachislot machine 1 of this modification, in the case of pulling in the role related to the bonus prior to the pressing order, even if the stop operation is performed according to the notified pressing order, the combination corresponding to the bonus Stop control is performed so as to draw the symbol as much as possible. As a result, at the timing when the first reel is stopped by the first stop operation, (1) a symbol corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed, and a symbol corresponding to the push order is not displayed, (2) the bonus The symbol corresponding to the winning combination is displayed instead of the symbol corresponding to the winning combination. (3) Both the symbol corresponding to the bonus and the symbol corresponding to the pressing order are displayed. Three patterns of stopping modes are conceivable.

  In the case of performing “White 7 Navi — 123”, the symbol corresponding to the combination related to the bonus (specific symbol composition symbol) is the symbol “White 7” that constitutes a combination of symbols of the combination name “C_BB1”. The symbols corresponding to the pressing order (the pressing order composition symbol) are symbols (for example, the symbol “hat”) that constitute the combination names “C_9 winning combination A_01” to “C_9 winning combination H_04”.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, the sub control board 72 switches the contents to be notified according to the stop mode of the symbol displayed in accordance with the stop operation, so that “white 7 navigation_123” to “white 7 navigation_321”. "I do.

  Specifically, when (1) the symbol “white 7” corresponding to the combination relating to the bonus is displayed at the timing when the first reel is stopped, and the symbol corresponding to the pressing order is not displayed, FIG. 115 (B). As shown in the figure, the sub control board 72 stops the notification of the correct pushing order performed during the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and aims at the symbol “white 7” for the reels still rotating. Navigate. Since the player cannot obtain a profit corresponding to the push order on the stopped first reel because the symbol corresponding to the push order is not displayed, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present modification uses the navigation system. , And prompts the player to win a BB. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the display of a combination of out-of-order symbols in the current game.

  If the symbol corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed at the timing when the first reel is stopped (2) and the symbol corresponding to the pressing order is displayed, as shown in FIG. The control board 72 continues to report the correct pushing order performed during the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Since the symbol corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the stopped first reel, the symbol corresponding to the pressing order is drawn when the remaining reels are stopped. In 1, the notification of the correct push order is continued for the push order. As a result, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), a combination of bell symbols is displayed in the current game, and the player pays out a profit (payment of nine medals) according to the combination of the symbols. ).

  Further, when both the symbol corresponding to the bonus-related combination and the symbol corresponding to the pressing order are displayed at the timing when the first reel is stopped, as shown in FIG. The board 72 informs that the stop operation is performed in the correct push order performed during the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R while avoiding the symbol “white 7” for the reel that is still rotating. In the stopped first reel, when both a symbol corresponding to the combination relating to the bonus and a symbol corresponding to the pressing order are displayed, there is a possibility that a combination of either BB or bell is displayed. . Bonuses will be carried over as internal winnings until winning, while pushing forwards (especially those where more than the number of medals will be paid out at the time of winning) will be won only in the game without being carried over. Therefore, in the game, it is more advantageous for the player to achieve the push order winning prize.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to this modification, when both the symbol corresponding to the bonus and the symbol corresponding to the push order are displayed when the reel is stopped, the notification of the pressing order is continued. , To avoid the design “white 7”. As a result, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), a combination of bell symbols is displayed in the current game, and the player pays out a profit corresponding to the combination of the symbols (payout of nine medals). ).

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present modification, by switching the content to be notified in accordance with the progress of the game, it is possible to perform notification that the player does not lose, and as a result, the player plays the game with peace of mind. be able to.

In the example shown in FIG. 115, the description is made only at the time of the first stop, but the content to be notified can be switched similarly at the time of the second stop.
In addition, such “White 7 Navi_123” to “White 7 Navi_321” are performed only during a gaming state (ART gaming state) for notifying a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player, and during the general gaming state. It is also possible to simply perform “white 7 navigation”. That is, when the role “F_BB1” and the role “F_6 selection bell_123” are determined as the internal winning combination during the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 execute “White 7 Navi_123”. When the combination “F_BB1” and the combination “F_6 option bell_123” are determined as the internal winning combination during the general gaming state, “White 7 Navi” may be simply executed.

  Further, the management of the duration of the ART gaming state when “White 7 Navi — 123” or the like is executed during the ART gaming state can be arbitrarily performed. That is, since the stop operation mode (push order) advantageous to the player is notified even in the inter-flag state, for example, when the duration of the ART gaming state is managed by the number of games, The number of games in the intermediate state may also be counted as the number of games in the ART gaming state (added to the ART continuing game number counter). For example, when the duration of the ART gaming state is managed by the number of navigations The number of times such as “White 7 Navi_123” performed during the inter-flag state may be counted as the number of navigations during the ART gaming state. For example, the duration of the ART gaming state may be counted during the ART gaming state. When managed based on the number of paid-out medals or the number of medals, the number of medals paid out with “White 7 Navi_123” is also in the ART gaming state. It may be counted as the number of paid out medals.

  Of course, on the contrary, the inter-flag state may be managed as not affecting the duration of the ART gaming state. Further, the duration of the ART gaming state may be managed based on the result of the game in which “White 7 Navi — 123” is played. For example, when a profit (payment of 9 medals) is given according to the pushing order according to “White 7 Navi — 123” or the like, the game in which “White 7 Navi — 123” or the like has been performed is ART. If it is determined that the game is in the gaming state, the duration in the ART gaming state is managed, and if the profit according to the pushing order is not given according to “White 7 Navi_123” or the like, the game is placed in the ART gaming state. It is good also as managing the continuation period in ART game state not being a game inside.

  In addition, it becomes possible to extend the alerting | reporting area in the state between flags by not displaying the symbol combination according to the combination which concerns on a bonus. Therefore, once the notification based on the main navigation “10” (for example, “White 7 Navi” in the game of the “winning” internal winning combination) is executed, the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to the bonus in the game is displayed. If not, the sub-control board 72 then sets “White 7 Navi” instead of “White 7 Navi_123” to “White 7 Navi_321” to the main navigations “12” to “17”. It may be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent capture by stretching. In the game in which the notification based on the main-side navigations “12” to “17” is executed, if the symbol combination corresponding to the combination related to the bonus cannot be displayed, the sub-control board 72 does not correspond to the strategy by the extension. Perform “White 7 Navi — 123” to “White 7 Navi — 321” for the subsequent main navigations “12” to “17”.

  In addition, during the inter-flag state, a part of the push order bell may be controlled by the same reel control as the push order unquestioned bell so as to reduce the player's frequency of pushing. Then, neither the push order navigation nor the white 7 navigation is displayed, and if it is informed that a small role can be acquired without regard to the push order, the player can avoid unnecessary pushing.

[Third Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 146. In addition, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure and control similar to the pachislot machine 1 of 1st Embodiment or 2nd Embodiment. Further, the features of the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment described below can be similarly applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

<Control system of pachislot machine>
A control system provided in the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided inside the housing 60 and a sub-control board 72 provided on the upper door 62a. The pachislot machine 1 includes a reel relay terminal plate 410, a ratio display device 420, a setting key type switch 430, a cabinet-side relay substrate 440, and a power supply device 450 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes an external concentration terminal board 73, a hopper device 40, a medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and a reset switch 442 connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 440.
In addition, since the structure of the external concentration terminal board 73 and the hopper apparatus 40 was mentioned above, those description is abbreviate | omitted here.

  The reel relay terminal plate 410 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 410 is electrically connected to the stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motors.

The ratio display device 420 includes a ratio display board 421 connected to the main control board 71, and a ratio indicator 422 and a changeover switch 423 connected to the ratio display board 421. The ratio display board 421 controls the display of the ratio display 422 based on the signal output from the main control board 71. The ratio display 422 displays various ratios such as a specific section ratio and an accessory ratio. The changeover switch 423 switches the display of the ratio indicator 422.
The configuration of the ratio display 422 and details of various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The setting key type switch 430 is set when setting any one of a plurality of setting values provided for setting the amount of profit given to the player, or set in the pachislot machine 1 It is used when checking the set value. When the main control board 71 receives an operation using the setting key type switch 430, the main control board 71 sets a setting value according to the content of the operation from a plurality of setting values.

  The cabinet-side relay board 440 is a relay board for electrically connecting the main control board 71, the external concentration terminal board 73, the hopper device 40, the medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and the reset switch 442. The medal auxiliary storage switch 441 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage (not shown) is full of medals. The reset switch 442 is used when resetting (initializing) various data of the pachislot machine 1.

  The power supply device 450 includes a power supply board 451 connected to the main control board 71 and a power switch 452 connected to the power supply board 451. The power switch 452 is pressed when supplying necessary power to the pachislot machine 1.

  The pachislot machine 1 includes a door relay terminal plate 460 and a selector 461, a door open / close monitoring switch 462, a BET switch 11S, and a settlement switch 13S connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 460. , A start switch 6S, a stop switch board 463, a game operation display board 470, and a sub-relay board 75. Since the BET switch 11S, the settlement switch 13S, the start switch 6S, and the sub relay board 75 have been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The selector 461 is a device for selecting whether or not the medal material and shape are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal slot 22 to the hopper device 40. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detecting means) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 461.

  The door open / close monitoring switch 462 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The stop switch substrate 463 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 463 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 7L, 7C, 7R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 470 is connected to the information display 14 and is inserted when the insertion of medals is accepted, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable and when replaying is performed. This is a substrate for displaying the number of medals on the information display 14. The game operation display board 470 is connected to an LED group 471. The LED group 471 is, for example, a mark for displaying the start of a game or a mark for performing a replay based on a signal input from the game operation display board 470. Lights up.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 460 and the sub relay board 75. The pachislot machine 1 includes speakers 9L and 9R, various LEDs 101, a touch sensor 201a, and a display unit 110 connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 75.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge substrate 82 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 480 connected to the sub-control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 82 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 480 are housed in the sub control board case together with the sub control board 72.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 82 is a substrate for managing production image (video), sound, light and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 480 is a substrate that relays connection wiring between the sub control substrate 72 and the display unit 100.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the sub control circuit mounted on the sub control board 72 is the same as that shown in FIG. 117 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit of the pachislot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (A), the main control circuit is mainly configured by a microcomputer 30 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 30 includes a main CPU 31, a main ROM 32 and a main RAM 33.

  The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit mounted on the sub control board 72, and the like. The main ROM 32 stores a plurality of minimum game times related to the unit game.

  The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The main CPU 31 is connected with a clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36 and a sampling circuit 37. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

<Ratio display>
Next, the configuration of the ratio display 422 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 116, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes the ratio display 422 for displaying various ratios. 118A shows an example of attachment of the ratio display 422, and FIG. 118B shows the contents displayed on the ratio display 422. FIG.

(Composition of ratio display)
As shown in FIG. 118, the ratio indicator 422 is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 (B), the upper two digits indicate the type of ratio to be displayed, and the lower two digits. Indicates the value of the ratio. The ratio display 422 is provided inside the housing 60 of the pachislot machine 1 because it is used when an administrator (a shop clerk or the like) checks the pachislot machine 1 for unauthorized modification. At this time, in order to prevent fraud with respect to the ratio indicator 422 itself, the ratio indicator 422 is preferably provided inside the main control board case covering the main control board 71.

  As a specific example of attachment, as shown in FIG. 118 (A-1), the ratio indicator 422 may be mounted on the main control board 71, and as shown in FIG. 118 (A-2). Thus, it may be mounted on another board (ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. Also, as shown in FIG. The LED unit may be attached by connecting to the main control board. In any case, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), it is preferable that the main control board 71 is provided inside the main control board case.

Normally, a seal seal is affixed to the main control board case, but when the ratio indicator 422 is provided in the main control board case, the visibility of the ratio indicator 422 may be impaired by the seal sticker. It is preferable to apply a seal seal so that there is no such problem. Further, a caulking recording sticker is also attached to the main control board case. The seal for caulking record is a seal in which a person in charge of opening the caulking record and a date entry column, a serial number of the main control board, and a two-dimensional code for identification used in manufacturing are described. Depending on the model, a two-dimensional code seal used at the time of manufacture may be affixed to the main control board case. It is preferable to make the arrangement such that the visibility of the ratio indicator is not impaired by such a sticking member such as a seal.
The front door (the upper door 62a or the lower door) may also be used by a caulking member or a harness assembled to the main control board, another board in a case where a plurality of boards are arranged in a superimposed manner, or other members in the housing. The door 62b) is preferably designed so that the visibility of the ratio indicator is not impaired when the door 62b) is opened, thereby improving the efficiency of the administrator's confirmation work of the ratio indicator.

(Display contents of the ratio display)
Subsequently, a display example of the ratio display 422 will be described. As shown in FIG. 118 (B), the ratio display 422 includes a cumulative specific section ratio, a continuous feature ratio and a bonus ratio between the latest 6000 games, a cumulative consecutive bonus ratio and a bonus ratio. , Is displayed. When displaying the cumulative specific section ratio on the ratio display 422, “AU” is displayed in the upper two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED, and the consecutive character ratio between the latest 6000 games is displayed. In the upper 2 digits, “= r” is displayed, and when the proportion of the last 6000 games is displayed, “= b” is displayed in the upper 2 digits, and the cumulative consecutive proportion is displayed. In this case, “Ar” is displayed in the upper two digits, and “Ab” is displayed in the upper two digits when displaying the cumulative proportion of features. In the lower two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED, the corresponding ratio is displayed as a percentage.

  Here, the “specific section ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of games in a gaming state advantageous to the player to the number of games in all gaming states (that is, the total number of games). In this case, the gaming state advantageous to the player may include, for example, a CZ having a high expectation of transition to the ART gaming state in addition to the bonus state during the bonus operation and the ART gaming state (see FIG. 33). ).

The main control board 71 counts the total number of games indicating the number of games in all game states and the specific number of games indicating the number of games in a game state advantageous to the player in a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33. The specific section ratio is calculated by the following formula.
Specific section ratio = specific number of games / total number of games x 100

  In addition, “Consecutive character ratio” refers to the first type special character or the first type special character with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states (that is, the total payout number). This is the ratio of the total number of medals paid out during the operation of the accessory continuous operating device.

The main control board 71 uses a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33 to display a total payout number indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states, and a first-class special bonus or a first-class special bonus. The number of payouts in the first specific game indicating the total number of medals paid out during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device according to the above is counted, and the continuous character ratio is calculated by the following formula.
Consecutive character ratio = number of payouts in the first specified game / total number of payouts × 100

  In addition, the “role ratio” refers to the total number of medals paid out during operation of any of the bonuses relative to the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states (that is, the total payout number). This is the ratio of occupancy. In addition, with any one kind of special feature, the first type special feature, the special feature continuous action device related to the first special feature, the second type special feature, the second type special feature continuous action A device or a regular object. Also, during the ART gaming state or CZ, since it is an advantageous state for the player, it may be included in the state in which any of the objects is operating.

The main control board 71 uses a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33 to display the total payout number indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states, and the medals paid out during the operation of any combination. The number of payouts in the second specific game indicating the total number is counted in advance, and the bonus rate is calculated by the following formula.
Ratio of bonuses = number of payouts in second specified game / total payout number x 100

  Further, “cumulative” refers to the entire period from the installation of the pachislot machine 1 to the present, and “between the latest 6000 games” refers to the period from the game before 6000 games to the present. When calculating the ratio of “cumulative”, the main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting results counted over the entire period, and when calculating the ratio of “last 6000 games” The main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result counted in the period from the game before 6000 games to the present.

  Note that the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured such that none of the counting items in the counter provided in the main RAM 33 is erased by power interruption. Specifically, the data is saved in a backup area provided in the main RAM 33 when power is cut off, and the data is read from the backup area and reset when the data is restored. As a result, even when a general operation is performed in which the power is turned off after the store is closed and the power is turned on before the store is opened, data can be accumulated continuously from the time of installation.

  In addition, the replay right associated with the replay winning can be considered as paying out medals equal to the number of medals used in the game, or can be considered as paying out 0 medals. In the calculation of the ratio described above, the calculation results may differ between calculation method A in which the replay right is considered as a medal payout and calculation method B in which the replay right is not considered as a medal payout. For example, in the calculation of the ratio with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states (total number of payouts) such as the ratio of consecutive characters and the rate of bonuses, a calculation method A that considers the right of replaying as the medals are paid out. Then, the total number of payouts is increased by the number of times that the replay is won, and as a result, the ratio is lowered. On the other hand, in the calculation method B in which the replay right is not considered as a medal payout, the replay winning does not affect the total payout number, and as a result, the ratio becomes high. Such a separation between the calculation method A and the calculation method B increases as the number of replay wins increases, and thus increases as the number of games increases.

Therefore, the ratio display 422 may display the calculation result by the calculation method A and the calculation result by the calculation method B in a switchable manner. In this case, the upper two-digit identifier for displaying the calculation result by the calculation method A and the upper two-digit identifier for displaying the calculation result by the calculation method B should be different. Further, when there is a margin in the size of the substrate on which the ratio display 422 is provided, a 7-segment unit of the ratio display 422 may be added to display both simultaneously.
In addition, on the setting screen that can be displayed by the store manager (so-called hall menu), when displaying the consecutive character ratio and the character ratio, it is possible to display the results calculated by a plurality of calculation methods. Good.

(Display contents of ratio display (switching display))
In the ratio display 422, various ratios calculated by the main control board 71 are switched and displayed. The method of switching the content displayed on the ratio display 422 is arbitrary. For example, various ratios may be automatically switched at a predetermined interval, and in accordance with the operation of the switch 423 (see FIG. 116). Various ratios may be switched manually, or various ratios may be switched by combining automatic switching and manual switching.

(Display contents of ratio display (when error))
In pachislot machines, rules are made in the industry so as not to increase the gambling ability. For example, the ratio of the gaming state advantageous to the player to all the games does not become too high, In order to be able to play with peace of mind in the normal gaming state, not only during the advantageous gaming state but also in the normal gaming state, the medal is paid out more than a predetermined amount, thereby lowering the normal base (so-called coin holding) There are regulations such as not to be too much. The above-mentioned various ratios displayed on the ratio indicator 422 make it possible to confirm whether these regulations are satisfied. Although the regulation limit value may be temporarily exceeded due to accidental continuous bonus formation, etc., from a statistical point of view, as the number of games increases, the percentage value shown on the display is in line with the regulation. It converges in a way that approaches the created design value. Therefore, when the number of trials is large, such as 100,000 times, and a value deviating from the design value is displayed, it can be inferred that an illegal act has been performed. In addition, when a value that greatly deviates from the design value is frequently displayed only on a specific table, the administrator can infer that an illegal act has been performed on the specific table, such as hanging an illegal board. As described above, whether or not the value displayed on the ratio display 422 exceeds the specified value functions as a clue for the administrator to identify an illegal act.

  Therefore, when various ratios displayed on the ratio indicator 422 exceed the specified value, it is preferable that the administrator can appropriately grasp the fact. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-described various ratios (specific section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and accessory ratio) calculated by the main control board 71 are equal to or greater than a specified value set for the ratio. The display mode of the ratio on the ratio display 422 is different depending on whether the ratio is less than the specified value set for the ratio. For example, the ratio display unit 422 displays the ratio in a blinking manner when it is equal to or greater than a specified value, and displays the ratio in a lighting state when it is less than the specified value. Thereby, the administrator can grasp at a glance whether or not various ratios satisfy the specified value.

  In addition, when there is a ratio that is greater than or equal to the specified value, it may be notified to the external device (for example, hall computer) (for example, notification that the specific section ratio exceeds the specified value). Good. Specifically, the main control board 71 notifies the external device via the external concentration terminal board 73 when the calculated ratio includes a ratio equal to or higher than a specified value. In addition, when there is a limit to the output pins from the external concentrated terminal board 73, it is assumed that notification (that is, error output) is made to the external device using the output pin currently used as the error output. Also good.

  It should be noted that just because there is a ratio that exceeds the specified value, it cannot be said that it is fraudulent. Therefore, in the case of a model equipped with a first error output that is output when an abnormality that is highly suspected of fraud is detected and a second error output that is output when an abnormality that occurs in a normal game is detected, An error based on exceeding the value is preferably a second error output. Here, abnormalities with a strong suspicion of fraud include, for example, RAM clear detection, RAM read / write inability, RAM software abnormalities, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, communication abnormalities, internal voltage abnormalities, and roles that have not been won. When a winning abnormality that a symbol related to is displayed on the active line is detected, or when a payout at a timing when the payout cannot be performed is detected, the set value indicates a value other than six levels. Also, abnormalities that occur in normal games include, for example, hopper empty where the medal of the hopper device 40 bottoms out, detection of a clogged medal at the payout port of the hopper device 40, medal overflow that causes the medal auxiliary storage to become full, medal Doors when the hall clerk opened the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) by replenishing medals when detecting a clogged medal or medal backflow at the time of insertion, or detecting an abnormal number of medals such as 4 For example, when it is detected that the wiring of the hopper is disconnected during an opening error or a medal replenishment.

  In this way, when a ratio that is equal to or greater than the specified value exists, the administrator performs a predetermined notification to the external device, so that the administrator does not see the ratio indicator 422 provided inside the housing 60, Since it is possible to grasp whether or not the ratio satisfies the specified value, the burden on the administrator can be reduced.

(Display contents of ratio display (immediately after installation))
Until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, such as immediately after the installation of the pachislot machine 1, various ratios have a large blur width and move up and down greatly. Therefore, until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, the display modes of various ratios may be changed. At this time, the predetermined number of times may be varied depending on the type of ratio to be calculated. For example, the cumulative ratio is displayed in a different manner (for example, displayed in yellow) until the total number of games reaches “17500”, and after the total number of games reaches “17500” While displaying in the normal mode (for example, displayed in red), the ratio between the most recent 6000 games is displayed in a different mode until the total number of games reaches “6000”, and the total number of games is After reaching “6000 times”, it may be displayed in a normal manner.

  Further, the output to the external device may not be performed until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, even if various ratios are equal to or greater than a specified value. Also in this case, the predetermined number of times may be varied depending on the type of ratio to be calculated.

(Modification of ratio display)
By the way, since the existing pachislot machine does not have a ratio display, in the example of attachment of the ratio display shown in FIG. 118 (A), it is necessary to make a major modification to the existing pachislot machine. Therefore, an indicator provided in an existing pachislot machine may be used as a ratio indicator that displays various ratios. Specifically, in an existing pachislot machine, a display (information display 14) that displays the number of stored medals (number of credits) and the number of medals paid out in this game (the number of payouts). Is provided. Therefore, when a special operation is performed on the pachislot machine, the type of ratio displayed on the display unit (credit lamp 145 described later) for displaying the number of credits is displayed, and the display unit (described later) for displaying the number of payouts. The display of the indicator may be switched so that the ratio of the type is displayed on the payout number lamp 146).

  The special operation is arbitrary, but is preferably an operation using a switch provided in the housing 60. Thereby, it can prevent that a player will perform special operation accidentally.

<Information display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the configuration of the information display unit 14 including an instruction monitor for the main control board 71 to notify stop operation information will be described.
As shown in FIG. 119, the information display 14 includes an insert lamp 141, a start lamp 142, a replay lamp 143, a bet number lamp 144, a credit lamp 145, a payout number lamp 146, an instruction monitor 147, And a limit lamp 148.

  When the insert lamp 141 is lit (or flashes (hereinafter omitted)), the player can be informed that a medal can be inserted, and when the start lamp 142 is lit, the game is accompanied by the operation of the start lever 6. The replay lamp 143 is lit to inform the player that a medal has been automatically inserted by the re-game operation. The bet number lamp 144 is lit to inform the player of the number of medals bet, and the credit lamp 145 is lit to indicate the number of medals (credits) stored in the pachislot machine 1. The payout number lamp 146 is lit to notify the player of the number of medals paid out according to the game result (the number of payouts).

The instruction monitor 147 includes a notification lamp 147a and a status indicator 147b (AT lamp). The notification lamp 147a is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and lights up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation to be notified, so that the necessary stop operation information can be reported to the player. In addition, the status indicator 147b is lit to inform the player that the current gaming state is a gaming state (for example, an ART gaming state) that notifies the player of an advantageous stopping operation mode. .
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the notification lamp 147a is provided separately from the credit lamp 145 and the payout number lamp 146, but either the credit lamp 145 or the payout number lamp 146 is provided without providing the notification lamp 147a. It is good also as notifying the information of stop operation using.

The limit lamp 148 is turned on when a gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time. If a gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, there is a risk that gambling will be jealous. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, when a gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, the ART gaming state is forcibly terminated even before the duration of the ART gaming state expires. (Limit processing). The limit lamp 148 is turned on when the ART gaming state is ended by this limit processing, and can inform the player that the limit processing has been performed. Further, the limit lamp 148 may be blinked when the limit processing is almost activated, and may be turned on when the limit processing is actually performed.
Details of the limit process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127.

  The insert lamp 141 to the limit lamp 148 are turned on, blinked, and turned off by an LED (not shown) provided on the back surface. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 controls lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of the LEDs, so that various information regarding the game can be reported to the player.

<Status indicator>
Next, the status indicator 147b provided in the information indicator 14 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating a pattern example of lighting timing of the status indicator 147b.
In FIG. 120, timing T1 is the start of the game, timing T2 is the start of reel rotation of the game, timing T3 is the first stop operation of the game, and timing T4 is the second stop of the game. At the time of operation, timing T5 is at the time of the third stop operation of the game, timing T6 is at the time of all reels of the game being stopped, timing T7 is at the end of the game, and timing T8 is the start of the next game It's time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 120, at the timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), a lottery for shifting to a specific section (for example, the ART gaming state) is won. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when winning the lottery for shifting to a specific section, the state indicator 147b is turned on during the winning game. For example, in the lighting pattern example 1, the state indicator 147b is lit at the start of the game won for the transition lottery to the specific section (timing T1). In the lighting pattern example 2, the status indicator 147b is turned on at the start of reel rotation (timing T2) of the game won in the lottery for the specific section, and in the lighting pattern example 3, the lottery for the transition to the specific section is won. The status indicator 147b is turned on at the first stop operation (timing T3) of the played game, and in the lighting pattern example 4, the status indicator is displayed when all the reels of the game won the lottery for the transition to the specific section are stopped (timing T6). 147b is turned on, and in the lighting pattern example 5, the state indicator 147b is turned on at the end of the game won in the lottery for shifting to the specific section (timing T7).

  120 is merely an example, and in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the status indicator 147b may be lit during the game in which the lottery for shifting to a specific section is won. Is optional.

  In this way, by turning on the status indicator 147b during the game winning the lottery for the specific section, the player can grasp that the lottery for the specific section is won. It can be expected and is suitable.

(Improved notification by status indicator)
By the way, if the presence / absence of winning is simply announced by turning on / off one lamp, the presence / absence of winning is immediately known, but the player should feel that only the lamp should be turned on. As a result, there is a risk that interest in other effects in the liquid crystal display device or the like may be lost. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fact that the lottery for the transition to the specific section is won is reported during the game without becoming monotonous by the following method.

(Device 1 for status indicator)
FIG. 119 (B) and FIG. 119 (C) show another configuration example of the status indicator 147b. The status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119 (B) has a plurality of lamps “a” to “i” that are lit, flashing, and extinguished. , I can report that I am winning the lottery for the specific section.

  As an example, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, a plurality of lamps are lit in a specific pattern (for example, “a”, “c”, “d”, “h”, “i” are lit), When not winning, a plurality of lamps are lit in a pattern other than this specific pattern. The specific pattern is not limited to one, and may have a plurality of patterns. This makes it possible to make a deeper notification than when a single lamp simply lights up, for example, as the game is repeated and the lighting pattern at the time of winning is learned, the detection of the winning becomes faster Can be realized.

  Note that the presence / absence of winning the lottery may be reported based on the number of lamps that are lit, not based on the lighting pattern. For example, when winning the transition lottery, a specific number of lamps among a plurality of lamps are turned on, and when not winning the transition lottery, a number other than the specific number of the plurality of lamps The lamp may be lit. Also, for example, when a lottery is won for the transition lottery, a certain number of lamps (or less than a specific number) among a plurality of lamps are turned on, and when a lottery is not won for the lottery It is also possible to turn on a number of lamps less than a specific number (or more than a specific number).

  In addition, by controlling the lighting patterns of the plurality of lamps according to the progress of the game, it is possible to produce an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the transition lottery using the plurality of lamps. For example, when the lighting pattern for reporting that the lottery is won is “all lamps are lit”, the progress of the game (start operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation) By increasing or decreasing the number of lamps that are turned on in accordance with, for example, when all reels are stopped, it is possible to indicate the expected degree of winning the transition lottery as the game progresses.

(Device 2 for status indicator)
The status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119 (C) is similar to the status indicator 147b in FIG. 119 (B) in that each has a plurality of lamps that are turned on, blinking, and turned off. The status indicator 147b is not meaningful for a plurality of lamps as a whole, whereas the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119C is different in that it is meaningful as a whole. In other words, in the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119 (C), for example, the manufacturer name of the pachislot machine 1, the model name of the pachislot machine 1, the character name used as the motif of the pachislot machine 1 or the manufacturer, the shape of the character, etc. Characters and shapes that you want to impress players are also used as decorations. By using such decorations for a plurality of lamps, characters and shapes represented by the decorations can be strongly stored for the player, leading to an improvement in brand power.

  Even in this case, by controlling the lighting pattern and the number of lamps to be lit, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the transition lottery is won, and to control the lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps according to the progress of the game. Thus, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the expected degree of winning of the transfer lottery.

  Note that, depending on the pachislot machine, there may be a plurality of types of specific sections having different degrees of advantage for the player as the specific section, and the transition may be made to any specific section based on the result of the transfer lottery. For example, in a pachislot machine having an ART gaming state and CZ, a pachislot machine that transitions the gaming state to the ART gaming state or CZ based on the result of the transfer lottery, or the ART gaming state and the initial game with 50 initial games A pachislot machine or the like that has an ART gaming state of 100 games and shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state of the initial number of games determined in accordance with the transition lottery can be considered.

  Here, when a plurality of lamps are used as in the above-described devices 1 and 2, the plurality of lamps (status indicator 147b) are turned on or off with different combinations of patterns according to the type of the specific section won by the transition lottery. It is also possible to make it. As an example, if the initial number of games wins the ART gaming state of 50 games, the status indicator 147b is lit with the first lighting pattern, and if the initial number of games wins the ART gaming state of 100 games The status indicator 147b may be lit with a second lighting pattern different from the first lighting pattern.

  Thereby, since a lighting pattern changes according to the kind of specific area, the variation of the lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b can be increased. For the player, since the variation of the lighting pattern increases, it becomes difficult to accurately grasp the contents of each lighting pattern, so that interest in other effects in the liquid crystal display device or the like is not lost.

  Conversely, a plurality of lamps (status indicators 147b) may be turned on or off with the same combination pattern regardless of the type of the specific section won by the transfer lottery. In such control, since the lighting pattern is the same regardless of the type of the specific section won, the type of the specific section won cannot be determined from the lighting pattern. Some skilled players have memorized lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps. Therefore, a specific section that is truly advantageous to the player (for example, a long ART gaming state such as 50 games) and a specific section that is not very advantageous to the player (for example, an ART gaming state that ends in one game). By providing the same lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b in any of these specific sections, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp the type of the specific section that has been won.

  Further, as a consideration for beginners, the contents of each lighting pattern may be displayed on the waist panel 25 or the like. For example, the lumbar panel 25 of a pachislot machine that is mainly shipped to stores with a large number of beginners, such as low rental ball stores, without displaying the contents of the lighting pattern on the lumbar panel 25 of a design that is generally introduced. May display the contents of the lighting pattern. Moreover, you may enable it to order the waist panel 25 which the purchase store side wishes based on a customer's layer from a manufacturer. This makes it possible to report or not report the contents of the lighting pattern according to the customer base of the amusement store.

  Changing the design of the lumbar panel 25 does not require testing by a testing institution, and the burden of manufacturing / development costs is not large, so a pachislot machine with appropriate specifications can be provided by simply replacing the panel according to the market environment. Can be preferred. Instead of changing the design of the waist panel 25 itself, it is possible to switch whether the contents of the lighting pattern can be reported or not by using a sheet member to which a predetermined seal member is attached or replaced. Moreover, the place where the content of the lighting pattern is displayed may be a place other than the waist panel 25 as long as the player can recognize it during the game. However, it is desirable that the location is easy for the player to see.

(Device 3 for status indicator)
Further, in order to avoid the presence or absence of the winning depending on whether one lamp is lit or not, the status indicator 147b may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. The position that is difficult to visually recognize may be an arbitrary place such as the medal receiving portion 16, the waist panel 25, the side surface of the housing 60, the back of the medal slot 22, and the like. Further, the status indicator 147b is covered with an opaque cover, and the status indicator 147b is made visible only from a hole (a peep hole) formed in the cover, thereby making the status indicator 147b difficult to see. be able to. Further, for example, a bill clip or a parking lot use service ticket clip may be provided in the pachislot machine 1, and a status indicator 147b may be provided behind the clip.

(Device 4 for status indicator)
In addition, when the status indicator 147b for reporting whether or not the lottery is shifted to a specific section is at the same position, it is easy to understand if only the location is seen. Therefore, the position of the status indicator 147b may be switched. Good. As a specific method, it is conceivable that at least a plurality of lamps (LEDs) of the pachislot machine 1 have the function of the status indicator 147b, and lamps that report whether or not the transfer lottery is different each time. It is done. As a result, for example, the lamp in the upper right part performs the function of the status indicator 147b at a certain timing, but the lamp in the lower left part performs the function of the status indicator 147b at another timing. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the success / failure of the transfer lottery only from the lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like.

(Ingenuity from game play)
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a description will be given of the device from the playability related to the method of making it difficult to understand that the lottery for shifting to a specific section is won. In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, “F_3 option bell_1st”, “F_3 option bell_2nd”, and “F_3 option bell_3rd” are provided as pushing orders, and nine medals are paid out when the pushing order is correct (bell A combination of symbols is displayed), and when the answer is incorrect, the medals are paid out or 0 medals (the bell combination or the combination of the first symbol is displayed). In the ART gaming state, when the push winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order corresponding to the push winning combination is notified. Therefore, during the ART gaming state, by playing the game according to the notification, more medals (for example, 9) than the medals used for the game (for example, 3) are paid out.

As a device from the aspect of game play, first, a push order combination in which medals equal to or less than the medals used in the game are paid out even when the push order is correct is further provided. In the example shown in FIG. 121, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), push order combinations of “F_3 selection 1 sheet combination_1st”, “F_3 selection 1 sheet combination_2nd”, and “F_3 selection 1 sheet combination_3rd” are provided. For “F_3 choice 1 combination 1st” to “F_3 selection 1 combination 3rd”, when the correct answer is given in the pressing order, the first combination of symbols is displayed, one medal is paid out, and the pressing order is invalid. When the answer is correct, a combination of out-of-order symbols is displayed and 0 medals are paid out.
In addition, the newly provided push order does not have to increase the number of medals even at the correct push order, and the number of medals equal to or less than the number of medals used in the game at the correct push order (third quantity) is paid out. Thus, it is sufficient that the number of medals smaller than the number (third quantity) (fourth quantity) is paid out or the medals are not paid out (that is, zero) when the push order is incorrect.

  Further, in terms of game play, at least two types of ART game states are provided as ART game states. Specifically, all the push order combinations (“F_3 option 1 player_st” to “F_3 option 1 player_3rd” and “F_3 option bell_1st” to “F_3 option bell_3rd”) are determined as internal winning combinations. The ART game state that informs the correct push order when it is played, and the correct answer when "F_3 choice 1 piece combination 1st" to "F_3 choice 1 piece combination 3rd" is determined as an internal winning combination The push order is notified, and when “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” are determined as the internal winning combination, a one-player role ART game state in which the correct push order is not notified is provided.

  Then, in terms of gaming, the status indicator 147b is turned on regardless of whether the gaming state is the ART gaming state or the single-player ART gaming state. Note that the lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b may be different between the ART gaming state and the single-player ART gaming state, or the same lighting pattern may be used.

  By such a device, it is possible to report that the current game state is a game state in which the push order is notified by the state display 147b, but it is truly advantageous for the player only from the state display 147b. It can be made impossible to grasp whether the game is in the ART game state or the single-player ART game state.

  Note that the transition to the ART gaming state that is truly advantageous to the player is performed by winning the lottery to the specific section, but the transition to the single-player ART gaming state that is not necessarily advantageous to the player. Can be done arbitrarily.

  In the example shown in FIG. 121 (B), all the games other than the ART game state are set to the single-player ART game state. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (B), the eleventh game is won by a lottery for transition to a specific section (that is, a lottery for transition to an ART gaming state), so that the eleventh and subsequent games Is in an ART gaming state. During this ART gaming state, a 3 option 1 player ("F_3 option 1 player_1st" to "F_3 option 1 player_3rd") and an option 3 ("F_3 option bell_1st" to "F_3 option bell_3rd") Regardless of which is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order is notified.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (B), all the games before winning the lottery to shift to the ART game state are set to the single-player ART game state. In the single-player ART game state, in the game in which the three-choice one-player combination is determined as the internal winning combination (the first game), the correct push order is notified while the three-selective bell is in the internal winning combination. In a game determined as a combination (second game), the correct push order is not notified.

  As described above, when all games other than the ART gaming state are set to the single-player ART gaming state, the status indicator 147b should always be lit regardless of whether or not the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is won. Therefore, the player cannot grasp that the winning lottery has been won only by turning on / off the status indicator 147b.

  In the example shown in FIG. 121 (C), among games other than the ART game state, only a game in which the three-choice one-player combination is determined as the internal winning combination is set to the one-player ART game state, and the other games are used. , It is in a state (normal) that is neither the ART gaming state nor the single-player ART gaming state. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (C), in the eleventh game, since the winning lottery for the specific section (that is, the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state) is won, the eleventh and subsequent games are played. Is in an ART gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (C), only the games in which the three-choice one-piece combination is determined as the internal winning combination among the games before winning the lottery to shift to the ART gaming state are determined to be one-piece combination ART. The game state is set, and other games are set to the normal game state. Specifically, in the first game, the three-choice one-player combination is determined as an internal winning combination. Therefore, the gaming state of the first game is set to the one-player ART game state, and the correct push order is notified. Is going. On the other hand, in the second game, since the three-choice one-piece combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, it is in the normal gaming state and the correct push order is not notified.

  As described above, even if only the game in which the three-choice one-piece combination of the games other than the ART gaming state is determined as the internal winning combination is set to the one-player role ART gaming state, the status indicator 147b has three choices. In a game in which a single winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the player turns on regardless of whether or not the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is won, so the player can turn on / off the status indicator 147b. It will not be possible to grasp that winning the transition lottery alone. In addition, even if it is a single-player ART game state, a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, so if it is always in a single-player ART game state as shown in FIG. 121 (B), The notification game state in which the notification of the pressing order is performed continues for a long period of time, and there is a risk that the gambling of the game will be enhanced. In this regard, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), only a game in which a three-choice one-player combination of the games other than the ART game state is determined as an internal winning combination is set to the one-player ART game state, so that the notification game The period of a state can be limited and it can prevent that gambling nature increases suddenly.

<Basic game flow>
Subsequently, a basic game flow of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a game state transition flow regarding the presence or absence of notification in the pachislot machine 1. In FIG. 122, only the gaming state relating to the presence / absence of notification is shown, and the transition flow of the gaming state relating to the presence / absence of the bonus operation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 122, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal section that does not notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and a specific section that reports the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. The normal section corresponds to, for example, the normal gaming state in the general gaming state in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, and the specific section refers to, for example, the general game in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. CZ and ART gaming states in the state correspond (see FIG. 33).

(Transition from normal section to specific section)
The transition from the normal section to the specific section is made by winning the lottery for transition to the specific section. Here, the transition lottery to the specific section includes both the lottery transition to the CZ and the lottery transition to the ART gaming state. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery for shifting to a specific section is performed based on information that has no difference in set values. “Information with no difference in set value” means that a combination (non-restricted combination) determined as an internal winning combination with the same probability in all the set values in the internal lottery process, or all set values when all reels are stopped It includes at least a combination of symbols to be displayed with the same probability (a combination of symbols having no set difference).

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a set unquestioned combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a lottery transition to a specific section is performed, and a combination having a setting difference (set differential combination) is determined as an internal winning combination. In the event of a failure, the lottery for the specific section is not performed. Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a combination of symbols with no set difference is displayed when all reels are stopped, a lottery for shifting to a specific section is performed and a combination of symbols with a set difference is displayed. In this case, the lottery for the specific section is not performed.

  Further, the lottery for the transition to the specific section is performed based on a complete probability that is determined in advance and does not vary at all. The “predetermined complete probability that does not vary” means a probability that does not vary based on at least the set value (that is, a probability that the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value).

  In this way, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the transition lottery performed based on the “information having no difference in the set value” is performed with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value. The degree of expectation regarding the transition can be made the same for each setting value, and the difference in the performance of the ball can be suppressed to the winning probability of the setting difference having a setting difference.

(Example of lottery table used for transfer lottery)
Here, an example of a lottery table used for lottery transfer to a specific section is shown in FIG. FIG. 124 (A) is an internal lottery table for determining an internal winning combination, and FIG. 124 (B) is a transition lottery table for performing a transition lottery to a specific section based on the internal winning combination. In the following, the internal lottery table has a probability denominator of 32768, and the transition lottery table has a probability denominator of 256.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 124A, the internal lottery table defines lottery value information corresponding to each combination. Here, the combination determined by lottery using the internal lottery table includes a set difference with a different lottery value depending on a set value and a set unquestioned combination with the same lottery value regardless of the set value. In the example shown in FIG. 124 (A), the winning combinations “F_BB1”, “F_maintenance Lip A”, etc. are set differences with different lottery values depending on the setting values, and the winning combinations “F_Sabo 1”, “F_Chilli Lip”, “F_BB1 + F_Reach Eye Lip”. “, Etc.” are setting unquestioned roles having the same lottery value regardless of the setting value. The pachislot machine 1 does not perform lottery transition to the specific section when the set winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and performs the lottery transition to the specific section when the unquestioned set bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. be able to. Note that not performing the lottery transfer to the specific section includes not only performing the transfer lottery itself, but also necessarily performing the lottery but not winning. In addition, transition lottery to a specific section is not necessarily performed when any of the setting unquestioned roles is determined as an internal winning combination. It is good also as providing a combination.

  Subsequently, as in the example shown in FIG. 124 (B), the transition lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the transition lottery for each unquestioned setting determined as an internal winning combination. As described above, the lottery transfer to the specific section is performed based on a complete probability that is determined in advance and does not vary at all. Therefore, the lottery value information defined in the transfer lottery table is the same regardless of the set value. Value.

  In addition, it is good also as including that it is the probability uniquely defined with respect to "information without a difference in a setting value" as "the predetermined complete probability which does not change at all". In recent pachislot machines, a state where it is easy to win the transition lottery and a state where it is difficult to win may be provided. In such a case, when a transition lottery is performed with a “probability uniquely determined for information that does not have a difference in setting values”, for example, in any game state at the time of winning a setting unquestioned role A transfer lottery will be performed with the same probability. On the other hand, when a transfer lottery is performed with a “probability that is not uniquely determined for information that does not have a difference in setting values (that is, a probability that fluctuates)”, for example, Transition lottery that wins with a probability according to the current gaming state, that is, if the current gaming state is a high probability state, a transition lottery that wins with a high probability is performed, and the current gaming state is a low probability state In this case, a transition lottery that wins with a low probability is performed.

(Realization method of CZ when performing transfer lottery with a uniquely determined probability)
By the way, in the case where the transition lottery is performed with such a uniquely determined probability, the transition lottery that wins with the same probability will be performed in any gaming state, and therefore, as in CZ (chance zone). In order to provide a state where it is easy to shift to the ART gaming state, it is necessary to devise. Subsequently, an example of a method of realizing CZ will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 125A is a diagram illustrating an example of an ART lottery method in CZ. For example, the correct push order of the push order with no setting difference in the probability determined as an internal winning combination during CZ is notified, and the lottery to shift to the ART gaming state is determined at the time of the push forward win with no set difference. It will be performed based on the combination of the displayed symbols. Specifically, as shown in the transition lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (A), when a combination of bell symbols is displayed when all reels are stopped, a transition lottery to the ART gaming state is performed, and a bell spill or 1 When the combination of symbols in the display is displayed, the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is not performed.

  When comparing the normal section and the CZ, the winning probability of pushing forward is the same, but since the correct pushing order is not notified in the normal section, it is difficult to display the combination of symbols for which the transition lottery will be performed. In contrast, during CZ, the correct push order is notified, and therefore a combination of symbols to be subjected to transition lottery is easily displayed. As a result, the frequency of transition lottery is increased during CZ compared to the normal section, and even if the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, CZ (chance of easy transition to the ART gaming state) Zone).

  FIG. 125B is a diagram showing another example of the ART lottery method in CZ. In the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the combination (replay) related to the replay can be changed by shifting the RT gaming state. Therefore, by making the winning probabilities of some of the combinations (replays) related to replaying different in the RT gaming state, the ART game is different between one RT gaming state and another RT gaming state. The frequency of lottery transition to the state can be varied.

  Specifically, in the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (B), the combination “F_Chilelip” is a setting unquestioned combination with no setting difference, and like this transition lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (B), When “F_Chilelip” is determined as an internal winning combination, a lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed. Here, referring to the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (B), the winning combination “F_Chillilip” has no setting difference, but the winning probability varies depending on the RT gaming state, and in the RT2 gaming state, it is higher than that in the RT1 gaming state. It is determined as an internal winning combination with a high probability.

  Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, the frequency of transition lottery is increased compared to the RT1 gaming state, and even if the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, the CZ is likely to transition to the ART gaming state. (Chance zone) can be realized. More specifically, the RT2 gaming state can be used as CZ.

(Another example of a method for realizing CZ when a transfer lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability)
Next, FIG. 125C is a diagram illustrating another example of a method for realizing CZ. In the method shown in FIG. 125 (C), CZ is realized by using MB (an accessory continuous action device related to the second type special accessory). The pachislot machine 1 in this method has a single bonus (hereinafter referred to as “SB”) and a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”) as the features that are also drawn in the MB, and the MB end condition is (A) (B) SB is established during MB (determined as an internal winning combination or winning), (C) RB is established during MB (determined as internal winning combination, One of the three conditions of winning a prize) is satisfied. Then, the pachislot machine 1 shifts to the ART gaming state after the end of MB according to the satisfied end condition. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 125 (C), when the MB ends due to the establishment of the RB, the state shifts to the ART gaming state after the MB ends, and when the MB ends due to other conditions, the MB enters the ART gaming state after the MB ends. Will not migrate.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 125C, when the RB is established before the SB is established (so-called puncture) or the prescribed number of medals are paid out, the state shifts to the ART gaming state. It will function as a chance zone (CZ) to win.
As a reel stop control in MB, it is possible to preferentially stop a combination of symbols with medals paid out even in a game in which RB is determined as an internal winning combination. The game in which there is a game and the game in which RB is determined as an internal winning combination may be the same game. In such a case, it is preferable to enter the ART gaming state assuming that the end condition (C) is satisfied.

  In the example shown in FIG. 125 (C), (1) when an MB is won in the normal section, the gaming state shifts to the MB that is CZ. Then, (2) when a medal exceeding the prescribed number is paid out in the MB, or when SB is established, the MB which is CZ is ended, and the gaming state shifts to the normal section. On the other hand, (3) When RB is determined as an internal winning combination during MB, MB which is CZ is terminated, and the gaming state shifts between RB flags. (4) When an RB wins between the RB flags, the gaming state shifts to RB. After that, (5) When the RB ends, the ART gaming state is started at a high RT generated when the RB ends. . Note that when an RB wins in a game in which the RB in the MB is determined as an internal winning combination, the RB starts from the next game after the MB ends without passing through between the RB flags.

In such a pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of MB (which functions as CZ) in the normal section and the winning probability of RB (which triggers the transition to the ART gaming state) in the MB are common to all the set values. However, the winning probability of the SB (which triggers the end of CZ) in the MB may be a common probability for all the set values, or may be a different probability depending on the set value. For example, in the case where the winning probability of SB in MB is made different according to the set value, the higher the setting is, the lower the winning probability of SB is, and the longer the MB is, the easier it is to continue the ART gaming state in CZ (MB). It is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the transition to, and to enrich the variation of the ball appearance specifications.
In addition, the winning probability of the RB that becomes a trigger for the transition to the ART gaming state can be arbitrarily set depending on the relationship with other end conditions, but the game balance is better if the probability that the winning can be actually expected is set. Therefore, it is preferable that the prescribed number is reduced to a small number such as 10 to 30, and RB is determined as an internal winning combination in MB with a relatively high probability.

(Another configuration example of the main control board)
Here, the internal lottery using the internal lottery table and the transfer lottery using the transfer lottery table are executed in the main control board 71. In the main control board 71, the capacity of the storage means (main ROM) is limited. Therefore, when the transfer lottery is performed in addition to the internal lottery, the lottery variation becomes monotonous. Therefore, a method for improving the main control board 71 will be described below.

  FIG. 117 (B) is a diagram illustrating another configuration example of the main control board. In FIG. 117 (B), the main control circuit is provided with a first main control board 71a and a second main control board 71b. The first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are connected so that bidirectional communication is possible by serial communication or the like. Note that the configurations of the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are the same as those shown in FIG.

  As described above, a plurality of first main control boards 71a and second main control boards 71b are provided as the main control boards. For example, internal lottery using an internal lottery table is performed on the first main control board 71a, and second main control boards are provided. By performing the transfer lottery using the transfer lottery table on the board 71b, the capacity of the storage means used for each lottery can be sufficiently secured, and lottery rich in variations can be performed.

  In FIG. 117 (B), the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main control board 71a is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that communication can be performed only in one direction (from the first main control board 71a to the second main control board 71b) with the second main control board 71b on the upstream side and the downstream side. By setting the communication in only one direction, the communication load can be reduced as compared to the case of bidirectional communication.

  In addition, when the internal lottery and the transfer lottery are performed on different boards (first main control board 71a and second main control board 71b), the order in which the internal lottery and the transfer lottery are performed is arbitrary. For example, after the transfer lottery is first performed on one substrate, the internal lottery may be performed on the other substrate. Conversely, after the internal lottery is first performed on one substrate, the transfer lottery is performed on the other substrate. It is good as well. In this case, when the transfer lottery is performed first, since the result of the internal lottery (internal winning combination) cannot be grasped at the time of the transfer lottery, the transfer lottery is performed in a manner that is not affected by the result of the internal lottery. For example, such a configuration may be used in the case of a specification in which a transition lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each unit game regardless of the internal winning combination. As a result, even if an illegal act of illegally entering a winning combination information different from the actual internal winning combination is not affected, the result of the transition lottery will not be affected, so an illegal act of generating an advantageous result of the transition lottery Can be suppressed. Further, when the transfer lottery is performed first, the lottery based on the information having no difference in the set value can be performed only by performing the lottery having no difference in the set value because the internal winning combination is not related.

  On the contrary, when the internal lottery is performed first, the transition lottery may be performed with reference to the internal winning combination determined as a result of the internal lottery, or the internal lottery determined as the result of the internal lottery. It is good also as performing transfer lottery without referring to a combination. When performing a lottery transfer with reference to an internal winning combination, it is possible to perform a lottery based on information having no difference in setting values by performing a transition lottery based on the unquestioned setting as described above. In the case where the transition lottery is performed without referring to the winning combination, the lottery based on the information having no difference between the set values can be performed by performing the lottery without any difference between the set values.

  FIG. 117C is a diagram showing still another configuration example of the main control board. What is lacking in the main control board 71 is the capacity of the storage means (main ROM). Therefore, in FIG. 117C, one main control board 71 as shown in the first main ROM 32a and the second main ROM 32b. A plurality of main ROMs are provided on the top. In this case, for example, various tables used for internal lottery are stored in the first main ROM 32a, and various tables used for transition lottery are stored in the second main ROM 32b. A sufficient capacity can be secured, and lottery rich in variations can be performed.

(Transition from specific section to normal section)
Next, returning to FIG. 122, the transition from the specific section to the normal section will be described. The transition from the specific section to the normal section is made when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. As the end condition of the specific section, any condition such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of navigations performed during the specific section, the number of medals paid out during the specific section, the number of differences, and the like can be used. . The end condition may be different depending on the type of the specific section. For example, the end condition may be different between the CZ and the ART gaming state.

  As described above, the specific section basically ends when the end condition is satisfied. However, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, exceptionally, the end condition is not satisfied when the specific section continues for a long period of time. Then, the transition from the specific section to the normal section (limit processing), and even when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied, if navigation for the guaranteed number of times is not performed, The navigation continues without ending the specific section until navigation is performed, and transitions from the specific section to the normal section according to the number of times of navigation being performed (navigation assurance processing).

(Limit processing)
Here, with reference to FIG. 126 and FIG. 127, the limit process in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section, and FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating a flow of limit processing in the specific section.
In a pachislot machine, if a specific section such as CZ or ART gaming state is continuously performed over a long period of time, the profit that the player gets during the specific section will increase, and the overall profit will be balanced Therefore, it is necessary to reduce the profits that the player obtains during the normal section, which increases the gambling of the game. For this reason, in recent years, it has been required to keep the duration of a state advantageous to the player to a certain period. The limit process is a process that suppresses the duration of a specific section that is advantageous to the player to a certain period (for example, 1500 games).

(Counting the number of limit games)
First, a method for counting the number of limit games in a specific section when performing limit processing will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 126 (A), when the specific section continues, the main control board 71 counts the number of continued games (number of limit games). For example, when the ART gaming state continues, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games by adding the number of continuing games by one for each game. Further, for example, when the transition to the ART gaming state is made after the transition from the normal section to the CZ, since the specific section includes at least the CZ and the ART gaming state as described above, the main control board 71 has the CZ continuation game. The sum of the number and the number of continuing games in the ART gaming state that are continuously performed thereafter is counted as the number of limit games.

  By the way, depending on the pachislot machine, as shown in FIG. 126 (B), when shifting to the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), the waiting section may be sandwiched without immediately shifting. For example, in a pachislot machine that makes the RT gaming state different between the normal section and the specific section, it is necessary to start the specific section after changing the RT gaming state. As a specific case, when winning a lottery for transition to a specific section, there is a case where a standby section is sandwiched when transitioning from a normal section to a specific section, and there is a bonus (object) in the specific section. When activated, a standby section may be sandwiched when returning to a specific section after the bonus ends.

  For such a waiting section, the main control board 71 may count as a limit game number or may not count. That is, the main control board 71 may count the number of games “A1” to “An” in FIG. 126 (B) as the number of limit games or not count as the number of limit games. Good.

  In addition, the main control board 71 may vary whether or not to count as the number of limit games depending on the type of the waiting section. For example, when winning a lottery for the transition to a specific section, the bonus is not counted as the number of limit games for the specific section sandwiched during the transition from the normal section to the specific section, and bonuses (acts) are activated during the specific section In this case, the waiting section sandwiched when returning to the specific section after the bonus ends may be counted as the number of limit games, assuming that it is in a series of advantageous states as a whole.

  Further, the main control board 71 may vary whether or not to count as the number of limit games depending on the type of notification (navigation) performed during the standby section. When providing a waiting section for transitioning the RT gaming state, it is necessary to perform at least notification for transitioning the RT gaming state during the waiting section. There is no need to do it. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, since the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled pattern will change the RT gaming state, it is necessary to notify the push order “push order bell” related to the increase / decrease in medals. When the combination of symbols of the bell-spilling is set to control that does not change the RT gaming state, the push order “push order bell” related to increase / decrease of medals does not necessarily have to be notified during the standby section.

  Therefore, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games as being in an advantageous state for the player for the waiting section for notifying the pushing order related to the increase / decrease of medals, and pushes related to the increase / decrease of medals. It is good also as not counting as a limit game number about the waiting area which does not alert | report about an advance.

  Also, depending on the pachislot machine, as shown in FIG. 126 (C), if the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), a bonus flag is displayed during the specific section. There may be a gap between bonuses. The main control board 71 may count the number of games between the flags or in the bonus state as the number of limit games, or may not count the games. That is, the main control board 71 counts the games for the number of times “C1” to “Cn” and the games for the number of times “D1” to “Dn” in FIG. 126 (C) as the number of limit games. Alternatively, it may not be counted as the number of limit games.

  In this case, the main control board 71 may count the game between the flags as the number of limit games, while the game in the bonus state may not count as the number of limit games. The games in the middle are not counted as the number of limit games, while the games in the bonus state may be counted as the number of limit games. Also, both the game between the flags and the game in the bonus state may be counted as the limit game number, and conversely, both may not be counted as the limit game number.

  Further, the main control board 71 may vary whether or not to count the number of limit games depending on the type of notification (navigation) performed between the flags. Specifically, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games as the number of limit games, assuming that the flag is in an advantageous state for the player during the flag for informing about the pushing order related to increase / decrease of medals. The number of limit games may not be counted during the flag period during which no notification is given regarding the push order for increase / decrease.

  Further, the main control board 71 may vary whether or not to count as the number of limit games depending on the type of notification (navigation) performed during the bonus state. Depending on the pachislot machine, there may be a case where it is possible to win a push forward combination (that is, a combination in which the number of medals paid out differs depending on the push order) even during the bonus state. In such a pachislot machine, the player can obtain more profits by notifying the push forward during the bonus state. Therefore, the main control board 71 counts the number of games in the bonus state as the number of limit games and notifies the player in the bonus state, when notifying the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player in the bonus state. When the mode of the stop operation is not notified, the game in the bonus state may not be counted as the limit game number.

(Limit processing flow)
Next, the flow of limit processing will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 127 (A), when the number of limit games counted according to the counting method described above reaches a certain number of games (for example, 1500 games), the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. Let That is, when the limit game number reaches a certain number of games, the main control board 71 ends the specific section even when the number of games, the number of times of navigation, etc. still remain (when the end condition is not satisfied). .

  Then, along with the end of the specific section, the main control board 71 performs an initialization process that initializes values of variables related to the occurrence of notification (navigation). In this initialization process, the RT gaming state may be maintained as it is or may be initialized to RT0 which is in a low RT state. For example, in the RT gaming state for the ART gaming state, the RT gaming state that does not transition to the RT gaming state by a combination of symbols such as bell spills and falling replays, and ends when the prescribed number of games is consumed or a bonus is won In such a case, even if navigation is not generated due to the limit processing, a state advantageous to the player of high RT will continue, so it is desirable that the latter specification be a gaming state with a low replay probability. Especially in the RT gaming state where the specified number of games is a large value, such as 6000 games, which is substantially continued until the next bonus, the gambling can be appropriately suppressed by dropping the RT gaming state by the limit processing. it can.

  When performing the limit processing in this way, the main control board 71 continues to light the status indicator 147b until the limit game number reaches a certain number of games, the limit game number reaches a certain number of games, and the specific section is ended. Then, the status indicator 147b is turned off. In addition, when the specific section is ended by the limit process, the main control board 71 turns on the limit lamp 148 for a predetermined period thereafter. As the predetermined period, when the limit process is performed at the end of the game in which the number of limit games has reached a certain number of games, for example, it may be during the next game of the game for which the limit process has been performed. Further, as described above, the main control board 71 may blink the limit lamp 148 when the limit process is almost activated, and inform the player that the limit process is almost activated.

  Here, for example, when a game in the bonus state is also counted as the number of limit games, the number of limit games may reach a certain number of games during the bonus state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), the main control board 71 may perform a limit process to shift the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section even during the bonus state. Further, as shown in FIG. 127C, the main control board 71 may perform the limit process at the timing when the bonus ends without performing the limit process during the bonus state. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 127 (B), the gaming state shifts from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games. In the example shown in FIG. The gaming state is shifted from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the bonus state is ended, not at the timing when the number of games reaches the certain number of games.

  Of course, when the number of limit games is counted during the waiting period of a specific section or between bonus flags, the number of limit games reaches a certain number during the waiting section or between flags. Then, the limit process may be performed even during the standby section or between the flags, and the timing at which the limit game number reaches the specific section after the limit game number reaches a certain number of games, or the number of limit games is After reaching a certain number of games, the limit process may be performed at a timing when a transition is made from a flag state to a specific section through a bonus state.

(Signal output to external device during limit processing)
Further, when the specific section is terminated by the limit processing, the main control board 71 outputs a predetermined signal indicating that to the external device (data counter or hall computer). By receiving this signal output, the hall side can grasp that the limit processing has been performed in the pachislot machine, and can grasp new information that could not be grasped conventionally.
When the number of limit games has reached a certain number of games during the bonus state, the main control board 71 sets the external device at the timing when the number of limit games reaches the certain number of games (that is, during the bonus state). It is also possible to output a predetermined signal to the external device, and output a predetermined signal to the external device at the timing when the bonus state ends (that is, the main control board 71 outputs the bonus state in the specific section). When the number of limit games reaches a certain number, a predetermined signal may be output to the external device at the end of the bonus state).

  In addition, the main control board 71 is not only a signal (limit signal) indicating that the limit processing has been performed when the limit processing is performed a number of times exceeding the number of times normally assumed in one pachislot machine 1. A signal (error signal) indicating that limit processing has been performed more times than expected may be output to an external device. Specifically, when the number of times that the number of limit games has reached a certain number of games within a specific period (that is, the number of times limit processing has been performed) reaches a predetermined number, Output a signal. As an example, when the limit process is performed a number of times exceeding the assumption between the time when the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned on and the time when the power is turned off, the main control board 71 also sends an error signal to the external device together with the limit signal. Output. Thereby, for example, when the limit process is performed 10 times during the day, such as 10 times, which is not normal, it is possible to grasp the fact on the hall side.

(Navi guarantee processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, a navigation guarantee process in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the flow of the navigation guarantee process at the end of the specific section.
In the case of a pachislot machine that manages the end condition of a specific section according to the number of games, if the number of times that a role to be notified (for example, push order bell) is determined as an internal winning combination in the specific section is small, There are few medals to be paid out and the player may feel lost. Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment guarantees the minimum number of times of navigation when shifting to a specific section, and continues without ending the specific section until navigation for this guaranteed number of times is performed.

  Here, in FIG. 128, the end condition of the specific section is managed by the number of games, and in FIGS. 128A to 128C, the end condition of the specific section is satisfied at the end of 50 games. It shall be. In the example shown in FIG. 128 (A), when the specific section continues for 50 games (that is, when the end condition is satisfied), notification (navigation) for the guaranteed number of times is not yet performed. In such a case, the main control board 71 continues the specific section even if the end condition is satisfied. In the example shown in FIG. 128 (A), after that, in the 54th game, a role to be notified (for example, a push order bell) is determined as an internal winning combination, and notification is given to the notification target role. The main control board 71 ends the specific section when the notification is performed for the guaranteed number of times along with this notification. On the other hand, the main control board 71 continues without ending the specific section when the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed even by the notification after satisfying the end condition of the specific section.

  By the way, in the pachislot machine, as the push order, a plurality of types of push orders with different medal payout numbers at the time of the push order correct are provided, and the main control board 71 responds to these push orders during a specific section. The order of pushing correct answers may be reported. As a plurality of types of pushing orders, for example, even if the correct answer is given in the pushing order, medals do not increase (that is, the payout number is equal to or less than the inserted number), or the medal increase is very small (for example, payout at the time of 3 bets) 4) and a push order in which the number of medals increases (for example, the number of payouts at the time of 3 betting is 9) is considered. It should be noted that, in any push order combination, when the answer is incorrect in the push order, the medal payout number is smaller than that in the correct answer in the push order or the medal payout number is 0 in common.

  From the player's point of view, the number of medals earned during a specific section does not increase even if a notification is given for the push order that does not increase or the increase is very small at the correct answer. The number of navigations does not need to be guaranteed during a specific section. On the other hand, the push order role in which the medals increase at the correct answer in the push order affects the total number of medals acquired during the specific section, so that the player guarantees the number of times of navigation during the specific section. It is preferable.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the multiple types of push forwards having different payout numbers of medals at the correct push order, only push forwards in which the payout number at the correct push order is greater than the inserted number, The number of times of navigation may be guaranteed, and the number of times of navigation may not be guaranteed for a push order in which the number of payouts in the correct answer in the push order is equal to or less than the number of input. In addition, among the multiple types of push order roles with different medal payout numbers at the correct push order, the number of navigations is guaranteed only for the push order with the largest payout number at the correct push order, and other push forward roles For, the number of times of navigation may not be guaranteed.

  Specifically, the main control board 71 sets the number of times of navigation when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied in the situation where the notification for the push forward for guaranteeing the number of navigations is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section. Regardless of the number of notifications for a push order that is not guaranteed, the specific section is ended on condition that the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. On the other hand, the main control board 71, when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied in the situation where the notification for the push forward that guarantees the number of navigations is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section, The specific section is ended at the timing when the notification for the push order for guaranteeing the number of times of navigation is performed for the number of times guaranteed.

  By doing this, the number of notifications (navigation) about push-forwarding that affects the total number of medals acquired during a specific section is guaranteed, so the loss felt by the player can be reduced. .

  Next, a description will be given of a case where the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without notification for the guaranteed number of times while sandwiching the bonus state. 128 (B) and (C) show that when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied (at the end of 50 games), the notification is not made for the guaranteed number of times, but in the specific section before the end condition is satisfied. An example in which a transition to the bonus state is made is shown.

  Since the bonus state is basically a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it can be considered that a certain profit is given to the player when the specific section is viewed as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), the main control board 71 is in the specific section even when notification for the guaranteed number of times has not yet been performed when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. If the bonus state has been entered even once, the specific section may be ended when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128 (C), when the main control board 71 satisfies the end condition of the specific section and has not yet been notified for the guaranteed number of times, Regardless of whether or not the transition to the bonus state has occurred, the specific section is continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, and then the specific section may be terminated at the timing when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed. Good.

  Next, a case will be described in which the limit game number in a specific section reaches a certain number of games without being notified for the guaranteed number of times. If the specific section continues until the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, it can be considered that the player is given a certain profit, so the main control board 71 is shown in FIG. 128 (D). As shown in the figure, when the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games, the specific section may be ended even if the number of guarantees has not been notified. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), even if the limit game number in the specific section has reached a certain number of games, the main control board 71 has not yet been notified for the guaranteed number of times. The specific section may be continued until notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, and then the specific section may be terminated at the timing when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

  In the case where the specific section is continued until the notification for the number of times of guarantee is performed by the navigation guarantee processing, whether or not to perform so-called extra lottery during the specific section after the end condition is satisfied is arbitrary. That is, the main control board 71 may perform extra lottery until the end condition is satisfied during the specific section, and may not perform additional lottery even during the specific section after the end condition is satisfied. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may perform lottery for an additional period after the end condition is satisfied until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

  Further, when the specific section is continued until the number of times of guarantee is given by the navigation guarantee processing, the liquid crystal display device such as the display unit 100 returns to the normal screen at a timing satisfying the end condition of the specific section, and then When the push order to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the push order may be notified (navigation) on the normal screen. That is, when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without notification for the guaranteed number of times, the main control board 71 keeps the state indicator 147b lit, but the sub control board 72 displays the display screen in the specific section. Switch the display screen to the display screen in the normal section. After that, when the push order to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 notifies the push order via the notification lamp 147a of the instruction monitor 147, and the sub control board 72 , The order of pressing on the normal screen is notified. Then, when notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, the main control board 71 may turn off the status indicator 147b.

<Outline of each game state>
The outline of the game flow of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described above. Next, with reference to FIG. 123, an outline of each gaming state of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a normal section, a standby section, and a specific section when roughly classified. The normal section is a state where a stop operation mode advantageous to the player is not notified, and the specific section is a state where a stop operation mode advantageous to the player is notified. Further, the standby section is a state after the winning lottery for shifting to the specific section until the transition to the specific section from the normal section.

  In the normal section, the waiting section, and the specific section, the bonus winning combination is not determined as an internal winning combination depending on whether the bonus winning combination has been won or the bonus has been activated. Not set “Bonus inactive (between non-flags)”, set the probability that the bonus-related role is determined as an internal winning combination, and “Between flags” that the bonus is not operating is determined as an internal winning combination “Bonus state (no setting difference)” in which a bonus corresponding to a bonus combination with no difference is activated and a bonus corresponding to a bonus combination having a setting difference in the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination “ “Bonus state (with setting difference)” and the game state are included.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the main control board 71 is in the “bonus inactive (between non-flags)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the normal section. In addition, the status indicator 147b is turned off, and when a combination for notification is determined as an internal winning combination, these combinations are grouped and transmitted to the sub-control board 72. Specifically, when one of the roles “F_3 option bell_1st”, “F_3 option bell_2nd”, and “F_3 option bell_3rd” is determined as an internal winning combination, the main control board 71 groups these roles. Assuming that the combination “push order bell” is determined as the internal winning combination, information is transmitted to the sub-control board 72.

  Further, in the “bonus inactive (between non-flag)” and “bonus state (no setting difference)” in the normal section, the main control board 71 performs lottery transfer to a specific section based on information that does not differ in the set value. On the other hand, in the “inter-flag” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the normal section, the main control board 71 does not perform lottery transfer to the specific section. Further, in the normal section “bonus inactive (between non-flags)” “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)”, the main control board 71 continues the specific section. No additional lottery for the period or notification when pushing forwards are won.

  Further, in the “non-operational bonus (between non-flag)”, “inter-flag”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section, the main control board 71 displays the status indicator 147b. Lights up. Note that the main control board 71 may light the status indicator 147b in a different manner during the standby section and during the specific section.

  Further, in the “non-operational bonus (between non-flag)”, “inter-flag”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section, the main control board 71 receives the push order combination. It is good also as notifying notifying of the pushing order of the correct answer of time. When notifying the correct push order, the main control board 71 transmits the notification-related roles to the sub-control board 72 without grouping them. Specifically, when one of the roles “F_3 option bell_1st”, “F_3 option bell_2nd”, and “F_3 option bell_3rd” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 actually sets the internal winning combination. Information that can identify the type of the combination determined as is transmitted to the sub control board 72. On the other hand, when not reporting the correct push order, the main control board 71 groups the roles related to the notification and transmits them to the sub-control board 72.

  Further, the main control board 71 wins in the “no bonus operation (between non-flag)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section. Transition lottery to a specific section is not performed (however, a transition lottery may be performed for a specific section different from the specific section being won). Further, in the “non-operational bonus (between non-flag)”, “inter-flag”, and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section, the main control board 71 does not perform lottery addition for the duration of the specific section. In the “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section, the main control board 71 may perform lottery by adding the duration of the specific section based on information having no difference in the set value. It's okay to not.

  Further, in the specific section “bonus inactive (between non-flags)” “between flags”, “bonus state (without setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)”, the main control board 71 displays the status indicator 147b. Is turned on, and the correct push order is notified when the push order is won. Therefore, the main control board 71 performs a role related to notification in “bonus inactive (between non-flags)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in a specific section. Are transmitted to the sub-control board 72 without grouping.

  Further, the main control board 71 wins in “bonus inactive (between non-flags)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in a specific section. Transition lottery to a specific section is not performed (however, a transition lottery may be performed for a specific section different from the specific section being won). Further, the main control board 71 adds the duration of the specific section based on the information having no difference in the set value in the “bonus inactive (between non-flags)” and “bonus state (no setting difference)” in the specific section. While lottery is performed, in the “between flags” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the specific section, no extra lottery is performed for the duration of the specific section.

  Note that the main control board 71 may perform lottery transfer to a specific section only at the time of three bets, or add lottery for the duration of the specific section, and do not perform these lotteries at the time of one or two bets.

<Output of transfer lottery result to external device>
Next, with reference to FIG. 129 to FIG. 131, the flow when outputting the result of lottery transfer to a specific section from a pachislot machine to an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer will be described.

In game stores, external devices such as data counters and hall computers are installed in conjunction with pachislot machines.For example, when a bonus state starts in a pachislot machine, a signal is output from the pachislot machine to the data counter, and data Count the number of bonuses at the counter. In the conventional pachislot machine, since the lottery for the specific section is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side, the main control board 71 is able to recognize an event (for example, in the RT state) that can be recognized on the main (main control board 71) side. The lottery result is estimated from the transition and the stop operation is performed a plurality of times in a specific pushing order), and a signal is output to the external device based on the estimation. However, in such a conventional method, the timing of outputting that the winning lottery is won is delayed by several games from the timing of actually winning, and a specific pressing order is accidentally repeated by the player's stop operation. If this happens, it is assumed that the winning lottery is won even though it has not been won, and as a result, an incorrect signal may be output.
Further, in the specification of outputting a signal based on the transition of the RT gaming state, when a bonus is drawn during the ART, the signal is also output when the RT gaming state at the end of the bonus is returned to the RT gaming state for ART after the bonus is consumed. May be output. In such a case, there is a problem that the signal is output more than the number of correct ART wins and digest sets, and it is difficult for the player to grasp accurate information when guessing the setting or selecting a stand. Has occurred.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the result of the transfer lottery to the specific section itself is output to the external device as it is, not from the estimation result, so the result of the transfer lottery is accurately output to the external device. Can be output.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating a pattern example of signal output timing to an external device. In FIG. 129, the timing T1 is the start time of the game won in the lottery for shifting to a specific section (for example, the ART gaming state), the period P1 is a period between one game of the game, and the period P2 is It is a period between one game of the next game.

  In the example shown in FIG. 129, at the timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), a lottery for shifting to a specific section is won. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the lottery for the specific section is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, the main control board 71 can grasp that the winning lottery has been won from the time T1. .

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transfer lottery is output to an external device at an arbitrary timing during the game period P1 won in the transfer lottery. For example, in the output pattern example A, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery to the external device at the start of the game won for the transfer lottery to the specific section (that is, when the start lever 6 is operated). doing. Similarly, in the output pattern example B, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery to the external device at the start of the reel rotation of the game, and in the output pattern example C, the main control board 71 outputs the external lottery at the first stop operation of the game. The result of the transfer lottery is output to the device, and in the output pattern example D, the result of the transfer lottery is output to the external device when all reels of the game are stopped.

  As shown in output pattern examples E and F, the main control board 71 can also output the result of the transfer lottery to an external device in a game after the game won the transfer lottery. For example, in the output pattern example E, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery to the external device when a medal for the game next to the game won the transfer lottery is inserted. Further, in the output pattern example F, the main control board 71 performs transfer lottery with respect to the external device during an arbitrary game in which a plurality of games have been performed thereafter (for example, at the start of a game in which a specific section starts). The result is output.

  Note that the output pattern example shown in FIG. 129 is merely an example, and in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the result of the transfer lottery is given to the external device at an arbitrary timing after winning the lottery to the specific section. Can be output.

  120 can be realized by combining the lighting pattern example of the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 120 and the signal output pattern example to the external device shown in FIG. 129 arbitrarily. Specifically, a signal indicating that the transfer lottery has been won can be output to the external device prior to the lighting of the status indicator 147b. Conversely, after the status indicator 147b is lit, the external device It may be possible to output a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won, or to output a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won to an external device simultaneously with the lighting of the status indicator 147b. Good.

  For example, since the signal is output to the external device before the status indicator 147b, the counter is updated in the external device (data counter) before the status indicator 147b is turned on. It is possible to detect the transition of a specific section from an external device other than 1. Further, for example, in consideration of processing time in the external device, the signal to the external device is output slightly before the lighting of the status indicator 147b, so that the status indicator 147b is turned on (notification in the pachislot machine 1). The timing and the update timing of the external device (notification other than the pachislot machine 1) can be matched, and the player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  For example, when there are many types of bonuses and there are limited output pins from the external concentrated terminal board 73, such as when there are no vacant output pins in the 8-pin signal line that outputs signals to the external device. The main control board 71 may not output a signal to the external device even if the transfer lottery is won.

  In the above embodiment, a signal is output when a transition lottery is won. However, a signal may be output when a specific section such as ART continues. For example, in the case of a game specification in which one set of 30 games is managed and the number of sets is managed, a signal is output when the winning lottery is won (so-called first hit), and after the first set of 30 games is digested, 2 sets An external signal can be output at the timing when the eyes are started. By outputting a signal in this way, the correct number of sets can be grasped. In addition, it is possible to use a data counter to accurately grasp the number of first hits and the number of continuations by using different signals for the first hit and the signal at the time of continuation. .

In such a game machine that manages the number of sets, when the bonus state starts in the middle of the ART game state, a pachislot machine that resumes the game from the remaining number of games in the set after the bonus ends, There is a pachislot machine that starts a new set from the beginning after the bonus ends.
In the former case, for example, when 25 bonus games are started when 25 games out of a set of 30 games in the ART gaming state are digested and the bonus status starts, the remaining number of games after the bonus ends is 5 games (remaining at the time of bonus winning) The ART gaming state is resumed from (number of games). In such a case, it is desirable not to output a signal at the time of restarting ART because only one set is divided on the way. On the other hand, in the latter case, as a benefit of winning the bonus during the ART gaming state, one set of ART is substantially added, so it is desirable to output a signal when the ART is restarted. Note that the same signal output processing can be applied not only to an ART of a type in which the number of predetermined games is one set, but also to a type of managing the number of ART sets by a difference number or the number of navigations.

  A pachislot machine having both a pattern in which the game is restarted from the remaining number of games in the set after the bonus ends and a pattern in which a new set is started from the beginning after the bonus ends can be considered. For example, if a bonus is won when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is less than a predetermined value, one set is added as a remedy, and if the bonus is won when the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the remaining after the bonus ends A specification that restarts the game from the number of games is conceivable.

In such a pachislot machine, the main control board 71 controls the signal output according to whether or not the ART is added when the bonus is won. In other words, if an ART addition occurs when the bonus is won, the main control board 71 outputs a signal when the ART gaming state is resumed after the bonus ends, and no ART addition occurs when the bonus is won. The main control board 71 does not output a signal when the ART gaming state is resumed after the bonus ends. More specifically, when the bonus is won when the remaining number of games in the ART gaming state is less than a predetermined value, the main control board 71 outputs a signal when restarting ART after the bonus ends, assuming that an ART addition has occurred. If the bonus is won when the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, no signal is output when the ART is restarted after the bonus is ended, assuming that no additional ART has occurred.
In other words, if the main control board 71 wins a bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is less than a predetermined value, the ART gaming state of a set different from the set executed at the time of winning the bonus after the bonus ends. The signal is output to the outside. On the other hand, if the bonus is won when the remaining number of games in the ART gaming state is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the main control board 71 resumes the ART gaming state of the same set as the set executed at the time of winning the bonus after the bonus is over. At the same time, no signal is output to the outside.

  In addition, the presence or absence of signal output may be determined according to the presence or absence of an ART addition from the bonus winning to the start of ART as well as the presence or absence of an ART addition at the time of winning the bonus.

The signal output described so far is a signal in which the value of the data counter is incremented by one by one output. However, when starting a high-value ART gaming state, the data counter depends on the value. It is good also as a signal which raises the value of two or more values. For example, in the case of an ART of one set of 30 games, when a long ART consisting of one set of 90 games is started with a premium or the like, a signal may be output so that the value of the data counter increases by three. .
Also, in the case of an ART of one set of 30 games, when starting an ART that continues until the next bonus, a signal is output so that the value of the data counter increases in accordance with the average number of games until the bonus is won. Also good. For example, when the winning probability of the bonus is 1/150, the average number of continued games is 150 games, which corresponds to 5 sets, and thus a signal that increases the value of the data counter by 5 is output. In this case, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the bonus, the average number of continued games determined from the bonus probability of a specific setting value (for example, setting 6) regardless of the setting so that the setting is not specified Output a signal according to. By doing so, it becomes easy to determine how much profit is obtained afterwards even from a data counter or the like even for a pachislot machine having a plurality of ART gaming states with different values at the start. The signal that increases the value of the data counter by a plurality of values may be a signal that increases the value by 1 a plurality of times with an interval so that an external device can identify the signal. May be transmitted in one shot.

(Example of production in cooperation with external equipment)
Next, with reference to FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, an example of an effect performed in cooperation with an external device when winning a lottery for shifting to a specific section will be described. FIG. 130 shows an example of an effect in the case where a signal is output to an external device during a game winning the transition lottery to the specific section, and FIG. An example of an effect in the case of outputting a signal to a device will be shown.

(Example 1)
In the production example 1 shown in FIG. 130, in the game won in the transition lottery, the main control board 71 rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in reverse before starting the reel rotation, and then rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the forward direction. The game is progressing. In this production example 1, the timing T1 is a timing for starting the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the timing T2 is a timing for starting the forward rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (that is, at the time of starting the reel rotation). The timing T3 is when all the reels of the game are stopped. Further, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b at the timing of lighting pattern example 4 (when all reels are stopped), and externally indicates that the winning lottery has been won at the timing of output pattern example B (when reel rotation starts). Output to the device.

  As shown at the timing T1, in the game where the lottery for the specific section is won, the main control board 71 starts to rotate the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the operation of the start lever 6. At this time, the main control board 71 first rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the reverse direction. In addition, the sub control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to display notifying the data counter installed at the upper part of the pachislot machine 1 and to display a countdown of 5 seconds. Here, the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R means that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate from the bottom to the top. Therefore, for the player, the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Accordingly, the line of sight is guided from the bottom to the top. In addition to the guidance of the line of sight by the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the display unit 100 also draws attention to the data counter, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the data counter.

  From timing T1 to timing T2, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to advance the countdown. Thereafter, at timing T2, the main control board 71 rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the forward direction, and outputs a signal indicating that the transfer lottery has been won to the data counter. When this signal is received, the data counter updates the counter and displays “winning” or the like.

  As described above, in the production example 1, by using the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and the display by the display unit 100, the line of sight is guided to the data counter, and then the signal is output to the data counter. Then, the fact that the lottery for the transition to the specific section has been won is notified on the data counter that collects the gaze of the player. Thereby, not only the pachislot machine 1 but also an effect linked with an external device (data counter) can be executed.

  Moreover, in the production example 1, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b at the timing T3. On the sub-control board 72, in accordance with the lighting timing of the status indicator 147b, an image or the like indicating that the specific section is won is displayed on the display unit 100. As described above, in the production example 1, by performing the production in accordance with the lighting timing of the state indicator 147b and the output timing of the signal to the external device, various productions can be performed in conjunction with each other, and the production effect is enhanced. Can do.

(Example 2)
Next, Production Example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. In a pachislot machine having a specific section such as an ART gaming state, the specific section is not started immediately after winning the lottery for the transition to the specific section, and the specific section starts after a predetermined number of games have passed after winning the transition lottery. There is a case where a so-called precursor effect is performed during the predetermined number of games. By the way, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery performed by itself to the external device as it is, so that the output pattern examples A to D shown in FIG. Even in a game where the player wins the transfer lottery, the result of the transfer lottery can be output to the external device. Here, when the game of winning the transition lottery is performed and the result of the transition lottery is output to an external device, the counter is updated on the data counter (external device). An effect result (that is, whether or not the transfer lottery is successful) is known from the value of the counter, and the interest is lost.

  Therefore, in the production example 2 shown in FIG. 131, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery to the external device at an arbitrary timing during the game after 32 games from the game won in the specific section. To do. Then, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 perform a precursor effect during these 32 games as shown in the effect example A. Thus, the value of the data counter is not updated during the 32 games in which the sign effect is performed, and the player can be interested in the sign effect.

  In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the transition lottery in the specific section is won, the state indicator 147b is turned on during the game. However, the result of the transition lottery is displayed from the state indicator 147b during the indication effect. If it can be grasped, the interest will be lost. Therefore, it is preferable that the status indicator 147b makes it difficult to understand the result of the transfer lottery. The method for making the result of the transfer lottery difficult to understand from the status indicator 147b is as described above.

  Further, when the registration operation is accepted from the player, the period for performing the sign effect may be customizable. In the example shown in FIG. 131, in the effect example A, the sign effect is performed for 32 games, but in the effect example B, the sign effect is performed for 16 games, and then the winning of the specific section is confirmed. A later standby effect will be performed. The standby effect may be, for example, an introduction of a character appearing in the pachislot machine 1, a story introduction, or the like, or an effect suggesting a set value. Even if the period of the precursor effect can be customized as described above, the main control board 71 outputs a signal to the external device at the same timing regardless of whether or not customization is performed. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 131, the main control board 71 is 32 games after the game won in the transition lottery in the specific section, both in the case of performing the effect example A and in the case of performing the effect example B. During the game, the result of the transfer lottery is output to the external device.

<How to secure navigation in a specific section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a navigation securing method for securing the number of times of notification of a stop operation mode advantageous to the player during a specific section will be described. In a pachislot machine having a specific section such as an ART gaming state, if navigation is not performed during the specific section, the game in the specific section becomes monotonous, which may reduce the interest of the player. Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment prevents the game in the specific section from becoming monotonous by creating a state in which navigation is easily performed during the specific section.

  Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, the start timing of the specific section is set at the start of the bonus state, and during this bonus state, the push forward (notification target role) is performed with a higher probability than when the bonus is not activated. Is determined as an internal winning combination. If the specific section is also started at the start of the bonus state, the correct pressing order is notified to the pressing order won during the bonus state, and the specific section is not started at the start of the bonus state. Does not notify the pressing order during the bonus state. Thereby, the situation where navigation is not performed during a specific section can be avoided, and as a result, the interest of games in the specific section can be enhanced.

  In particular, since the timing for starting the specific section is set as the start of the bonus state, the situation is such that the bonus state is never entered during the specific section, that is, the situation in which navigation is easily performed during the specific section (bonus state). It is possible to avoid the situation where the player does not need to go, and as a result, the player can receive a certain number of times of navigation during the specific section.

(Example of how to start a specific section at the start of bonus)
Here, the method of setting the timing for starting the specific section as the start time of the bonus state is arbitrary. For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (A-1), the main control board 71 responds to the fact that the combination related to the bonus that is the unquestioned set is determined as the internal winning combination (that is, the bonus winning) during the normal section. And perform a lottery. When the symbol combination corresponding to the combination related to the bonus is displayed in the state where the main control board 71 is winning the transition lottery, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state, 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the push order of the correct answer to the push order determined as the internal winning combination with a high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting the specific section when the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to the bonus is displayed in a state where the transition lottery is not won. The control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 do not notify the correct pushing order even if the pushing order is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 132 (A-2), the main control board 71 does not determine that the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, but serves as a bonus related role that is not set during the normal section. A transfer lottery may be performed in response to the display of the corresponding symbol combination (that is, bonus winning).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 132 (A-3), the main control board 71 may perform a transfer lottery regardless of the combination relating to the bonus during the normal section. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs a lottery transfer to a specific section based on information having no difference in set values during the normal section, and when winning the transfer lottery, the right to transfer to the specific section is determined. Is granted. After that, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to the bonus is displayed, the main control board 71 starts the specific section together with the bonus state when the right to transfer is granted, The board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pushing order of the correct answer to the pushing order determined as the internal winning combination with a high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, when the right to transfer is not granted, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting the specific section, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are pushed forward during the bonus state. Even if is determined as an internal winning combination, the correct push order is not notified.

(Data example)
FIG. 132B is a data configuration example for realizing a navigation securing method in a specific section. As shown in FIG. 132 (B), during the bonus state, the push order (“F_3 alternative combination_1st”, “F_3 alternative combination_2nd”, “F_3 alternative combination_3rd” is higher than in the state other than the bonus state. ) Is determined as an internal winning combination. For example, if the correct answer is the order of push, the combination of symbols from which nine medals are paid out is displayed. If the answer is incorrect, the combination of symbols from which five medals are paid out is displayed. It is what is displayed. Further, the bonus state is terminated when, for example, 10 or more medals are paid out.

  According to such a data example, when notifying the correct pushing order to the pushing order during the bonus state, the player can obtain 18 (= 9 × 2 times) medals during the bonus state. However, if the correct push order is not notified to the push forward during the bonus state, the player will receive 10 (= 5 × 2 times) during the bonus state. You may not be able to receive or receive medals.

<Precursor realization method using specific section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133 and FIG. 134, a method for realizing a precursor effect in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a lottery for a specific section is won, the state indicator 147b is turned on during the game to notify that the player has won the transition lottery. It is not suitable for notifying the result of the transfer lottery using. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a prelude effect is produced during the first specific section using a specific section (first specific section) that is different from the specific section (second specific section) for which the success or failure is reported. Is going to do.

(Precursor method 1 regarding transition to specific section)
First, with reference to FIG. 133, a technique for realizing a precursor for the transition to the second specific section will be described. In this method, a plurality of specific sections having different durations of a short ART (first specific section) and a long ART (second specific section) are provided, and a game during the short ART is treated as a precursor game related to the transition to the long ART. .

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, a short ART that continues for a first period (for example, between three games) and a second period that exceeds the first period (for example, for example, 53 games (for 3 + 50)) are provided, and a lottery for transitioning to short ART or long ART is performed during the normal section. FIG. 133 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the transfer lottery table used for the transfer lottery. The main control board 71 performs lottery transfer to the short ART or the long ART based on the information (internal winning combination) having no difference in the set value with a probability that the set value does not vary.

  In this transition lottery, when either a short ART or a long ART is won, the pachislot machine 1 performs a precursor effect to notify whether or not the long ART has been won during a period in which the short ART continues. More specifically, when the pachislot machine 1 wins a short ART, it performs a precursor effect that informs that it has not won a long ART during the first period that is the duration of the short ART. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1, when winning the long ART, the long ART is won from the start to the first period, which is the continuation period of the short ART, during the long ART duration. In addition to performing a precursor effect to notify this, an effect unique to the long ART is performed after the precursor effect.

  Note that when performing a precursor effect using a short ART, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b because both the short ART and the long ART are specific sections. That is, as shown in FIG. 133A, when the main control board 71 wins the short ART in the transfer lottery, the main control board 71 turns on the status indicator 147b during the first period that is the duration of the short ART. In addition, when a long ART is won in the transition lottery, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the second period which is a continuous period of the long ART. Note that the main control board 71 may light the status indicator 147b in different modes for the short ART and the long ART, or may light in the same mode.

  In addition, a method for outputting a signal to an external device when performing a precursor effect using a short ART is also arbitrary. For example, when the main control board 71 wins the short ART in the transfer lottery, the main control board 71 does not output a signal to the external device, but only outputs the signal to the external device when the long ART is won in the transfer lottery. May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device both when winning a short ART and when winning a long ART in the transfer lottery.

  In addition, as conditions for ending the short ART and long ART, there are arbitrary conditions such as the number of games in a specific section, the number of navigations performed in a specific section, the number of medals paid out during the specific section and the number of differences. Can be used. In this case, the termination condition used for the short ART and the termination condition used for the long ART may be the same type or different types. For example, when the number of games is used as the short ART end condition, the same type is to use the number of games as the long ART end condition. The different type is, for example, the end of the short ART. When the number of games is used as the condition, a condition other than the number of games is used as the end condition of the long ART.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133 (C), an example of an effect in the case of performing a precursor game using a short ART will be described. When the short ART or the long ART is won, the sub-control board 72 performs an effect such as “rushing into the blast chance” on the display unit 100, for example. This “explosive chance” effect is an effect of notifying the winner of the long ART depending on whether or not the bomb can be blown up during the first period, which is the duration of the short ART. In the example shown in FIG. 133, the duration of the short ART is assumed to be between 3 games.

  If the sub-control board 72 wins the short ART in the transition lottery (that is, if the long ART is not won), the sub-control board 72 ends the “blast chance” effect without being able to blow up the bomb, and wins the long ART in the transition lottery. If it is, the production that succeeds in the explosion of the bomb is executed in the “bomb chance” production. It should be noted that the timing of succeeding in the bomb explosion when winning a long ART is arbitrary. For example, if the duration of the short ART is 3 games, the bomb can be successfully exploded in the first game or the second game, the bomb can be successfully exploded in the third game, You may be able to successfully blow up the bomb at the start of the fourth game.

  In addition, since the short ART and the long ART are specific sections, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 can notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player during the indication effect. In the example shown in FIG. 133 (C), since the pushing order is won during the “blasting chance” production which is the precursor of the long ART, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are in the pushing order. On the other hand, the order of pushing correct answers is reported. In this way, the pachislot machine 1 can notify the player of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player during the sign production, and thus gives the player a sense of loss during the sign production that should increase the interest of the game. There is no end.

(Precursor method 2 regarding transition to specific section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, another method of the precursor realizing method related to the transition to the second specific section will be described. In the precursor method 1 described above, the result of the transition lottery is already determined at the start of the “blast chance” effect, so the result of the precursor effect is already determined at the start of the precursor game. Another method that will be described subsequently is a method that makes it possible to determine the result of the precursor effect during the precursor game. In this method, a plurality of specific sections of CZ (first specific section) and ART game state (second specific section) are provided, and a game in CZ is handled as a precursor game related to the transition to the ART game state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), the pachislot machine 1 performs lottery transfer to the CZ during the normal section, and performs lottery transfer to the ART during the CZ. FIG. 134B is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer lottery table used for the transfer lottery. The main control board 71 performs lottery transfer to CZ based on the internal winning combination, and lottery transfer to the ART gaming state based on a combination of symbols. Specifically, the main control board 71 does not perform the lottery transition to the ART gaming state when the combination of symbols of the bell spilling eyes or the first one is displayed, and when the combination of symbols of the bell is displayed. A lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed. Then, by notifying the correct push order to the push order bell during CZ, it is possible to make it easy to shift to the ART gaming state in CZ.

  When the pachislot machine 1 wins CZ in the transition lottery performed during the normal section, the “blast chance” effect shown in FIG. 134 (C) is performed. This “explosion chance” effect is performed, for example, when three games are continued, and when the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination during these three games, the correct push order is notified, and the transition to the ART gaming state is made. Can receive lottery. When the CZ ends without winning the lottery for the transition to the ART gaming state, the sub-control board 72 ends the “blast chance” effect without being able to blast the bomb, and transitions to the ART gaming state before the end of the CZ. When the lottery is won, an effect that succeeds in the bomb explosion is executed in the “explosion chance” effect.

  The main control board 71 lights the state indicator 147b in both the CZ and ART gaming states, but the lighting state of the state indicator 147b is arbitrary. That is, the main control board 71 may turn on the status indicator 147b in a different manner between the CZ and the ART gaming state, or may light up in the same manner.

  Also, a method for outputting a signal to an external device is arbitrary. For example, when the main control board 71 wins CZ in the transfer lottery, the main control board 71 does not output a signal to the external device, but outputs a signal to the external device only when winning the ART gaming state in the transfer lottery. May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device both when winning CZ in the transition lottery and when winning the ART gaming state.

  The termination conditions for the CZ and ART gaming states are arbitrary, and different types of termination conditions may be used, or the same type of termination conditions may be used.

Further, as a modification of the above-described example, a specification in which a short ART or a long ART is started at the start of a so-called gap MB can be considered.
Here, the gap MB is, for example, a payout of medals with an MB end condition of more than 14, and a combination of symbols from which 14 medals are paid out or a combination of symbols from which 15 medals are paid out. In the state where notification is performed in the MB in which is displayed, in the first game in the MB, the push order in which the combination of symbols from which 14 medals are paid out is displayed is notified, and in the next game In the state where 29 medals are paid out by notifying the pressing order in which the combination of symbols from which 15 medals are paid out is displayed, 15 medals are not notified. The combination of symbols to be paid out is often displayed and refers to an MB that ends with the payout of 15 medals.

  In the above example, it is necessary to continue to wait until the pushing order is determined as an internal winning combination. However, if a short ART is started at the start of such a gap MB, the game is pushed in the short ART start game and the next game. Since forward navigation occurs, there is no need to continue to wait until the push forward is determined as an internal winning combination, and the game will not be delayed. Also, even if the game ends with a short ART, the game will not be delayed due to the gap MB, so there will be more medals than a normal game, and you will be able to experience profitable navigation consumption. It is possible to reduce disappointment due to not being connected to the player and to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

<How to save navigation times>
In the so-called navigation frequency management pachislot machine that uses the number of times of navigation performed during a specific section as the end condition for the duration of a specific section, if the role to be navigated (notification target role) is concentrated and won, The navigation is concentrated and as a result, the specific section ends immediately. If the specific section ends immediately, it may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. Therefore, a method for saving the number of times of navigation will be described below with reference to FIG.

  When the number of times of navigation is used as the condition for ending the duration of the specific section, the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), notifies the player of a mode of stop operation that is advantageous to the player even during the bonus state. A necessary bonus (MB1) and a bonus (MB2) that does not require notification of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player during the bonus state are provided. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 starts the MB1 gaming state when the symbol combination corresponding to MB1 is displayed, and the MB2 gaming state where the symbol combination corresponding to MB2 is displayed. Start.

  As shown in FIG. 135 (B), during the MB1 gaming state, the main control board 71 displays the combinations “F_maintenance lip_1st + all small combinations” and “F_maintenance” in which combinations of symbols with different payout numbers are displayed according to the pressing order. “Lip_2nd + all small roles” and “F_maintenance lip_3rd + all small roles” are determined as internal winning combinations, while in MB2 gaming state, only combinations where the combination of symbols with the same payout number is displayed regardless of the pressing order To be determined as a winning role. In the MB1 gaming state, the payout number may differ depending on the order of pressing. Therefore, when these roles are determined as internal winning combinations, (Pressing order in which 9 winning combinations are displayed) is notified.

  In this way, when the MB1 gaming state starts during a specific section, the game is played while consuming the number of times of navigation, but when the MB2 gaming state can be started during the specific section. Can play a game without consuming the number of times of navigation, and can reduce the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation.

  In the MB1 gaming state, a combination that displays a combination of symbols with different payout numbers according to the pressing order is determined as an internal winning combination. On the other hand, in the MB2 gaming state, the same payout number is determined regardless of the pressing order. A method for realizing that only the combination for which the combination is displayed is determined as the internal winning combination is arbitrary. As an example, the MB1 gaming state is a gaming state dedicated to 3 bets, and during the MB1 gaming state, individual lotteries are randomly drawn only for replays, and when all the small roles are determined as internal winning combinations, The stop control is varied according to the type of replay. Thereby, during the MB1 gaming state, a combination in which a combination of symbols with different payout numbers depending on the pressing order can be determined as an internal winning combination. On the other hand, the MB2 gaming state is a gaming state dedicated to two bets, and in the case of two bets, a combination of winning combinations of the same medal payout numbers is used for all small combinations. As a result, during the MB2 gaming state, only a combination that displays a combination of symbols having the same payout number regardless of the pressing order can be determined as an internal winning combination.

<Individual management of Lip Navi and Bell Navi>
Subsequently, a method for individually managing Lip Navi and Bell Navi during a specific section will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141. In conventional pachislot machines, it is common to perform both notifications for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high lip state and notifications for increasing medals during a specific section. By managing each of them individually, it is possible to realize a new gameability that has never existed before.

(Game Example 1)
First, with reference to FIG. 136 to FIG. 138, Game Example 1 in the case where Lip Navi and Bell Navi are individually managed will be described. This gaming example 1 has a plurality of types of specific sections such as Lip Navi AT and Bernavi AT as specific sections. In Lip Navi AT, notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high Lip state is performed, but notification for increasing medals is not performed. In addition, in the bell navigation AT, at least notification for increasing medals is performed, and notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state is performed as necessary.

  FIG. 136 (A) shows a game flow in the first gaming example. As shown in FIG. 136 (A), the pachislot machine 1 provides three types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state, with different types of internal winning combinations related to replay and their winning probabilities as RT gaming states. . The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state in which the player stays after the bonus ends, after initialization processing, after a setting change, or the like. The RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state mainly used in a normal game. In addition, the RT2 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is a high probability, and if it is changed according to the notification, it is treated as a Lip Navi AT, and is transferred regardless of the notification. The game state is treated as a normal game. In addition, the RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high, and is a gaming state mainly used in Bernavi AT.

  There is a possibility of transition from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, when a combination of bell spilled symbols is displayed in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), the combinations of the bell spilled symbols are combinations “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_1st” which are the push order combinations. "Is displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pushing in the game determined as an internal winning combination. In the game in which the winning combinations “F_3 option bell_1st” to “F_3 option bell_3rd” are determined as the internal winning combinations, the combination of bell symbols is displayed and nine medals are paid out when the answer is correct in the pressing order.

  Further, there is a possibility that the RT1 gaming state may shift to the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT1 gaming state, when the combination of RT2 transition lip symbols is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136 (B), in the RT1 gaming state, the winning combinations "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), in the game in which the combinations “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” are determined as internal winning combinations, In the case of, the combination of symbols of RT2 transition lip is displayed, and in the case of incorrect answer in the order of pressing, the combination of symbols of replay is displayed.

  Further, there is a possibility that the RT2 gaming state may shift to the RT1 gaming state or the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT2 gaming state, when a combination of bell spilled eyes or RT1 transition lip symbols is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136 (B), in the RT2 gaming state, the winning combinations “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), in the game in which the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” are determined as the internal winning combinations, In the case of, the combination of symbols of replay is displayed, and in the case of incorrect answer in the order of pressing, the combination of symbols of RT1 transition lip is displayed. When the replay symbol combination is displayed by the correct push order answer, the main control board 71 maintains the gaming state in the RT2 game state, and the RT1 transition lip symbol combination is displayed by the incorrect push order answer. In this case, the gaming state is shifted from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

  Further, when the combination of symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136 (B), in the RT2 gaming state, the winning combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), in the game in which the combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” are determined as internal winning combinations, In the case of, the combination of symbols of RT3 transition lip is displayed, and in the case of incorrect answer in the order of pressing, the combination of symbols of replay is displayed. When the combination of the RT3 transition lip symbols is displayed by the correct push order answer, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and the replay symbol combination is changed by the incorrect pushing order. If displayed, the gaming state is maintained in the RT2 gaming state.

  In addition, there is a possibility of transition from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT3 gaming state, when a combination of bell spilled eyes or RT1 transition lip symbols is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. That is, in the game in which the roles “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” are determined as the internal winning combinations, the combination of bell symbols is displayed by the correct push order. If the game state is maintained in the RT3 game state while 9 medals are paid out, and the combination of symbols of the bell spilled pattern is displayed due to incorrect push order, the number is less than 9 (or 0) The game state is shifted from the RT3 game state to the RT1 game state while paying out the medals.

  Moreover, as shown in the transition lottery table of FIG. 137 (C), in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs the transition lottery to the Lip Navi AT based on the internal winning combination. This transition lottery table indicates that a lottery for transition to Lip Navi AT is performed based on an internal winning combination, and the types of combinations for which a transition lottery will be performed are merely examples.

  Moreover, as shown in the transition lottery table in FIG. 137 (C), in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs a lottery transition to the Bernavi AT based on the displayed combination of symbols. In this gaming example 1, the main control board 71 performs a lottery transition to the Bernavi AT only when a combination of symbols for the RT3 transition lip is displayed, and when a combination of symbols for the RT3 transition lip is displayed. For this reason, he will always win the Bell Navi AT.

  In the example shown in the drawing, the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed for the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT, that is, the combinations “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” are determined as internal winning combinations. However, it is not limited to this, and the main control board 71 simply includes the roles “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321”. When it is determined as a winning combination, a lottery for shifting to the Bell Navi AT may be performed.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 determines the roles “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” as internal winning combinations during the RT2 gaming state, and plays the role “ F_RT3 transition lip_123 "to" F_RT3 transition lip_321 "are not determined as internal winning combinations, or in other RT gaming states, the roles" F_RT3 transition lip_123 "to" F_RT3 transition lip_321 "have a lower probability than in the RT2 gaming state. Is determined as an internal winning combination. Therefore, the RT2 gaming state has a higher frequency of lottery transition to the Bernavi AT than in the other RT gaming states, and the main control board 71 is in the other RT gaming states (particularly the RT1 gaming state during the RT2 gaming state). ) And lottery transfer to Bernavi AT.

  When the pachislot machine 1 (the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72) does not win any of the Lip Navi AT and the Bell Navi AT, the stop operation mode (the correct push order) advantageous to the player is notified. do not do. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the player is winning the Lip Navi AT, the pachi-slot machine 1 performs the notification accompanying the Lip Navi AT.

  Specifically, when winning the Lip Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 have the roles “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” and the roles “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to When any of “F_RT3 transition lip_321” and combination “F_maintenance lip_123” is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct pressing order is notified. On the other hand, even in the case of winning the rip navigator AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are determined as any of the winning combinations “F_3 option bell_1st” to “F_3 option bell_3rd” as an internal winning combination. Even if it is done, the order of pushing correct answers is not notified.

  Further, when winning the Bell Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are determined that any of the combinations “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” is determined as the internal winning combination. , Notify the correct answer push order. In the case of winning the Bernavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are transferred from the roles “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” and roles “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition”. When either of “Lip_321” and the combination “F_Maintenance Lip_123” is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order may be notified or may not be notified.

  In this way, it is possible to treat the Rib Navi AT as a specific section for performing a notification for maintaining the RT2 gaming state with a high frequency of lottery transition to the Bernavi AT. It can be handled as a specific section in which notification for increasing is performed. As described above, in the gaming example 1, since there are specific sections having different roles of Lip Navi AT and Bernavi AT, the meaning of notification varies depending on the type of the specific section for the player. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest without making the notification monotonous.

  In addition, during Lip Navi AT, notification for increasing medals is not performed, so that an increase in medals can be suppressed. With pachislot machines, it is necessary to balance the profits between the player and the game store. However, if the period of increase in medals is long, the profit that the player will get will be excessive, making it difficult to move to a specific section, etc. It is necessary to balance profits in other parts. In this regard, according to the pachislot machine 1 of the gaming example 1, since there is a specific section called “Rip Navi AT” that does not perform notification for increasing medals separately from the Bernavi AT that performs notification for increasing medals, the specific section It is possible to achieve a balance between the profits of the player and the amusement store while realizing a gameability that is easy to shift to.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the specific section is made the same for each set value by performing the transfer lottery performed based on the information having no difference in the set value. . In this regard, the transition lottery itself may be performed based on information having no difference in setting values, and the degree of expectation regarding the transition to a specific section may be varied for each setting value. The specific method is shown below.

  In the above-mentioned gaming example 1, in response to the determination of the winning combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” as internal winning combinations (more specifically, when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination) In response to a stop operation in the pressing order, a lottery for shifting to the Bell Navi AT is performed. Since the transfer lottery is performed based on information having no difference in the set value, the winning combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” have an internal winning combination with a probability corresponding to the current gaming state regardless of the set value. Need to be determined. Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” as internal winning combinations at a predetermined probability regardless of the set value during the RT2 gaming state. As described above, in the RT gaming state other than the RT2 gaming state, the roles “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” may be determined as internal winning combinations, and in this case, the main control The board 71 has a lower probability than the predetermined probability during the RT gaming state (for example, the RT1 gaming state) other than the RT2 gaming state, and the roles “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321”. Is determined as an internal winning combination.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning lottery to the specific section is performed with the same probability regardless of the set value, so that the roles “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” are internal. Depending on what is determined as a winning combination (more specifically, when it is determined as an internal winning combination, it is stopped in the correct pushing order), regardless of the set value, the winning rate is the same. It is necessary to perform a transition lottery. Therefore, the main control board 71 performs lottery so as to win with the same probability regardless of the set value when performing lottery to shift to the Bell Navi AT.

  In this way, the roles “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321”, which trigger the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT, are determined as internal winning combinations with the same probability regardless of the set value. In addition, the lottery for the transition to the Bell Navi AT is won with the same probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, at first glance, the expectation level regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT is the same for each setting value. However, in this method, a setting difference is provided for the transition of the RT gaming state, thereby regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT. Different expectations for each set value.

  Specifically, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state with a probability corresponding to the set value that has been set. As described above, during the RT2 gaming state, since the lottery for the transition to the Bell Navi AT is performed more frequently than in other RT gaming states, this RT2 game is not provided with a setting difference in the transition lottery trigger or winning probability. By providing a setting difference regarding the transition to the state, as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bell Navi AT can be made different for each set value. More specifically, in the internal lottery table for RT1 shown in FIG. 136 (B), the probabilities (lottery value information) for determining the combinations “F_RT2 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT2 transition lip — 321” as internal winning combinations. By making the value different for each setting value, a setting difference can be provided for the transition to the RT2 gaming state. As a result, the setting value having a high probability of determining the combination “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” as the internal winning combination is likely to transition to the RT2 gaming state, and as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT Therefore, a feature for each set value can be obtained with respect to the transition to the Bernavi AT.

(Example of effects in Game Example 1)
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, an example of the effect in the pachislot machine 1 of the gaming example 1 will be described. FIG. 138 (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a game flow when performing the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (A), the first game is an RT1 game state, and is a game that has not won any of Lip Navi AT and Bernavi AT. In the first game, since neither the rip navigator AT nor the bell navigator AT is won, the status indicator 147b is turned off, and both the rep navigator count and the bell navigator count remain zero. Note that the number of Lip Navi means that any one of the roles “F_RT2 Transition Lip_123” to “F_RT2 Transition Lip_321”, Roles “F_RT3 Transition Lip_123” to “F_RT3 Transition Lip_321”, and Role “F_Maintenance Lip_123” is internal. This is the number of times the correct push order is notified when it is determined as a winning combination. The number of bell navigations is determined as any of the “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection_3rd” internal winning combinations. In this case, the number of times the correct answer is pushed is notified.

  Subsequently, in the second game, a lottery for the transition to Lip Navi AT is won. Therefore, the status indicator 147b lights up with the lighting pattern 1, and 5 times is given as the number of Lip Navi. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 138 (B) (a) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays that the number of Lip Navi is given to the display unit 100 and also displays that the “search challenge” effect is started. The “search challenge” effect is an effect of searching for a treasure performed during Lip Navi AT. If a treasure can be found while the number of Lip Navi remains, the result is a success (Bernavi AT). It is.

  Subsequently, in the third game, any of the combinations “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since Lip Navi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the push order of correct answers and prompt the transition to the RT2 gaming state. With this notification, in the third game, the number of Lip Navi is reduced from 5 times to 4 times. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 138 (B) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays a pressing order for shifting from the standby state (RT1 gaming state) to the treasure (RT2 gaming state) on the display unit 100. When the player performs a stop operation in accordance with this notification, the combination of symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, and then, as shown in (b) of FIG. 138 (B), the sub control board 72 is displayed on the display unit 100. The display indicating that the treasure has arrived from the waiting time is displayed.

  Subsequently, in the fourth game, since the transition to the RT2 game state is performed in the third game, the status indicator 147b is lit with the lighting pattern 2. In the fourth game, any of the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” is determined as an internal winning combination. Since the fourth game is in Lip Nav AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the push order of correct answers and prompt the user to maintain the RT2 gaming state. With this notification, in the fourth game, the number of Lip Navi is reduced from 4 to 3 times. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 138 (B) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the push order for maintaining the RT2 gaming state on the display unit 100. When the player performs a stop operation in accordance with this notification, the RT2 gaming state is maintained, and the search among treasures continues.

  Subsequently, in the fifth game, any one of the roles “F_3 option bell_1st” to “F_3 option bell_3rd” is determined as an internal winning combination, but since it is in the Ripenavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub The control board 72 does not notify the correct pushing order. Therefore, the sub control board 72 performs display indicating that the pressing order is unknown in the display unit 100 as shown in (d) of FIG. 138 (B). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 138, it is assumed that the answers were incorrect in the order of pressing, and therefore, a combination of symbols of bell spilled eyes is displayed. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state with the display of the combination of the bell spilled symbols. In addition, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 that it has fallen from treasure (RT2 gaming state) to standby (RT1 gaming state).

  Subsequently, in the sixth game, since the transition to the RT1 game state was performed in the fifth game, the status indicator 147b is lit with the lighting pattern 1. In the sixth game, any of the combinations “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since Lip Navi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the push order of correct answers and prompt the transition to the RT2 gaming state. Along with this notification, in the sixth game, the number of Lip Navi is reduced from 3 times to 2 times. Further, as shown in FIG. 138 (e), the sub-control board 72 displays a push order for shifting from standby (RT1 gaming state) to treasure (RT2 gaming state) on the display unit 100. Thereafter, when the combination of symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the display unit 100 displays that it has arrived between the treasure from the standby.

  Subsequently, in the seventh game, since the transition to the RT2 game state was performed in the sixth game, the status indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. In the seventh game, any of the combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the seventh game is in Lip Nav AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct pushing order. Along with this notification, in the seventh game, the number of Lip Navi is reduced from two to one. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 138 (B) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the correct push order on the display unit 100.

  Here, when any of the combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” is determined as an internal winning combination, if a correct answer is made in the push order, a transition lottery to the Bell Navi AT is performed and the Bell Navi AT is won. Therefore, the sub control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 that it has won the Bernavi AT. Further, the initial value (10) is added to the number of Lip Navi and the number of Bell Navi according to the winning of the Bell Navi AT. In addition, since 1 remains as the number of Lip Navi when winning the Bell Navi AT, the number of Lip Navi when winning the Bell Navi AT is 11 times.

  Thereafter, from the eighth game, the gaming state becomes Bernavi AT, and the main control board 71 lights the state indicator 147b with the lighting pattern 3. In this bell navigator AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72, as long as the number of Lip navigator remains, the role “F_RT2 transition Lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition Lip_321”, the role “F_RT3 transition Lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition”. Rip_321 ”and the role“ F_Maintenance Lip_123 ”are notified of the correct push order, and as long as the number of bell navigations remains, the correct answer is pushed for the roles“ F_3 choice bell_1st ”to“ F_3 choice_3rd ”. Announce the order.

(Game example 2)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141, a game example 2 in the case where Lip Navi and Bell Navi are individually managed will be described. In this game example 2, both Lip Navi and Bell Navi are performed during a specific section, but the number of notifications of both is individually managed. That is, in this game example 2, the number of times of both Lip Navi and Bell Navi is used as the end condition of the specific section. Note that Lip Navi refers to notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high Lip state, and Bell Navigation refers to notification for increasing medals.

  FIG. 139 (A) is a game flow in the game example 2. As shown in FIG. 139 (A), in the game example 2, there is a normal interval and a specific interval, and during the specific interval, the probability that the role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high. (For example, the RT2 gaming state or the RT3 gaming state in the gaming example 1) and the low lip probability (for example, the RT1 gaming state in the gaming example 1) with a low probability that the role related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination.

  In the gaming example 2, the main control board 71 performs a lottery to the specific section during the normal section, and when the winning lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal section to the specific section. . In the gaming example 2, the lottery for the transition to the specific section may be performed by an arbitrary method.

  Further, when both the number of Lip Navi times and the number of Bell Navi times become 0 during the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. That is, in the gaming example 2, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 perform notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state for the number of times indicated by the number of Lip Navi, and the medals for the number of times indicated by the number of Bell Navigation. Informs to increase. Then, when both the number of Lip Navi times and the number of Bell Navi times become 0, the main control board 71 ends the specific section and shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section.

  Further, when the symbol combination of the fall replay is displayed in the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the RT gaming state from the high lip state to the low lip state, and the symbol combination of the promoted replay is displayed. The main control board 71 shifts the RT gaming state from the low lip state to the high lip state. In addition, the combination of the symbols of the fall replay and the promotion replay is arbitrary, but in accordance with the expression of the game example 1, for example, the symbol combination of the RT1 transition lip corresponds to the symbol combination of the fall replay, and the transition to RT2 The combination of symbols of Lip and RT3 transition Lip corresponds to the combination of symbols of Promotion Replay.

  Note that the combination of symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed at the time of an incorrect answer in the pressing order when the combinations “F_maintenance lip_123” to “F_maintenance lip_321” are determined as internal winning combinations, and the RT2 transition lip or RT3 The combination of symbols of the transition lip is correct when the combinations “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” and “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” are determined as internal winning combinations. Displayed at times. Therefore, Lip Navi in Game Example 2 means that when the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” are determined as the internal winning combinations, the correct push order is notified, and the combination of the fall replay symbols is When it is determined that the combination “F_RT2 transition Lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition Lip_321” and the roles “F_RT3 transition Lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition Lip_321” are determined as internal winning combinations. This includes notifying the correct pushing order and prompting the display of the combination of symbols of the promotion replay.

  In addition, if the combination “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” is determined as an internal winning combination and a stop operation is performed in the correct push order, a combination of replay symbols is displayed and the RT gaming state is displayed. Is maintained in the current RT gaming state. In other words, the main control board 71 displays the combination of replay symbols when the combination “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” is determined as an internal winning combination during the high lip state (press In the correct answer), while maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state, when the combination of falling replay symbols is displayed (incorrect push order answer), the RT gaming state is shifted from the high lip state to the low lip state. .

  Subsequently, FIG. 139 (B) is a diagram illustrating characteristics of a specific section of the gaming example 2. As shown in FIG. 139 (B), the game example 2 has a plurality of states of a normal ART and a special state in the specific section. Comparing the normal ART with the special state, the normal ART is in a state where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigation is higher than that in the special state. In addition, in the gaming example 2, when the number of Lip Navi and the number of Bell Navi are added during a specific section, when the normal ART and the special state are compared, the amount of the Bell Navi number added is reduced compared to the normal ART during the special state. On the other hand, the additional amount of Lip Navi is increased. That is, during a special state in which the consumption speed of the number of bell navigation is suppressed, the number of Lip navigation is given priority over the number of bell navigation.

(Realization method of special state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, a method for realizing a special state capable of suppressing the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, the roles “F_3 option bell A_1st”, “F_3 option bell A_2nd”, “F_3 option bell A_3rd”, and the roles “F_3 option bell B_12t” “F_3 option bell B_2nd” “F_3 option” Bell B — 3rd ”. In the following, the roles “F_3 selection bell A_1st” to “F_3 selection bell A_3rd” are simply referred to as roles “F_3 selection bell A”, and the roles “F_3 selection bell B_1st” to “F_3 selection bell B_3rd” are simply referred to as roles “F_3”. Sometimes referred to as “Choose B”.

  As shown in FIG. 140 (A), when the bonus is not won, that is, in the state where the bonus winning combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination, either of the combination “F_3 selection bell A” or combination “F_3 selection bell B”. Also, the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different. Specifically, for both the combination “F_3 selection bell A” and the combination “F_3 selection bell B”, the combination of bell symbols is displayed when the pressing order is correct, nine medals are paid out, and the pressing order is out of order. When the answer is correct, a combination of bell spilled symbols is displayed, and fewer than nine (or zero) medals are paid out.

  Therefore, when the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are determined as the internal winning combination of the combination “F_3 selection bell A” and the combination “F_3 selection bell B” during the specific section at the time of bonus non-winning, Bell navigation (notification of pressing order of correct answers) is performed as many times as the number of bell navigations. In other words, during the specific section when the bonus is not won, the number of bell navigations will be reduced even if either of the combination “F_3 selection bell A” or “F_3 selection bell B” is determined as the internal winning combination. Become.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), during the flag, that is, in a state where the bonus winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, the winning combination “F_3 selection bell B” is displayed according to the pressing order. Although the combination of symbols is different, the combination “F_3 selection bell A” has the same symbol combination displayed regardless of the pressing order. Specifically, for the combination “F_3 selection bell B”, the combination of bell symbols is displayed when the correct answer is pressed, nine medals are paid out, and when the incorrect answer is the pressing order, the combination of the bell spilled symbols is displayed. Is displayed, and fewer than nine medals (or zero) are paid out. On the other hand, for the combination “F_3 selection bell A”, a combination of bell symbols is displayed and nine medals are paid out regardless of the pressing order.

  For this reason, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, when the combination “F_3 selection bell A” is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section between the flags, When the combination “F_3 selection bell B” is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section, bell navigation (notification of the correct push order) is performed for the number of times of the bell navigation. In other words, during a specific section between the flags, even if the combination “F_3 selection bell A” is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of bell navigations is not reduced, and the combination “F_3 selection bell B” is determined as an internal winning combination. The number of bell navigators will be reduced.

  In this way, it is possible to realize a special state that can suppress the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations by distinguishing between the normal ART and the special state depending on whether or not the bonus-related combination is carried over as an internal winning combination can do. In other words, in the case of the above-described example, a special state that can suppress the consumption speed of the number of times of the bell navigation is realized by setting the specific section when the bonus is not won as a normal ART and the specific section between the flags as a special state. can do.

(Example of addition)
Next, with reference to FIG. 141, a method of adding the number of Lip Navi times and the number of Bell Navi times will be described. The extra lottery table in FIG. 141 (A) defines lottery value information with respect to the additional amount of the Bell navigation number and the Lip Navi number for each internal winning combination and gaming state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 refers to the extra lottery table shown in FIG. In addition, FIG. 141 (B) is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the expectation degree of the addition according to the addition lottery table of FIG. 141 (A).

Referring to FIGS. 141A and 141B, it can be seen that the normal ART and the special state have different expected expectations for the number of Bell Navi times and the expected number of Lip Navi times. Specifically, in the addition based on the cactus and the weak cherry, the number of bell navigations is more likely to be added during normal ART, while the number of lip navigations is more likely to be added during a special state. More specifically, during the special state, the amount of increase in the number of bell navigations is reduced compared to that during normal ART, and on the contrary, the amount of increase in the number of lip navigation is increased.
In the example shown in FIG. 141, the addition expectation based on the strong cherry has the same expectation for addition during the normal ART and during the special state.

  In such a pachislot machine 1 of Game Example 2, Lip Navi and Bell Navi are individually managed during a specific section, Lip Navi is performed for the number of Lip Navi, and Bell Navigation is performed for the number of Bell Navi. As a result, even if one of the roles that are subject to Lip Navi or Bell Navi is concentrated and determined as an internal winning combination during a specific section, only one of the navigation times is consumed. In addition, since the other navigation frequency is not consumed, the consumption speed of the navigation frequency can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the gaming example 2, the normal ART and the special state are provided as the specific section, and the expectation of the addition is made different according to the current state. Specifically, during normal ART where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigation is high, the number of times of bell navigation is easily added, and conversely, during a special state where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigation is suppressed, the amount of addition of the number of bell navigation is reduced. Increase the amount of Lip Navi. Thereby, the consumption speed of the frequency | count of a navigation can be relieve | moderated and, as a result, the interest in a specific area is not spoiled.

<CZ selection method with different end periods>
Next, with reference to FIG. 142, a method for selecting CZs having different end periods will be described. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the transition from the specific section to the normal section is performed without satisfying the end condition (limit processing). In addition, since the specific section includes CZ in addition to the ART gaming state, when limit processing is performed, the ART gaming state continuously performed from CZ has a gaming period corresponding to the number of games that CZ has continued. It will be shorter. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can select a CZ to be executed from CZs having different end periods, and at the time of selection, it is easy to select a CZ that is considered preferable for the player. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of CZs having different end periods. Specifically, the CZ “short-term game” shown in FIG. 142 (A) is a CZ with an end period of 0 games, and the CZ “game” shown in FIG. 142 (B) is a CZ with an end period of 1 game. Yes, CZ “stable” shown in FIG. 142 (C) is a CZ of 10 games in the end period, and CZ “Random” shown in FIG. 142 (D) is a CZ of 10 games in the end period. The CZ “long term game” shown in (E) is a CZ with an end period of 30 games. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the duration of the CZ exceeds the end period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 ends the CZ and shifts the gaming state to the normal section. On the other hand, if the main control board 71 wins the lottery to shift to the ART gaming state before the CZ duration exceeds the termination period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 ends the CZ and changes the gaming state to the ART gaming state. Transition.

  Here, a method of selecting CZ will be described. 142A to 142E are selection screens for selecting CZ. This selection screen is provided with a selection cursor for selecting CZ. In FIG. 142, the selection cursor indicates CZ “short term” in FIG. 142A, CZ “game” in FIG. 142B, and CZ “stable” in FIG. 142C. 142 (D) indicates CZ “wave disturbance”, and FIG. 142 (E) indicates CZ “long-term battle”. For example, the selection cursor switches the CZ to be selected as time passes.

  In the selection screen, a player's operation on a chance button (not shown) is accepted, and the main control board 71 executes the operation by assuming that the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor at the timing when the chance button is operated. The selection of CZ is accepted, and then the selected CZ is started. That is, when the chance button is operated at the timing of FIG. 142 (A), the main control board 71 accepts the selection from the player as selecting CZ “short-term battle”, and then CZ “short-term battle”. Start “Battle”. Note that the method for specifying the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor on the main control board 71 is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 also counts the interval for switching the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor so that the main control board 71 The CZ pointed to by the selection cursor on the substrate 71 can be specified.

  In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the selection cursor points to the CZ “short-term battle” having the shortest end period in the initial state, and thereafter points to other CZs in the shortest end period as time passes. . For example, the selection cursor indicates CZ in the order of CZ “short-term game”, CZ “game”, CZ “stability”, CZ “wave disturbance”, and CZ “long-term game” as time passes.

  Here, when the limit processing is performed as described above, the game period in the ART gaming state is shortened by the number of times that the CZ has been continued, so the CZ “short-term battle” with the shortest end period is a game It is considered preferable for the person. In the pachislot machine 1, the CZ is selected based on the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor, but by indicating the CZ “short-term battle” as the initial state of the selection cursor, A selection method can be realized.

  Also, some players may advance the game without making any selection on the selection screen. For example, when the game is started by operating the start lever 6 without accepting an operation for the chance button on the selection screen (that is, when a predetermined operation is performed), the selection by the player is not performed. become. When the game is started without accepting the selection of CZ in this way, the main control board 71 starts CZ having the shortest end period among a plurality of CZs having different end periods. That is, when the player starts the game without selecting the CZ, the main control board 71 performs the CZ “short-term battle” with the shortest end period regardless of the position of the selection cursor at the timing when the game is started. Automatically select, then start CZ “short term”. As a result, it is possible to realize a CZ selection method that is kind to the player.

  Such a selection screen is displayed, for example, at the start of CZ, in other words, with the right to transition to CZ. That is, the main control board 71 grants the right to transition to the CZ for performing the transfer lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART gaming state, and in the state where the right to transition to the CZ is granted, The selection of one CZ is accepted.

<Reel control at the start of a specific section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 143 to FIG. 145, the reel control when starting the specific section will be described. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when starting a specific section, reel stop control is performed so that a combination of specific symbols such as “7-7-7” (hereinafter referred to as “AT start start”) can be displayed. I do. Specifically, when the main control board 71 wins the lottery for shifting to the specific section, the main control board 71 grants the right to shift to the specific section. The right to shift to the specific section is carried over until the gaming state shifts to the specific section, and is cleared (stripped) when the gaming state shifts to the specific section. That is, the main control board 71 transitions the gaming state to the specific section and satisfies the transition right when the transition condition to the specific section is satisfied (for example, the AT start appearance is displayed) while the transition right is given. clear. Then, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in different modes depending on whether the transfer right is granted or not (ie, the reel stop control). Different).

  FIG. 143 and FIG. 144 are diagrams showing an example of the rotating cylinder stop initial setting table used for the reel stop control, and are used in step S9 and step S12 of FIG. 75 described above. This spinning cylinder stop initial setting table is referred to when determining the reel stop control information for stopping the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The rotation stop initial setting table is used when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in association with the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination, the current gaming state, and the presence / absence of the right to move to the specific section. Specifies reel stop control information. The main control board 71 refers to the spinning stop initial setting table, acquires reel stop control information corresponding to the internal winning combination, gaming state, and the presence / absence of the transfer right, and uses the reel stop control information to reel 3L, Stop 3C, 3R.

  The reel stop control information associated with the winning combination, the gaming state and the presence / absence of the transfer right includes the rotation stop number, determination data for each pressing order (drawing priority table number, drawing priority selection table number), and table number selection. Value (change status, stop table data), first cylinder first stop table change data, first cylinder stop data table selection data (left first stop table), first cylinder first stop This is information including a table change initial data selection value (change status, table number) and a search order data table number.

  The “determination data by pressing order” includes a pull-in priority table number and a pull-in priority selection table number. The “pull-in priority table number” is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table (not shown). Further, the “pull-in priority order selection table number” is a number for selecting a pull-in priority order selection table (not shown).

  “Table number selection data” is a value that is referred to when all reels are stopped when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L, and includes a change status and stop table data.

  The “stop table number” is a number for selecting a stop table to be referred to when all reels are stopped when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L. The “change status” is data for changing the line status for each game representing the line referred to in the stop table selected based on the stop table data, and is the initial line status in the present embodiment. The state is A line. Here, when the change status is “0”, the line status is not changed. When the change status is “2”, if the line status is A line, the line status is changed to B line.

  1st cylinder first stop table change data, 1st cylinder stop data table selection data, and 1st cylinder 1st stop table change initial data selection value are as follows. That is, the data is referred to when the left reel is 3L.

  The “first-cylinder first stop table change data” indicates whether the same stop table after the first first stop is used after the second stop when the first stop reel is the left reel 3L. It is data which shows. If there is a value (other than 0) in the first cylinder first stop table change data, the change data search table is selected based on the planned stop position, and the data is searched for the second and subsequent stops. Select the stop table.

  “First cylinder stop data table selection data” is a number for selecting a first cylinder stop data table (not shown) to be referred to when stopping the first cylinder.

  The “first cylinder first stop table change initial data selection value” is data to be referred to when stopping the second and third cylinders, and includes a table number and a line status. The “table number” is a number for selecting a stop data table after the first cylinder first stop that is referred to when stopping the second and third stop reels. The “change status” is data for changing the line status for each game representing the line referred to in the stop data table after the first cylinder first stop selected based on the table number. When the change status is “0”, the line status is not changed. When the change status is “2”, if the line status is A line, the line status is changed to B line. If the line status is A line or B line, it is changed to C line.

  “Search order table number” is a number for selecting a search order table (not shown) for determining the number of sliding symbols.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 (A) and 143 (B), in the pachi-slot machine 1, different reel stop control information is used depending on whether or not the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. Specifically, in the turning stop initial setting table of FIG. 143 that is referred to when the winning combination is non-winning, the turning stop number “17” for the winning combination “F_3 selection bell_1st”. The reel stop control information is defined, and in the turning stop initial setting table of FIG. 143 that is referred to when the combination related to the bonus is won, for the same combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” The reel stop control information of the reel stop number “31” is defined. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, by changing the reel stop control information according to the presence / absence of the winning combination, the reel stop control is different when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Can be made.

  Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 143 (A) and 144 (C), in the pachislot machine 1, different reel stop control information is used depending on whether or not the right to transfer is granted. Specifically, in the turning stop initial setting table of FIG. 143 that is referred to when the right to transfer is not granted, the turning stop number “17” is assigned to the role “F_3 selection bell_1st”. In the turning stop initial setting table of FIG. 144 (C) that is referred to when reel stop control information is defined and a transfer right is given, the turning turn for the same combination “F_3 selection bell_1st”. The reel stop control information of the stop number “41” is defined. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, by changing the reel stop control information according to the presence / absence of the transfer right, it is possible to change the reel stop control when winning the transfer lottery to the specific section.

  Next, FIG. 145 shows the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol when the reel stop control is performed using the turning stop initial setting table shown in FIGS. 143 and 144. As shown in FIG. 145, in the normal section where the right to shift to the specific section is not granted, if the internal winning combination is “out of”, the combination of symbols of “out” is displayed, and the internal winning combination is displayed. Are "F_3 option bell_1st" to "F_3 option bell_3rd", the combination of bell symbols is displayed when the correct answer is given in the pressing order, and if the answer is incorrect, The combination is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the standby section of the specific section to which the right to transition to the specific section is granted, when the internal winning combination is “out”, the combination of symbols at the start of AT starts when the push operation is accurate Is displayed, and when the eye-pushing operation is inaccurate, a combination of symbols of “out” is displayed. In addition, when the internal winning combination is “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd”, if the eye pressing operation is accurate, a combination of symbols of the AT start appearance is displayed, and the eye pressing operation is not performed. If it is accurate, a combination of bells, bell spilled eyes, or the first symbol is displayed.

  In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, in order to vary the reel stop control according to the presence or absence of the right to shift to the specific section, the combination of symbols of the AT start appearance is determined according to the player's stop operation at the start of the specific section. Reel rotation can be stopped to display.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the reel stop control may be varied according to the type of the specific section of the transfer destination. In other words, the pachislot machine 1 has a plurality of specific sections with different degrees of advantage for the player, and the main control board 71 has a right to transfer to one specific section and the one specific section The reel stop control may be made different when the right to shift to another specific section different from the above is granted. Specifically, when the right to transition to one specific section is granted and when the right to transition to another specific section is granted, when the same combination is determined as an internal winning combination What is necessary is just to provide a rotation stop initial setting table so that the reel stop control information used may differ.

As a result, the reel stop control can be made different according to the type of the specific section of the transfer destination.For example, when shifting to a specific section that is more advantageous for the player and when shifting to another specific section Thus, the combination of symbols displayed at the start of the specific section can be varied. From the player's point of view, since the degree of advantage of the subsequent game differs depending on the combination of symbols displayed at the start of the specific section, the player will have a strong interest in the stop operation at the start of the specific section. The fun of gaming is improved.
In the pachislot machine 1, although the winning probability of the internal winning combination varies depending on the bonus state and the RT gaming state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination does not vary depending on the type of the specific section.

  Here, in recent years, there is also known a pachislot machine in which another reel (hereinafter referred to as “second main reel”) is provided in addition to a reel (hereinafter referred to as “first main reel”) controlled according to the result of the internal lottery. ing. For example, a pachislot machine having three reels, the above-described reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, as the first main reel, and a reel provided in a single row on the right side of the reel 3R is known as the second main reel. . The reel whose stop control varies depending on the result of the transfer lottery may be the first main reel or the second main reel.

  In the case where the stop control of the second main reel is changed according to the result of the transfer lottery, the main control board 71, in the game in which the transfer lottery to the specific section is performed, according to the operation of the start lever 6, the first main reel The rotation of the second main reel is started before the rotation of the second main reel is started. When the stop button 7R is operated, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the second main reel in accordance with the result of lottery transfer to the specific section. Specifically, when winning a lottery for shifting to a specific section, the rotation of the second main reel is stopped so that symbols that are not displayed when not winning can be displayed. In this way, when the rotation of the second main reel is stopped according to the result of the lottery transition to the specific section, the main control board 71 thereafter starts the rotation of the first main reel.

In the above example, the second main reel is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 7R. However, in addition to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R, a stop button dedicated to the second main reel may be provided. Good. Further, a plurality of second main reels may be provided instead of one.
Thus, by separating the stop operation for the transition lottery result of the specific section and the stop operation for the internal lottery result, both can be enjoyed and the player can easily understand the game characteristics.

<Control when changing settings>
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, control at the time of setting change will be described. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the control contents when the setting is changed and when the main RAM 33 is cleared. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a new set value is set (when the setting is changed), the main control board 71 performs a role related to a bonus carried over as an internal winning combination even during the flag period. Is maintained without clearing, the specific section is maintained even during the specific section, and the result of the transition lottery is maintained even during the standby section winning the transition lottery of the specific section. That is, in the pachislot machine 1, even if a new set value is set during the flag, during the specific section, or during the standby section, the gaming state before the new set value is set is maintained as it is. .
Note that the case where a new setting value is set (when the setting is changed) is not limited to a case where the setting value is changed from a setting 1 to a setting 6 or a different setting value. The case of resetting the value (so-called re-setting to the same setting) is also included.

  On the other hand, when the main RAM 33 is cleared (when the RAM is cleared), the main control board 71 clears all gaming states. That is, the main control board 71 clears the combination related to the bonus carried over when the RAM is cleared during the flag, and ends the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section. When the game state is shifted to the normal section and the RAM is cleared during the standby section, the result of the transition lottery is cleared.

  As described above, the pachislot machine 1 clears the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section, but maintains the specific section when the setting is changed during the specific section. From the amusement store side, it is possible to select whether to maintain / clear the specific section while changing the set value, so that various options can be given to the amusement store side regarding the operation of the pachislot machine.

  Note that the setting change operation can be performed, for example, via the setting key type switch 430 (see FIG. 116), and the RAM clear operation, for example, can be performed via the reset switch 442 (see FIG. 116). It can be carried out.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. Next, various functions of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 will be described.

  The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the start operation detecting means, the symbol changing means, the internal winning combination determining means (the combination determining means), and the stop in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. It functions as operation detection means, reel stop control means (stop control means), winning determination means, game medium provision means (game value provision means), and profit provision means.

  The main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the combination “F_probability chip” and “F_1 probabilities” are determined as an internal winning combination during normal ART, and the result of this flag conversion lottery and other internal winning combinations are determined. When a CT lottery based on a winning combination is won, a CT for extending the duration of the normal ART is started.

In addition, the main control board 71 adds (extends) the number of ART games indicating the duration of the normal ART according to the internal winning combination during CT. Specifically, the number of normal ART ART games is increased by a predetermined amount according to the role “cactus”, “weak cherry”, and “strong cherry”, and the number of normal ART ART games is specified by a specific amount according to the role “Triple Chililip” Add it.
At this time, the main control board 71, when the number of times the number of ART games based on the role “triple chip” is increased to 9 times or more exceeding 8 times corresponding to one set of CT, Functions as an additional control means to increase the additional amount

  Further, the main control board 71 counts the number of games in which the number of ART games is not added during the CT using the CT game number counter, and when the CT game number counter counts 8, the CT ends. At this time, the main control board 71 resets the game 8 times per set when the winning combination “three consecutive chips” is won (that is, wins the flag conversion lottery) (the value of the CT game counter is set to the initial value). Return), and functions as counting means and extra game ending means.

  Further, when the bonus-related combination (F_BB1, 2) is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the inter-flag state, and until the bonus is activated in the inter-flag state (to the bonus In order to carry the bonus-related role as an internal winning combination (until the winning combination wins) (when a specific symbol combination is not derived in a unit game where the derivation of a specific symbol combination is allowed, a specific symbol combination is derived) Function as a bonus carry-over means (carry-over means). Further, the main control board 71 operates the bonus when a bonus combination is won in the inter-flag state, and shifts the gaming state to the bonus state (when a specific symbol combination is derived as a display result of stop control). Functions as a bonus starting means). Further, the main control board 71 functions as a bonus ending means because the bonus state is ended when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds a predetermined number.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, the main control board 71 is used as a bonus when a bonus combination and a predetermined combination (displacement, F_special 1 to 3) are determined as internal winning combinations. If the combination of symbols (C_BB1, 2) according to the winning combination is controlled to be displayed and if the winning combination and the winning combination other than the predetermined winning combination are determined as internal winning combinations, The stop control is performed so that the combination of symbols cannot be displayed.
Then, the main control board 71 controls the instruction monitor of the information display unit 14 so that the combination relating to the bonus can be won when the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination relating to the bonus can be displayed during the inter-flag state. Display of “10” and “11” (bonus instruction information) uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation is notified, and “10” and “11” are displayed when it is impossible to display a combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus. Since no notification is given, the instruction monitor of the main control board 71 and the information display 14 functions as an instruction information notification means.

  At this time, the main control board 71 notifies “10” and “11” via the instruction monitor only after the bonus notification. Specifically, when the main control board 71 determines that the bonus-related role is an internal winning combination without carrying over the bonus-related role, the main control board 71 counts the number of subsequent games, and the count result reaches a predetermined number. When the bonus winning combination and the predetermined winning combination (outside, F_special 1 to 3) are determined as the internal winning combination, “10” and “11” are notified via the instruction monitor. It functions as a counting means for counting the number of unit games since the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination.

Further, the sub control board 72 manages the game history based on various command data received from the main control board 71, and accepts the registration of the player who performs the game when receiving the registration operation from the player. It functions as a means and a registration receiving means.
Here, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention, a display unit 100 that performs an effect according to the progress of the game, and a plurality of display units 100 including a top screen 211 and game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are provided. The first sub display device 201 for displaying the display screen and the touch sensor 201a provided on the display unit of the first sub display device 201. The sub control board 72 includes the display unit 100 and the first sub display device. 201 is controlled. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 controls the first sub display device 201 to display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 when registering the player, and registers the player. If not received, the sub-control board 72 functions as control means so that the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 cannot be displayed on the first sub-display device 201.

In addition, the main control board 71 functions as a privilege granting means because it grants various privileges according to the result of the game. Specifically, the main control board 71 gives a privilege according to the combination of symbols displayed along the active line, and in the game in which the combination “F_3 choice bell_1st” is determined as the internal winning combination, When the symbol combination “is displayed, nine medals are awarded, and when the symbol combination“ bell spill ”is displayed, zero medals are awarded. In addition, the main control board 71 is the same as the operation of the re-game when the combination of the symbols “triple chilli lip” or “replay” is displayed in the game in which the role “F_definite lip” is determined as the internal winning combination. Grant the benefits.
Moreover, the main control board 71 gives a privilege not based on the combination of symbols displayed along the active line but also based on the result of the flag conversion lottery. For example, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, and gives a privilege such as winning a CT lottery when winning the flag conversion lottery.

Further, since the sub control board 72 executes an effect according to the mode of the stop operation via the display unit 100, the sub control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as an effect executing means.
Here, the main control board 71 uniquely indicates a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player via the instruction monitor when the privilege to be given differs depending on the combination of symbols displayed along the active line. When the privilege to be given by the combination of symbols displayed along the active line is the same, the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not notified. On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 executes an effect indicating the order of the stop operation regardless of whether the privilege to be given is the same or different depending on the displayed symbol combination.

Further, the main control board 71 functions as an advantageous state lottery means for performing CT lottery as to whether or not to start CT, and when a CT lottery is won, a predetermined number of precursor games are performed after winning. Since CT starts after it is broken, it also functions as an advantageous state starting means.
The sub-control board 72 functions as a notification lottery means in order to perform flag conversion lottery on the sub side when the winning combination “F_accurate ripple” and “F_1 accurate ripple” are determined as internal winning combinations during the CT precursor. To do.

  Further, when the MB is determined as an internal winning combination, the main control board 71 functions as a predetermined combination carry-over means because the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination until it is determined that the MB has won.

In addition, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery as a conversion lottery means when the combination “push order bell” is determined as an internal winning combination among MB flags in which MB is carried over as an internal winning combination. Also works.
When the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 win the flag conversion lottery, the push order in which a combination of symbols of “cactus” is displayed for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 is displayed. When the flag conversion lottery is not won, the pressing order in which the combination of symbols of “bell” is displayed is notified for each winning combination through the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Therefore, the main control board 71, the sub control board 72, the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 function as a notification unit.

  In addition, the main control board 71 starts normal ART when the ART lottery is won, ends normal ART when the duration of the normal ART ends, and when MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during normal ART, To start, it functions as a first advantageous state control means and a second control means. During the CT, since the duration of the normal ART is not digested, the main control board 71 interrupts the normal ART and starts CT when the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the normal ART. .

  Further, the main control board 71 counts the number of differences during CT, and ends CT when the number of differences reaches the end number. Here, when the combination “F_push order bell” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery, and when the flag conversion lottery is won, On the other hand, “6” is added, and “6” is added to the end number of sheets, and the duration of CT is maintained. On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, “6” is added to the difference number to be counted, and the duration of CT is digested. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as counting means, second advantageous state ending means, and conversion lottery means.

  The main control board 71 determines the value of the CT meter that defines the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery when the winning combinations “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations during CT. When the flag conversion lottery is updated to a value that is easier to win the flag conversion lottery than the currently set CT meter value, the flag conversion is more than the currently set CT meter value. In order to update to a value that is difficult to win a lottery, it functions as a lottery stage setting means (first lottery stage setting means).

  In addition, the main control board 71 performs flag conversion lottery based on the value of the CT meter when winning the “F_push order bell” during the MB flag (CT) in the ART gaming state, Between the flags (normal ART), the first conversion lottery means and the second conversion lottery means for performing flag conversion lottery based on the ART level and the lottery state when the winning combination "F_Single Chile Lip 1" to "F_3 Series Chile Lip 4" is won. Function as.

And based on the results of these flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 gives a privilege, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pushing order via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. The main control board 71 functions as a privilege grant unit, and the main control board 71, the sub control board 72, the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 function as a notification unit.
In addition, the main control board 71 gives a privilege to maintain (that is, extend the continuation period) without digesting the continuation period of CT when winning the flag conversion lottery during CT ("cactus"). When a flag conversion lottery during normal ART is won (“Chilli rip”), a privilege of adding the number of ART games is given.

  In addition, the main control board 71 determines that the MB is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal ART during the MB non-flag, and after that, if the MB game is not won and a predetermined number of predictive games are played, the normal ART additional chance zone In order to start CT which is, it functions as an additional gaming state starting means.

  In addition, when the “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations during the CT, the main control board 71 extends the duration of the normal ART and plays the “ When the flag conversion lottery at the time of “push order bell” is won, the duration of CT is extended, so that it functions as first addition control means and second addition control means.

The main control board 71 performs flag conversion lottery when the winning combinations “F_single tip 1” to “F_3 consecutive tip 4” are determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART during the non-MB flag period. It functions as a first notification lottery means for determining whether or not to perform notification for displaying the symbol combination of “Chilelip” based on the result of the conversion lottery.
On the other hand, during the CT precursor, when the roles “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 Series Chile Lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations, it is determined whether or not the sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order. The sub control board 72 functions as a second notification lottery unit.

Further, the main control board 71 starts CT when a predetermined number of precursor games are played during the MB flag (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and during the period during this CT, when the winning “push order bell” is won In order to perform flag conversion lottery, it functions as lottery state starting means.
The main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 display the symbol combination of “Bell” when winning the “push order bell” during the sign game between MB flags (until a predetermined condition is met). The necessary pushing order is notified via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100, and during CT (lottery state) between MB flags, the “bell” or “bell” or The main control board 71, the sub-control board 72, the instruction monitor and display unit 100 are informed in order to notify the push order necessary for displaying the combination of symbols of “cactus” via the instruction monitor and display unit 100. Functions as a means.

  The display unit 100 includes an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light, a screen device C that displays an image according to the effect by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, and irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. A screen device that displays an image according to the effect by irradiation of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1, and a front screen drive mechanism E2 and a reel screen drive mechanism F2. Therefore, the irradiation light device B functions as an irradiation light device that irradiates irradiation light, and the screen device C functions as a movable screen that causes an image corresponding to the effect to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device. Further, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 function as a drive device that drives the movable screen so that the position where the movable screen is arranged can be adjusted.

The main control board 71 includes a first main control board 71a and a second main control board 71b, and performs an internal lottery process for determining an internal winning combination in the first main control board 71a. The main control board 71 and the first main control board 71a are respectively a main control unit, a first main control unit, and a second main control in order to perform a lottery on whether or not to shift the gaming state to a specific section on the control board 71b. It functions as a part.
The second main control board 71b performs the transfer lottery so as to win with the same probability regardless of the setting value when the unquestioned setting is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the main control board 71 is set in accordance with the operation using the key type switch 430, the setting key type switch 430 and the main control board 71 function as setting means.

In addition, the main control board 71 performs a lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state. When the winning lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal section to the specific section. It functions as means, game state control means, and notification game start means. In addition, when the main control board 71 wins the transfer lottery, the main control board 71 notifies the winning information indicating that the transfer lottery has been won to an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer via the external concentration terminal board 73. 71 and the external concentration terminal board 73 function as output means.
The main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 use the instruction monitor and display unit 100 to notify the correct control push order, which is a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player during the specific section. 71, the sub control board 72, the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 function as a notification unit.

  In the pachislot machine 1, the instruction monitor 147 is provided with a status indicator 147b (AT lamp), and when the lottery for shifting to a specific section is won, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b to win the transition lottery. I can tell you what I did. The status indicator 147b has a plurality of lamps “a” to “i” that are lit, flashing, and extinguished. Based on the lighting, flashing, and extinguishing patterns of the plurality of lamps, the status indicator 147b shifts to a specific section. In order to report that the lottery has been won, the main control board 71 and the status indicator 147b function as notification means.

In addition, the main control board 71 displays the combination of replay symbols in accordance with the correct pressing order when the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” are determined as the internal winning combinations during the high lip state. The main control board 71 maintains the high lip state and the game state is shifted from the high lip state to the low lip state when the combination of falling replays is displayed in accordance with the incorrect push order. It functions as a state control means.
Then, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 use the instruction monitor and display unit 100, and when the combination “F_3 selection bell A” is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section, the medal is given by the number of times of the bell navigation. When notification (bell navigation) for increasing is performed, and “F_maintenance lip_123” to “F_maintenance lip_321” are determined as internal winning combinations during a specific section, the RT gaming state is maintained for the high lip state. The main control board 71, the sub control board 72, the instruction monitor, and the display unit 100 function as a notification unit in order to perform notification (rep navi).

  In addition, when the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the main control board 71 carries over the bonus winning combination as an internal winning combination until a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus winning combination is displayed. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a carryover unit and a predetermined combination carryover unit. At this time, the main control board 71 changes the stop control according to whether or not the bonus-related role has been carried over, and if the bonus-related role has not been carried over, Or, if the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes is controlled to be displayed and the combination relating to the bonus is carried over, only the combination of the symbols of the bell is controlled to be displayed when the winning combination “F_3 selection bell A” is won. The main control board 71 functions as reel stop control means.

  Further, the main control board 71 increases the number of times of the Bell navigation and the number of times of the Lip navigation, and reduces the amount of addition of the number of times of the Bell navigation when compared with the case where the bonus related role is carried over as an internal winning combination. The main control board 71 functions as first addition means and second addition means in order to increase the addition amount of the Lip navigating times.

Also, the main control board 71 starts the MB1 gaming state when a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to MB1 is displayed when all reels are stopped, and the combination of symbols according to the combination related to MB2 when all reels are stopped. When is displayed, since the MB2 gaming state is started, the main control board 71 functions as specific game starting means.
The main control board 71 may determine the role to be notified as an internal winning combination during the MB1 gaming state, while the internal winning combination is the target to be notified during the MB2 gaming state. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as an internal winning combination determining means.

  Further, if the specific section continues for a long period of time, the main control board 71 ends the specific section even if the end condition is not satisfied. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a notification game end means. At this time, the main control board 71 counts the duration of the specific section, in particular, counts the period of the MB1 gaming state performed during the specific section as the duration of the specific section, and the MB2 gaming state performed during the specific section Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a counting unit.

Further, when the main control board 71 wins the lottery for transition to the specific section, the main control board 71 grants the right to transition to the specific section, and when the start condition of the specific section is satisfied in a state where the transition right is granted, In order to clear and start a specific section, the main control board 71 functions as a right granting means and a notification game starting means.
At this time, since the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the reel in a different manner between when the transfer right is granted and when the transfer right is not given, the main control board 71 functions as a reel stop control means. To do.

Further, the main control board 71, during the ART gaming state, performs all pushing orders (“F_3 selection 1 combination_1st” to “F_3 selection 1 combination_3rd” and “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd”. )), And in the one-player ART game state, the push order of “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” is not notified of the push order. The main control board 71 functions as a first notification game control unit and a second notification game control unit in order to notify the correct push order of “F_3 selection one-piece combination_1st” to “F_3 selection one-piece combination_3rd”. .
Since the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b regardless of whether the gaming state is the ART gaming state or the single-player ART gaming state, the main control board 71 and the status indicator 147b are notified. Functions as a means.

Further, when the main control board 71 wins the lottery to shift to the short ART, the main control board 71 performs the short ART for the first period. When the main control board 71 wins the lottery to shift to the long ART, In order to perform ART, the main control board 71 functions as first notification game control means and second notification game control means.
At this time, the sub-control board 72 uses the display unit 100 to notify whether or not the lottery for shifting to the long ART has been won during the first period in which the durations of the short ART and the long ART overlap. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as effect execution means.

Further, when the main control board 71 wins the transition lottery, the main control board 71 starts the specific section at the start of the bonus state. Then, the main control board 71 determines the role to be notified as an internal winning combination during this bonus state with a higher probability than in a state other than the bonus state, so the main control board 71 starts the specific game. It functions as means, transition lottery means, notification game start means, and internal winning combination determination means.
Then, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 use the instruction monitor and display unit 100, and when the role to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section, the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player The main control board 71, the sub control board 72, the instruction monitor, and the display unit 100 function as notification means.

  Further, when the sub-control board 72 uses the display unit 100 to determine that the pushing order is an internal winning combination in addition to the combination related to the bonus during the flag, for example, the presentation of “White 7 Navi_123” is performed. For this purpose, the sub control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as an effect execution means.

The main control board 71 maintains the gaming state in the RT2 gaming state when the replay symbol combination is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, while the RT1 transition lip symbol combination is displayed in the gaming state. In order to shift the state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 functions as a gaming state control means.
In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the main control board 71 does not perform a notification for increasing medals during the RT2 gaming state, but only performs a notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high lip state. When performing AT and winning the transition lottery, the main control board 71 functions as a first notification state control unit and a second notification state control unit in order to perform a bell navigation AT that performs notification for increasing medals. At this time, since the main control board 71 performs lottery transfer to the Bernavi AT during the RT2 gaming state more frequently than during the RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 functions as a transition lottery means.

  In addition, the main control board 71 is provided with a predetermined counter in the main RAM 33, so that the number of games in all game states, the number of games in a game state advantageous to the player, the number of medals awarded in all game states, and the player In order to calculate the number of medals paid out in an advantageous gaming state and calculate a specific section ratio and an accessory ratio from these counting results, the main control board 71 includes a first counter, a second counter, It functions as a third counter, a fourth counter and calculation means.

The main control board 71 notifies the external device such as a data counter or hall computer of the fact via the external concentration terminal board 73 when the specific section ratio or the accessory ratio is equal to or higher than the predetermined ratio. The main control board 71 and the external concentration terminal board 73 function as notification means.
Further, since the main control board 71 displays the specific section ratio and the accessory ratio on the ratio display 422 provided in the housing 60, the main control board 71 and the ratio display 422 function as display means. .

  Further, when the specific section is managed by the number of games, the main control board 71 counts the number of continuations indicating the number of unit games since the start of the specific section. Function as. At this time, even if the counted number of continuations reaches a predetermined number, the main control board 71 is then informed for the guaranteed number of times if notification for the guaranteed number has not yet been performed. Until the specific section is continued, the main control board 71 functions as a notification game ending means.

  Further, if the main control board 71 wins the lottery to shift to the ART gaming state before reaching the end period of the CZ, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state, and the end period of the CZ without winning the transition lottery. If it exceeds, the main control board 71 functions as a game state control means in order to end CZ and shift the game state to the normal section. In addition, when the ART game state is continuously performed from CZ, the main control board 71 counts the number of advantageous sections that is the sum of the number of unit games in the CZ and the number of unit games in the ART game state, When the number of advantageous sections reaches the predetermined number (1500 times), the main control board 71 functions as counting means and notification game ending means to end the ART gaming state (limit processing) even before the end condition is satisfied. To do.

In addition, the main control board 71 performs lottery transfer to the CZ during the normal section, and when the transfer lottery is won, the right to transfer to the CZ is granted, and in the state where the transfer right is granted, a plurality of types The main control board 71 functions as a right granting unit and a selection receiving unit in order to receive selection of one CZ from among the CZs.
At this time, when one CZ is selected, the main control board 71 starts the selected one CZ, and when the game is started without selecting the CZ, the end period is set. In order to start the shortest CZ, the main control board 71 functions as lottery state starting means.

  In addition, when the setting change is performed during the specific section, the main control board 71 maintains the specific section after the setting change without ending the specific section, and performs a RAM clear operation (initialization) during the specific section. When the control operation is performed, the main control board 71 functions as game control means in order to end the specific section.

Further, the specific section is a gaming state in which the unit specific section of one set of 30 games is performed for the number of sets (that is, one or a plurality of sets), and the main control board 71 is allowed to execute the unit specific section of the next set. If it is, the unit specific section of the next set is started after the end of one set of unit specific sections. In addition, the main control board 71 restarts the specific section after the bonus state is ended when the bonus state is started during the specific section, and in particular, a predetermined condition (for example, when the bonus state in the specific section is started) If the number of remaining games in the set is less than a predetermined value), the unit identification of another set different from the unit identification section set that was executed when the bonus state was started at the end of the bonus state If the predetermined condition is not satisfied at the start of the bonus state in the specific section after restarting the section, the same unit specific section that was executed when the bonus state was started at the end of the bonus state In order to resume the unit specific section of the set, the main control board 71 functions as a gaming state control means.
In addition, the main control board 71 outputs a signal indicating that the transfer lottery has been won at the first time when the transfer lottery is won, and when the next set of unit specific intervals is started, a new unit specific interval is displayed. A signal indicating that it has been passed is output to the outside. In particular, after the bonus state ends, the main control board 71 outputs a signal indicating that a new unit specific section is passed when another unit specific section is resumed, while the bonus state starts. When resuming the unit specific section of the same set as the unit specific section being executed at the time, the main control board 71 functions as an output means because no signal is output to the outside.

[Appendix 1]
The pachislot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 1 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  A gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used in the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high replay winning probability until a bonus determined as an internal winning combination (carry-over) is won.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, several pachislot machines having an inter-flag RT as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until the bonus is won, the gameability is poor, and further games There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming between flags.

[Means for solving problems]

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , The display window 4), start operation detecting means for detecting start operation by the player (for example, start switch 6S, main control board 71), and rotation of the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the start variation detection means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detection means, the stop operation is performed when the internal winning combination is determined. A push order (for example, a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, cactus) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of For example, an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including F_push order bells 1 to 6), and corresponding to the plurality of reels. And a stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop Reel stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit) that stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing when the stop operation is detected by the operation detection means. 39, based on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variation of the symbols is stopped by the main control board 71) and the reel stop control means. The winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has been won, and the predetermined winning combination (for example, MB) by the internal winning combination determining means. Is determined as an internal winning combination, a predetermined combination carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) for carrying over the predetermined combination as an internal winning combination until the winning determination unit determines that the predetermined combination has been won. And the reel stop control means determines the pushing order as an internal winning combination in a game in which the predetermined winning combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination (for example, between MB non-flags). The symbol display means stops displaying the first symbol combination so that the first symbol combination can be displayed, while the second symbol combination cannot be displayed so that the symbol variation stops. When the pushing combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means, the symbols are displayed according to the order of the stop operation. The variation of the symbols is stopped so that the display unit can display the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until winning, so that it has a so-called flag-to-flag gaming state. Here, the pachislot machine performs the reel stop control according to the internal winning combination. Since the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination overlaps with the predetermined combination. Even if the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the pushing order is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop control between the flag and the non-flag, that is, a combination of symbols different between the flag and the non-flag while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and to make the games between the flags more diverse. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare role such as cherry, it becomes possible to win a rare role with a winning combination between flags. The appearance frequency of rare roles can be increased without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification means (for example, the information display 14, the display unit 100, the main control board 71, the sub-control board 72) for notifying the order of the stop operation, and the predetermined bonus carry-over means When a predetermined condition is fulfilled in a game in which a predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination (for example, a predetermined number of precursor games are completed), a cactus is displayed during a predetermined lottery (for example, F_push order bell wins) A lottery state starting means (for example, main control board 71) for starting a lottery state (for example, CT) for performing a flag conversion lottery for determining whether or not to perform, and the pushing order in the lottery state is determined as an internal winning combination. Conversion lottery means for performing the predetermined lottery, wherein the notifying means performs the predetermined combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Necessary for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means when the pushing order is determined as an internal symbol combination in a game carried over as an internal symbol combination (for example, a sign game of CT) The stop operation necessary for displaying the second symbol combination on the symbol display means when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is won in the lottery state. While notifying the order, when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is non-winning, notifying the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means. Features.

  According to such a gaming machine, a lottery state in which a predetermined lottery is performed between the flags is provided, and a stop operation for informing the state before the lottery state between the flags starts and the lottery state between the flags is performed. Make the content different. Specifically, before the lottery state starts, a notification for always displaying the first symbol combination is performed, and during the lottery state, the second symbol that is not displayed between non-flags when the lottery is won. Notification for displaying the combination is performed, and conversely, when the lottery is not won, notification for displaying the first symbol combination is performed. If the second symbol combination (rare combination) continues, the player knows that it is between the flags, so the game can be made by notifying the first symbol combination intentionally even between the flags. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to understand the current state. In addition, by controlling the notification content by a predetermined lottery, the frequency of the second symbol combination (rare combination) between the flags can be adjusted according to the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery. A period with predetermined game play can be provided, and the game play between flags can be diversified.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is won, or when the second symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means based on the notification of the notification means, It is further characterized by further comprising privilege granting means (for example, main control board 71) for granting (for example, a privilege to maintain the duration of CT).

  Since a notification for displaying the second symbol combination is performed when a predetermined lottery is won, according to such a gaming machine, a privilege is given by displaying the second symbol combination (rare role). Will be. As a result, not only the frequency of the second symbol combination (rare combination) but also the privilege to be given can be adjusted according to the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery, so that the gameability between the flags can be increased. Can be diversified.

[Appendix 2]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  A gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used in the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high replay winning probability until a bonus determined as an internal winning combination (carry-over) is won.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, several pachislot machines having an inter-flag RT as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until the bonus is won, the gameability is poor, and further games There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming between flags.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , The display window 4), start operation detecting means for detecting start operation by the player (for example, start switch 6S, main control board 71), and rotation of the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the start variation detection means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detection means, the stop operation is performed when the internal winning combination is determined. A first combination (for example, a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, cactus) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of , F_push order 1-6), and internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, corresponding to the plurality of reels. Stop operation detection means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation Based on the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the detecting means, the reel stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39) stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel. , Based on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variation of the symbols is stopped by the main control board 71) and the reel stop control means. The winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has been won, and the predetermined winning combination (for example, MB) is internally generated by the internal winning combination determining means. When the winning combination is determined, a predetermined combination carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries over the predetermined combination as an internal winning combination until the predetermined determination unit determines that the predetermined combination has won. When the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the carryover means, the specific state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the specific state (for example, CT), and the continuation of the specific state in the specific state Counting means (for example, main control board 71) for counting numerical information indicating the period (for example, the difference number in the CT), and when the count result of the counting means reaches a predetermined threshold, the specific state Specific state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) for ending the state, and when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific state, the cactus at the time of a predetermined lottery (for example, F_ push order bell winning) Conversion lottery means (for example, main control board 71) for performing a flag conversion lottery on whether or not to display and one of a plurality of lottery stages having different probabilities of winning the predetermined lottery performed by the conversion lottery means. Lottery stage setting means (for example, main control board 71) for setting the lottery stage (for example, CT meter), and notification means (for example, information display 14, display unit 100, main control board for informing the stop operation information) 71, a sub-control board 72), and the reel stop control means is a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means (for example, MB non-flag) ), When the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol display means can display the first symbol combination so that the first symbol combination can be displayed, while the second symbol combination cannot be displayed. When the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means. The symbol change is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means according to the order of the stop operation, and the counting means is the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means. When a lottery is won, a predetermined value is added to the numerical information counted by itself and a predetermined value is added to the predetermined threshold, and in the case of the predetermined non-winning of the conversion lottery means, A predetermined value is added to the numerical information counted by the person, and the lottery stage setting means performs the second combination (for example, F_single chip 1 to F_3 series chip 4) by the internal winning combination determination unit in the specific state. Is determined as an internal winning combination, the currently set lottery stage is updated to a lottery stage that is easier to win the predetermined lottery stage than the lottery stage, and the notification means includes the conversion lottery means. When the predetermined lottery is won, the symbol display means informs the order of the stop operation necessary to display the second symbol combination, while the conversion lottery means does not win the predetermined lottery. In this case, the order of stop operations necessary for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until winning, so that it has a so-called flag-to-flag gaming state. Here, the pachislot machine performs the reel stop control according to the internal winning combination. Since the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination overlaps with the predetermined combination. Even if the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop control between the flag and the non-flag, that is, a combination of symbols different between the flag and the non-flag while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and to make the games between the flags more diverse. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare role such as cherry, it becomes possible to win the rare role by winning the first role between the flags. The appearance frequency of rare roles can be increased without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is treated as a specific state for a predetermined period between the flags, and when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination during this specific state, a predetermined lottery is performed. The contents of the stop operation to be notified based on the lottery result are varied. Specifically, when a lottery is won, a notification is made to display a second symbol combination that is not displayed between non-flags. Conversely, when a lottery is not won, the first symbol combination is displayed. Notification for displaying. From the player's point of view, the second symbol combination can be displayed between the flags (specific state) by performing a stop operation in accordance with the notification.

  The specific state is terminated when the numerical information counted by the counting means reaches a threshold value. When the predetermined lottery result obtained when the first winning combination is won, the threshold value is increased, and when the numerical information is not won, the numerical information is increased. Since the predetermined lottery is also related to the above-described notification, when the second symbol combination is displayed (winning the predetermined lottery), the duration of the specific state is extended, When the symbol combination is displayed (not winning the predetermined lottery), the duration of the specific state is consumed.

  Thus, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the duration of the specific state is controlled according to the combination of symbols displayed (specifically, according to a predetermined lottery result) while changing the stop control between the flags. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game between flags (specific state).

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is controlled based on the lottery stage set by the lottery stage setting means, the second symbol combination (rare combination) in the specific state Can be adjusted according to the lottery probability (lottery stage) of a predetermined lottery. Also, the lottery stage is updated (promoted) to a lottery stage that is easy to win a predetermined lottery when the second combination is won during the specific state. As a result, the player has a strong interest in the winning combination in the specific state (that is, by winning a lot of the second combination, it becomes easy to win a predetermined lottery. The gameability between flags can be diversified.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in addition to a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and the specific state (for example, CT) as a state in which a game is performed, the information regarding the stop operation is notified to the normal state. If the player further has an advantageous state (eg, normal ART) that is advantageous to the player, and the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the specific state, the advantageous state is continued. It further includes an addition control means (for example, main control board 71) for extending the period.

  According to such a gaming machine, winning of the second combination in the specific state not only promotes the lottery stage but also extends the duration of the advantageous state. From the player's point of view, the player is more interested in the winning combination in a specific state, so that the gameability between flags can be diversified.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the number of specific symbols (for example, Chile symbols) displayed on the symbol display means when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control means is the second combination. Including a plurality of different second roles (for example, F_single dust lip 1-4 and F_2 continuous dust lip 1-4 and triple dust lip 1-4), and the additional control means The second role having a larger number of specific symbols displayed on the symbol display means extends the duration of the advantageous state longer.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the additional amount of the duration of the advantageous state differs depending on the number of specific symbols displayed at the time of winning the second combination, it is possible to diversify the gameability between the flags. .

[Appendix 3]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  A gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used in the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high replay winning probability until a bonus determined as an internal winning combination (carry-over) is won.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, several pachislot machines having an inter-flag RT as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until the bonus is won, the gameability is poor, and further games There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming between flags.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , The display window 4), start operation detecting means for detecting start operation by the player (for example, start switch 6S, main control board 71), and rotation of the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the start variation detection means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detection means, the stop operation is performed when the internal winning combination is determined. A first combination (for example, a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, cactus) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of , F_push order 1-6), and internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability, corresponding to the plurality of reels. Stop operation detection means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation Based on the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the detecting means, the reel stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39) stops the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel. , Based on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variation of the symbols is stopped by the main control board 71) and the reel stop control means. The winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has been won, and the predetermined winning combination (for example, MB) is internally generated by the internal winning combination determining means. When the winning combination is determined, a predetermined combination carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries over the predetermined combination as an internal winning combination until the predetermined determination unit determines that the predetermined combination has won. When the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the combination carryover means, the specific state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the specific state, and a numerical value indicating the duration of the specific state in the specific state Counting means (for example, main control board 71) for counting information (for example, the difference number in CT), and the specific state is terminated when the counting result of the counting means reaches a predetermined threshold value. When a specific state ending means (for example, main control board 71) and the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the specific state, whether to display a cactus when a predetermined lottery (for example, F_push order bell wins) Conversion lottery means (for example, main control board 71) for performing flag conversion lottery (no or not) and one lottery stage among a plurality of lottery stages having different probabilities for winning the predetermined lottery performed by the conversion lottery means ( For example, lottery stage setting means (for example, main control board 71) for setting a CT meter, and notification means (for example, information display 14, display unit 100, main control board 71, sub-control) for informing stop operation information. The reel stop control means in a game (for example, between MB non-flags) in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means. When the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol display means stops displaying the first symbol combination so that the first symbol combination can be displayed, while the second symbol combination cannot be displayed. And when the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination (for example, between MB flags) by the predetermined combination carry-over means In accordance with the order of operation, the symbol display means stops displaying the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination so that the change of the symbols can be displayed, and the counting means sets the predetermined lottery to the conversion lottery means. When winning, the predetermined value is added to the numerical information counted by itself, and the predetermined value is added to the predetermined threshold value. Is counting A predetermined value is added to the numerical information, and the notifying means is necessary for displaying the second symbol combination on the symbol display means when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is won. In the case of notifying the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means, the order of the stop operations necessary for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified. The conversion lottery means always wins the predetermined lottery during a predetermined number of unit games when the lottery stage setting means sets a specific lottery stage (for example, CT meter “MAX”), When the lottery stage setting means sets a predetermined lottery stage, the predetermined lottery is won with a predetermined probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until winning, so that it has a so-called flag-to-flag gaming state. Here, the pachislot machine performs the reel stop control according to the internal winning combination. Since the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination overlaps with the predetermined combination. Even if the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop control between the flag and the non-flag, that is, a combination of symbols different between the flag and the non-flag while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and to make the games between the flags more diverse. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare role such as cherry, it becomes possible to win the rare role by winning the first role between the flags. The appearance frequency of rare roles can be increased without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is treated as a specific state for a predetermined period between the flags, and when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination during this specific state, a predetermined lottery is performed. The contents of the stop operation to be notified based on the lottery result are varied. Specifically, when a lottery is won, a notification is made to display a second symbol combination that is not displayed between non-flags. Conversely, when a lottery is not won, the first symbol combination is displayed. Notification for displaying. From the player's point of view, the second symbol combination can be displayed between the flags (specific state) by performing a stop operation in accordance with the notification.

  The specific state is terminated when the numerical information counted by the counting means reaches a threshold value. When the predetermined lottery result obtained when the first winning combination is won, the threshold value is increased, and when the numerical information is not won, the numerical information is increased. Since the predetermined lottery is also related to the above-described notification, when the second symbol combination is displayed (winning the predetermined lottery), the duration of the specific state is extended, When the symbol combination is displayed (not winning the predetermined lottery), the duration of the specific state is consumed.

  Thus, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the duration of the specific state is controlled according to the combination of symbols displayed (specifically, according to a predetermined lottery result) while changing the stop control between the flags. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game between flags (specific state).

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is controlled based on the lottery stage set by the lottery stage setting means, the second symbol combination (rare combination) between the flags. Can be adjusted according to the lottery probability (lottery stage) of a predetermined lottery. In particular, if a specific lottery stage is set as the lottery stage, a predetermined lottery will always be won during a predetermined number of unit games, so it can be expected for the subsequent games, The fun of gaming is improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the lottery stage setting means, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the specific state, the lottery with the probability corresponding to the currently set lottery stage. The stage is updated to a lottery stage that is easier to win the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the promotion of the lottery stage based on the second role is performed with a probability according to the currently set lottery stage, there is a new game characteristic for the promotion of the lottery stage. And the fun of the game is improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the number of specific symbols (for example, Chile symbols) displayed on the symbol display means when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control means is the second combination. Including a plurality of different types of second roles (for example, F_single dust lip 1-4, F_2 double dust lip 1-4 and triple dust lip 1-4), and the lottery stage setting means, when the variation of the symbol is stopped The lottery stage currently set with a higher probability for the second role having a larger number of specific symbols displayed on the symbol display means is updated to a lottery stage that is easier to win the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage. Features.

  According to such a gaming machine, the probability that the lottery stage is promoted differs according to the number of specific symbols displayed at the time of winning the second combination, so that it is possible to diversify the gameability between the flags.

[Appendix 4]
The pachislot machine 1 of appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), in order to prevent a player from losing a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination for players. A gaming machine that notifies a player of advantageous information is known. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation was performed under the control of the sub (sub control) side, but in recent years because the presence or absence of navigation affects the player's profits (so-called “balls”), It is required to perform navigation on the main (main control) side that manages the profits of the player. Here, when navigating on the main side, navigation has a strong meaning of guaranteeing that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current gaming situation.

  However, in such a navigation, there is a problem that the manner of navigation becomes monotonous and the diversity of games is impaired.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing various navigations while appropriately performing navigation that affects profits on the main side.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, CT) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played, and a plurality of symbols are displayed. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the symbols displayed on the reels, and a main for controlling the progress of the game. A control unit (e.g., main control board 71) and a sub-control unit (e.g., sub-control board 72) that controls an effect related to the game, wherein the main control unit detects a start operation by the player Based on detection of the start operation by the detection means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) and the start operation detection means, the symbol variation means (for example, the symbol is varied by rotating the reel) Based on the detection of the start operation by the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means, the first symbol combination (for example, replay) according to the order of the stop operation when determined as the internal winning combination ) Or a combination of a plurality of symbols including a second symbol combination (for example, reach eye lip) is selected from a plurality of combinations including a push order (for example, F_reach eye lip A to D) that can be stopped and displayed. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) that determines an internal winning combination with probability, and a stop operation detecting means that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel. (For example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Accordingly, the reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel, and the reel stop control means When the change is stopped, based on a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, a winning determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won (for example, Main control board 71), advantageous lottery means (for example, main control board 71) for performing a first lottery (for example, CT lottery) on whether or not to start the advantageous state, and the advantageous state lottery means for performing the first lottery. When the first lottery is won, the advantageous state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts the advantageous state after a predetermined number of unit games have been won, and the pushing order is internally won. When the winning combination is determined, the conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that performs the second lottery (for example, flag conversion lottery) and the second lottery that is performed by the conversion lottery means will win special benefits. (For example, CT winning) a privilege granting means (for example, the main control board 71), and the reel stop control means, when the pushing order combination is determined as an internal winning combination, In accordance with the order, the symbol display means stops the change of the symbol so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed, and the sub-control unit executes an effect according to the mode of the stop operation. In the unit game of a predetermined number of times from winning the first lottery performed by the effect execution means (for example, the display unit 100, the sub control board 72) and the advantageous state lottery means until the advantageous state starts. Protagonist When determined as an internal winning combination, there is a notification lottery means (for example, a sub-control board 72) for performing a third lottery (for example, a navigation lottery in the presence of a CT sign), and the effect execution means of the sub-control unit When winning the second lottery performed by the conversion lottery unit of the main control unit or the third lottery performed by the notification lottery unit of the sub-control unit, the second symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display unit. An effect corresponding to the order of stop operations for display is executed.

  In such a gaming machine, when the second lottery performed on the main (main control unit) side is won, a special privilege is given, and the second design is performed by the effect execution means on the sub (sub control unit) side. Notification for displaying the combination is performed. Since the second symbol combination is displayed by performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification, from the viewpoint of the player, the second symbol combination means a symbol combination (for example, reach eyes) to which a special privilege is given. It will be. Therefore, in the case where no privilege is given even though the second symbol combination is displayed, the player feels strong dissatisfaction and impairs interest. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, on the main side, whether or not to grant a privilege is determined, and the second symbol combination is notified in accordance with this determination. It can be managed properly on the main side.

  By the way, in the pachislot machine, when advantageous control is performed for a player, the advantageous control is not performed immediately, but the advantageous control is performed after a predetermined number of games, for example, ART. In some cases, the ART may actually be started after several predictive games. During such a precursor game, since it has already been decided to give a privilege (profit) to the player, even if the second symbol combination is displayed and the privilege accompanying this display is not given , The player will not feel dissatisfied. In other words, since advantageous control is performed when several sign games are completed, the player feels that the second symbol combination displayed during the sign game has provided a privilege, There is no loss. On the other hand, increasing the opportunity to display the second symbol combination (for example, reach eyes) that is displayed when a special privilege is granted increases variations in how the symbol combinations are displayed and improves game playability. To do.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification lottery means on the sub (sub control unit) side is in the precursor game (a predetermined number of unit games from when the first lottery is won until the advantageous state starts). Three lotteries are performed, and the effect executing means notifies the second symbol combination based on the lottery result. Although this notification is not related to the provision of a privilege as described above, the second symbol combination displayed when a special privilege is granted can be displayed by performing a stop operation according to the notification. Improves. As described above, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification that affects the profit (privilege) is managed on the main side, while the notification that does not affect the profit is displayed on the sub side as a way of showing on the production. Certain notifications can be made.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the bonus granting unit wins the second lottery, the bonus granting unit grants a privilege of winning the first lottery performed by the advantageous state lottery unit.

  Since the advantageous state starts when the first lottery is won, according to such a gaming machine, when the second lottery is won (the second symbol combination is displayed), the advantageous state starts. Even in this case, the second symbol combination is notified along with the third lottery during the warning game until the advantageous state starts. From the player's point of view, the display of the second symbol combination is displayed because it is a precursor game (that is, it is displayed as a result of the third lottery), or shifts to the precursor game with this display. Since it is not known whether it has been displayed (that is, whether it was displayed as a result of the second lottery), it will have a strong interest in the flow of games so far, and the interest will be improved.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the privilege granting unit does not grant the special privilege when the third lottery performed by the notification lottery unit of the sub-control unit is won. When the second lottery performed by the conversion lottery means is won, the special privilege is given.

  According to such a gaming machine, a special privilege is granted only when the second lottery performed on the main side is won out of the second lottery and the third lottery, which are conditions for notifying the second symbol combination, When the third lottery performed on the sub side is won, no special privilege is given. As a result, notifications that affect profits (privileges) are managed on the main side, while notifications that do not affect profits can be reported on the sub-side in a variety of ways.

[Appendix 5]
The pachislot machine 1 of appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  A gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used in the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high replay winning probability until a bonus determined as an internal winning combination (carry-over) is won.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, several pachislot machines having an inter-flag RT as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until the bonus is won, the gameability is poor, and further games There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming between flags.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having an advantageous state (for example, ART) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state by notifying information on the normal state and the stop operation as a state in which the game is performed. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Is determined as an internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start variable detecting means. A first combination (for example, F_) that can stop and display a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, cactus) according to the order of the stop operation. A combination of a plurality of symbols including a third symbol combination (for example, replay) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, chili lip) according to the pressing order bells 1 to 6) and the order of the stop operation. Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including two roles (for example, F_single lillilip 1-4, F_2 consecutive chililip 1-4, F_3 consecutive chililip 1-4) For example, a main control board 71), stop operation detection means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, Inside Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped, and the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is displayed. Reel stop control means (for example, motor drive circuit 39, main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation and the symbol displayed on the symbol display means when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the combination, a winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has been won, and a predetermined combination (for example, the internal winning combination determining means) , MB) is determined as an internal winning combination until the predetermined winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. Predetermined carry-over means (for example, main control board 71) to carry over, notification means (for example, information display 14, display unit 100, main control board 71, sub-control board 72) for informing stop operation information, and the advantages If the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination when the predetermined combination is being carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carryover means, a first lottery (for example, F_push order bell winning) The first conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) for performing flag conversion lottery for determining whether or not to display the cactus at the time, and the predetermined combination as an internal winning combination by the advantageous state and the predetermined combination carryover means If the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination when it has not been carried over, the second lottery (for example, F_single chililip, F_2 consecutive chili lip, F_3 consecutive chili Second conversion lottery means (for example, main control board 71) for performing flag conversion lottery of whether or not to display the reel stop control means, the predetermined combination is made internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carryover means When the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game that has not been carried over as (for example, between MB non-flags), the variation of the symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means. On the other hand, in the game (for example, between MB flags) in which the second symbol combination cannot be displayed and the variation of symbols is stopped, and the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means. When one combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the variation of the symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means according to the order of the stop operation. In addition, when the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means, the symbol display means displays the symbol combination in accordance with the order of stop operations. In a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means while the variation of the pattern is stopped so that the third symbol combination or the fourth combination can be displayed. When determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol display means stops displaying the fourth symbol combination so that the fourth symbol combination can be displayed, and stops displaying the third symbol combination so that the symbol variation cannot be displayed. When the first lottery of the first conversion lottery means is won, the notifying means notifies the order of stop operations necessary to display the second symbol combination on the symbol display means. On the other hand, when the first lottery of the first conversion lottery means is non-winning, the symbol display means is notified of the order of stop operations necessary to display the first symbol combination, and When winning the second lottery of the second conversion lottery means, while notifying the order of the stop operation necessary for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the symbol display means, the second conversion lottery When the second lottery of the means is non-winning, the symbol display means is notified of the order of stop operations necessary to display the third symbol combination.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until winning, so that it has a so-called flag-to-flag gaming state. Here, the pachislot machine performs the reel stop control according to the internal winning combination. Since the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination overlaps with the predetermined combination. Even if the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. In addition, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags according to the order of the stop operation. Then, stop control is performed so that the fourth symbol combination is displayed. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop control between the flag and the non-flag, that is, a combination of symbols different between the flag and the non-flag while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and to make the games between the flags more diverse. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare role such as cherry, the rare role is won by winning the first role between the flags. As a result, the rare role always wins in the winning of the second role, and the appearance frequency of the rare role can be increased without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag, the first lottery is performed, and when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the non-flag period. The second lottery is performed, and the contents of the stop operation to be notified based on the results of these lotteries are made different. Specifically, when the first lottery is won, a notification is made to display the second symbol combination that is not displayed between the non-flags. On the other hand, when the first lottery is not won, Notification for displaying one symbol combination is performed. In addition, when the second lottery is won, a notification for displaying the fourth symbol combination is given, and conversely, when the second lottery is not won, the third symbol combination is displayed. Notification.

  In this way, between the flags, the combination of symbols to be notified is determined based on the first lottery, and between the non-flags, the combination of symbols to be notified based on the second lottery is determined, so that between the flags and between the non-flags In both cases, the combination of symbols to be displayed can be controlled, and the gameability between both flags and between non-flags can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first lottery means of the first conversion lottery means is won or when the second lottery means of the second conversion lottery means is won, a privilege (for example, the first lottery) A privilege granting means (for example, a main control board 71) for granting a privilege to maintain the CT difference difference number when winning, or a privilege grant to add the number of ART games when winning the second lottery. It is further provided with the feature.

  When winning the first lottery, the second symbol combination is displayed by following the notification, and when winning the second lottery, the fourth symbol combination is displayed by following the notification. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to control the appearance frequency of a combination of symbols (rare combination) to which a privilege is given between flags and between non-flags, and to improve gameability between both flags and between non-flags. be able to.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first conversion lottery means performs the first lottery so as to win with a probability according to a set first lottery stage (for example, a CT meter), When the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means, the currently set first lottery stage is changed from the first lottery stage. Is further provided with first lottery stage setting means (for example, main control board 71) for updating to the first lottery stage having a high probability of winning the first lottery.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag, the first lottery stage is updated (promoted) to the first lottery stage having a higher probability of winning the first lottery. ) As a result, the player has a strong interest in the winning combination between the flags, and the game characteristics between the flags can be diversified. In addition, when the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the flag, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed, so from the player's point of view, the third symbol combination is displayed. It is possible to grasp that the first lottery stage has been promoted, which is preferable.

[Appendix 6]
The pachislot machine 1 of appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  A gaming machine having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used in the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay is also widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 proposes a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes called an inter-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high replay winning probability until a bonus determined as an internal winning combination (carry-over) is won.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, several pachislot machines having an inter-flag RT as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far, but simply increasing the winning probability of replay until the bonus is won, the gameability is poor, and further games There is a demand for a gaming machine having the characteristics.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming between flags.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having an advantageous state (for example, ART) that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state by notifying information on the normal state and the stop operation as a state in which the game is performed. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Is determined as an internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start variable detecting means. A first combination (for example, F_) that can stop and display a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, cactus) according to the order of the stop operation. A combination of a plurality of symbols including a third symbol combination (for example, replay) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, chili lip) according to the pressing order bells 1 to 6) and the order of the stop operation. Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including two roles (for example, F_single lillilip 1-4, F_2 consecutive chililip 1-4, F_3 consecutive chililip 1-4) For example, a main control board 71), stop operation detection means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, Inside Based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped, and the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is displayed. Reel stop control means (for example, motor drive circuit 39, main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation and the symbol displayed on the symbol display means when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control means. Based on the combination, a winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has been won, and a predetermined combination (for example, the internal winning combination determining means) , MB) is determined as an internal winning combination until the predetermined winning combination is determined by the winning determination means. Determination of the internal winning combination in a state where the predetermined combination carryover means (for example, main control board 71) to carry over and the predetermined combination carryover means in the advantageous state do not carry over the predetermined combination (for example, between non-flags of normal ART) After the means determines the predetermined combination as an internal winning combination, when the predetermined number of unit games are performed without winning the predetermined combination (for example, when the sign is digested), the duration of the advantageous state is extended. The added game starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the added game state (for example, CT) and the second winning combination are determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means during the added gaming state. And a first additional control means (for example, main control board 71) for extending the duration of the advantageous state, and the first winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determination means during the additional gaming state. The conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) for performing a predetermined lottery (for example, flag conversion lottery for determining whether or not to display the cactus at the time of F_push order bell win) and the conversion lottery means When the predetermined lottery to be performed is won, second addition control means (for example, the main control board 71) for extending the duration of the added gaming state, and notification means (for example, the information display 14) for informing stop operation information. A display unit 100, a main control board 71, a sub control board 72), and the reel stop control means is a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means (for example, MB When the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination (between non-flags), the symbol display means stops displaying the variation of the symbols so that the first symbol combination can be displayed. In the game (for example, between MB flags) in which the second symbol combination cannot be displayed and the variation of symbols is stopped, and the predetermined role is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined role carry-over means. Is determined as an internal winning combination, the variation of the symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the order of the stop operation. When the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the carryover means, the third symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means according to the order of the stop operation. Or, in the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means while the variation of the pattern is stopped so that the fourth combination of symbols can be displayed. When the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol display means stops the variation of symbols so that the fourth symbol combination can be displayed, while the third symbol combination cannot be displayed. When the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in a state where the predetermined winning combination means in the advantageous state does not carry over the predetermined winning combination, the notification means sets the symbol A first notification lottery that determines whether or not to notify the order of the stop operation for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the display means (for example, when a F_single chilli lip, F_2 chilli lip, F_3 chilli lip wins, a chilli lip is displayed. First notification lottery means (for example, main control board 71) for performing flag conversion lottery of whether or not to perform, and a state where the predetermined combination carry-over means in the advantageous state does not carry over the predetermined combination During the predetermined number of unit games (for example, a sign of CT) after the internal winning combination determining means determines the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination until the added game starting means starts the added gaming state. During the game, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, a second notification lottery is performed for determining whether or not the order of the stop operation is notified by the notification means. 2 notification lottery means (for example, sub control board 72), wherein the notification means is a lottery of the first notification lottery of the first notification lottery means and the second notification lottery of the second notification lottery means. Based on the result, information on the stop operation is notified.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the predetermined combination carry-over means carries over the predetermined combination until winning, so that it has a so-called flag-to-flag gaming state. Here, the pachislot machine performs the reel stop control according to the internal winning combination. Since the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination overlaps with the predetermined combination. Even if the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control different from that between non-flags can be performed.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags (the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Take control. In addition, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed between the non-flags according to the order of the stop operation. Then, stop control is performed so that the fourth symbol combination is displayed. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to display different stop control between the flag and the non-flag, that is, a combination of symbols different between the flag and the non-flag while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and to make the games between the flags more diverse. Specifically, by making the second symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare role such as cherry, the rare role is won by winning the first role between the flags. As a result, the rare role always wins in the winning of the second role, and the appearance frequency of the rare role can be increased without changing the type of winning combination and the winning probability.

  By the way, in a pachislot machine, when advantageous control is performed for a player, the advantageous control is not performed immediately, but the advantageous control is performed after a predetermined number of games (precursor games). There is. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is in an advantageous state, and a state where a predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, when an additional gaming state is started when it becomes between flags during the advantageous state, this additional gaming state Play a predetermined number of precursor games before starting.

  As described above, stop control differs between non-flags and between flags, so stop control (combination of displayed symbols) when a precursor game is performed between flags as in the gaming machine of the present invention. Therefore, the player may know that the sign game is in progress. For example, during the flag, the 4th symbol combination is always displayed in the winning of the 2nd role, and the 3rd symbol combination is not displayed, while during the non-flag, according to the pressing order when the 2nd role is won. Since the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed, if the fourth symbol combination is frequently displayed regardless of the pressing order, the player may be in the middle of a flag (during pre-game). It will be understood.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag (during pre-game), the pressing order (stop operation order) is notified. When winning the second combination between the flags, since the fourth symbol combination is displayed regardless of the pressing order, it is not necessary to notify the pressing order if it is originally, but when the pressing order is notified, The player recognizes that the fourth symbol combination is displayed according to the notified pressing order (in addition, since the fourth symbol combination is displayed according to the pressing order between non-flags, the player receives the fourth symbol combination in the notified game. When the symbol combination is displayed, it is easy for the player to recognize that it is between non-flags), and it can be difficult to grasp that the player is in the middle of a flag (pre-game). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game between flags (during pre-game) from becoming monotonous and to improve the gameability between flags.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the progress of the game, and a sub control unit (for example, the sub control board 72) that controls the effects related to the game, The second notification lottery means is included in the sub-control unit.

  In recent years, it has been required to properly manage the player's profit on the main (main control unit) side, and since the notification of the stop operation affects the profit, the notification of the stop operation affecting the profit is the main Need to be controlled by the side. In this regard, the notification of the pressing order when the second combination is won during the flag does not affect the profit (that is, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed during the flag). In such a gaming machine, the notification is controlled on the sub (sub control unit) side. Since the main control unit has a larger capacity limit than the sub control unit, it is possible to reduce the capacity and processing load of the main control unit by controlling notification on the sub side when it does not affect profit, Is preferred.

[Appendix 7]
The pachislot machine 1 of appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs in a high probability replay time (RT: replay time) in which the probability that an AT is replayed (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is sometimes referred to as an ART machine.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that this period will last longer.

  Therefore, in recent years, devices for increasing the period of AT and ART have been made from various viewpoints. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), identification of watermelon, cherry, etc. is given as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine is disclosed that increases the number of AT games when the combination is determined. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, since the gaming machine of the patent document simply increases the number of AT games based on the internal winning combination, the gameability tends to be monotonous, and a new mechanism for increasing the number of AT games has been demanded.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide an amusement machine that can enhance the interest with respect to the addition of an advantageous state and can continue the game without being bored by the player.

[Means for solving problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) that determines an internal winning combination with probability, and a stop operation detecting means that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel. (For example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Is stopped by the reel stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) which stops the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the reel stop control means causes the change of the symbol. When stopped, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is based on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means. A winning determination means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an additional game start that starts an additional gaming state (for example, CT) that extends the duration of the advantageous state The duration of the advantageous state is extended (for example, the number of ART games is added) according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the added gaming state (for example, the main control board 71) ) Adding control means (for example, main control board 71) and counting means for counting the number of unit games whose duration is not extended by the adding control means in the adding game state (for example, a CT game number counter, Control board 71) and an extra game ending means for ending the extra game state when the count result of the counting means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times). (For example, main control board 71).

  In such a gaming machine, when transitioning to the added gaming state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended (addition is performed) until the counting means counts a predetermined number of times. Here, the counting means counts the number of unit games whose duration is not extended during the extra game state (no extra game is performed), that is, when the extra game is performed during the extra game state, Since the number of times is not counted, the added gaming state will continue longer as the additional number is added. For the player, it is not known how long the added gaming state will continue, and the added gaming state will not end as long as the added gaming state is performed, so the game in the added gaming state will not end The game can be continued without getting bored due to strong interest, and can increase the interest of the game in the added gaming state.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination (for example, F_Challenging Lip, F_1 certainty Lip) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the conversion lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery. (For example, the main control board 71), and when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the additional control means increases the duration when the predetermined lottery is won. When the second winning combination (for example, cactus, weak cherry, strong cherry) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the duration is extended by the second additional amount. The counting means returns the counting result to an initial value when the duration is extended in response to the first winning combination being determined as an internal winning combination.

  In such a gaming machine, when the first combination or the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the added gaming state, the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination. When the addition is performed according to the above, the counting result of the counting means returns to the initial value. Thereby, for example, even if the added gaming state is just before the end (the counting result is close to a predetermined number), the added gaming state is restarted from the beginning by adding according to the first combination. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the added gaming state.

  In addition, since the addition based on the first combination (addition to return the counting result to the initial value) is performed only when the first combination is won as the internal winning combination, Thus, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive profit and to balance the profits of the player and the game store.

[Appendix 8]
The pachislot machine 1 of appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. Yes. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs in a high probability replay time (RT: replay time) in which the probability that an AT is replayed (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is sometimes referred to as an ART machine.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. It would be hoped that this period will last longer.

  Therefore, in recent years, devices for increasing the period of AT and ART have been made from various viewpoints. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), identification of watermelon, cherry, etc. is given as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine is disclosed that increases the number of AT games when the combination is determined. According to this gaming machine, since the number of AT games increases according to the internal winning combination, the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, since the gaming machine of the patent document simply increases the number of AT games based on the internal winning combination, the gameability tends to be monotonous, and a new mechanism for increasing the number of AT games has been demanded.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide an amusement machine that can enhance the interest with respect to the addition of an advantageous state and can continue the game without being bored by the player.

[Means for solving problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. And the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player, and the reel by rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) that determines an internal winning combination with probability, and a stop operation detecting means that is provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detects a stop operation for stopping each reel. (For example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. Is stopped by the reel stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) which stops the change of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, and the reel stop control means causes the change of the symbol. When stopped, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means is based on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means. A winning determination means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an additional game start that starts an additional gaming state (for example, CT) that extends the duration of the advantageous state Means (for example, main control board 71) and in the added gaming state, the internal winning combination determining means determines that a predetermined combination (for example, triple chili lip) is determined as an internal winning combination. Additional control means (for example, main control board 71) for extending the duration, and counting means (for example, the number of CT games) for counting the number of unit games whose duration is not extended by the additional control means in the additional gaming state When the unit game is counted a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) by the counter, the main control board 71) and the counting means, the added gaming state is terminated. Additional game ending means (for example, the main control board 71), and the additional control means, when the number of extension of the continuation period in the added gaming state is a number of times less than or equal to a specific number, Is extended as a first extra amount (for example, 10 games) in response to being determined as an internal winning combination, and the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination when the number of extensions exceeds the specific number In response to this, the duration is extended by a second additional amount (for example, 20 games) that is larger than the first additional amount.

  In such a gaming machine, when transitioning to the added gaming state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended (addition is performed) until the counting means counts a predetermined number of times. Here, the counting means counts the number of unit games whose duration is not extended during the extra game state (no extra game is performed), that is, when the extra game is performed during the extra game state, Since the number of times is not counted, the added gaming state will continue longer as the additional number is added. For the player, it is not known how long the added gaming state will continue, and the added gaming state will not end as long as the added gaming state is performed, so the game in the added gaming state will not end The game can be continued without getting bored due to strong interest, and can increase the interest of the game in the added gaming state.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the number of times that the addition is triggered by a predetermined role (the number of extension of the duration) exceeds a specific number, the amount added per time is calculated from the first addition amount. Increase to the second extra amount. As described above, the counting is not performed by the counting means by adding, and the added gaming state continues. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the player, the added amount per time increases as the added gaming state continues. Can be expected and can increase the interest of the game in the added gaming state.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the counting means returns the counting result to an initial value when the duration is extended in response to the predetermined winning combination being determined as an internal winning combination. And

  According to such a gaming machine, the counting result of the counting means returns to the initial value when an extra is triggered by a predetermined combination. Thereby, for example, even if the added gaming state is just before the end (the count result is close to a predetermined number), the added gaming state is restarted from the beginning by being added with the predetermined role as a trigger. Therefore, it is possible to expect an increase in the amount of addition per time. Here, if the added gaming state is not resumed, in order to have the gameability of increasing the added amount per time, the winning probability of the predetermined role must be a certain probability or more, and the game balance is lost. However, by resuming the added gaming state, even if the winning probability of a predetermined role is suppressed, it is possible to have a gaming property of increasing the added amount per time, and balance the game. It is possible to have a high level of playability while aiming.

[Appendix 9]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 9 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), in order to prevent a player from losing a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination for players. A gaming machine that notifies a player of advantageous information is known. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation was performed under the control of the sub (sub control) side, but in recent years because the presence or absence of navigation affects the player's profits (so-called “balls”), It is required to perform navigation on the main (main control) side that manages the profits of the player. As an example of such a navigation, a navigation for winning a bonus combination when a bonus combination is won can be considered.

  By the way, when navigating under the control of the sub-side as in the past, navigation has implications as production, and there is no navigation like production that suggests the gaming situation in order to realize various gaming properties. Since it is possible, for example, even when the bonus combination cannot be won, it is possible to navigate such that the bonus symbol is aimed. On the other hand, when navigating on the main side that manages profits, navigation has a strong meaning of ensuring that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current game situation. For example, it is not possible to perform navigation for winning a bonus combination when the bonus combination cannot be won.

  Here, in a pachislot machine, when a bonus combination and another combination are won, the bonus combination may be won because the other combination may be given priority over the bonus combination. However, the bonus combination does not always win, and navigation at an appropriate timing is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to perform navigation for winning a bonus combination at an appropriate timing on the main side.

[Means for solving problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and a bonus state (for example, a bonus state) that is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal state as a state for playing a game. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. A main control unit that controls the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 71) and a sub control unit that controls the effects related to the game (for example, the sub control board 72), the main control unit being a player Based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) and detecting the start operation by the start operation detecting means, the reel is rotated. Based on the detection of the start operation by the pattern change means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for changing the pattern and the start operation detection means, an internal winning combination is determined from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) and stop operation detecting means (corresponding to the plurality of reels) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel (for example, stop switch 7S, Based on the main control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the rotation of the reel is stopped to stop the design. Reel stop control means (for example, main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the display means, and the reel stop control means When the change of the game is stopped, based on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, a winning determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won (for example, When the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the main control board 71) and the internal winning combination determining means, the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination until it is determined by the winning determination means that the bonus combination is won. Bonus carry-over means (for example, main control board 71) that carries over as a winning combination, and bonus start means (for example, main control board 71) that starts the bonus state when it is determined by the winning determination means that the bonus combination has won. And instruction information notification means (for example, the information display 14 and the main control board 71) for notifying instruction information that uniquely indicates the mode of the stop operation. In the game in which the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the information notification means is used when the first combination (for example, F_special combinations 1 to 3) is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the bonus combination. While the bonus instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination is notified, the second combination (for example, F_maintenance lip A) is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the bonus combination. In this case, the reel stop control means does not notify the bonus instruction information, and when the bonus combination and the first combination are determined as an internal winning combination, the reel stop control means selects a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination. When the change of the symbol is stopped so that it can be displayed on the symbol display means, and the bonus combination and the second combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the pattern corresponding to the bonus combination And wherein the stopping the change of the display impossible symbol combinations on the symbol display unit.

  In such a gaming machine, the instruction information notification means of the main control unit notifies the bonus instruction information uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination, and therefore, under the control of the main side. Navigation for winning the bonus combination can be performed. Here, the bonus instruction information is notified when the first combination that can display the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the symbol display means is won together with the bonus combination, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed. When the second combination that cannot be displayed on the means is won together with the bonus combination, no notification is given. Therefore, according to the navigation by the main control part of the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to perform navigation for winning a bonus combination at an appropriate timing.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control unit may be configured so that the internal winning combination determining unit determines that the bonus winning combination is an internal winning combination in a state where the bonus carryover means does not carry over the bonus combination. Counting means (for example, main control board 71) for counting the number of unit games, and the internal winning combination determining means determining the bonus combination as an internal winning combination in a state where the bonus carryover means does not carry over the bonus combination , A predecessor game number determination means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining a predecessor game number indicating the number of unit games until a bonus notification for notifying that the bonus combination is being carried over is further performed. And the instruction information notifying means does not notify the bonus instruction information until the counting means counts unit games corresponding to the number of previous games. The first roles in addition to the bonus combination after the counting means has counted the unit game of the aura number of games content when it is determined as the internal winning combination, characterized by informing the bonus instruction information.

  When a bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a bonus combination may be notified after a game is performed a predetermined number of times after the bonus combination is won. For example, it is generally performed to enhance the effect by performing an effect (so-called continuous effect) performed over a plurality of games and notifying the presence or absence of a bonus combination according to the result of this continuous effect. Yes. In this case, if the bonus instruction information is notified on the main side during the continuous performance, the meaning of the continuous performance may be lost and the interest may be lost. Here, since the main control unit has a limited capacity, it is preferable to control the production on the sub (sub control unit) side in order to perform various productions with high production effects, while managing profits. The main control unit that does not receive an external signal is required to be able to appropriately grasp the timing at which the continuous production controlled on the sub-side ends.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main side determines the number of predictive games until the bonus announcement, and also determines the bonus combination as the internal winning combination. Count the number of times. When this count result reaches the number of precursor games, bonus instruction information is notified. Since a signal can be notified from the main side to the sub side, for example, a bonus can be given on the main side during the continuous production by controlling the production according to the number of games for which bonus instruction information is to be notified on the sub side. Instruction information is not reported. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to perform navigation for winning a bonus combination at an appropriate timing on the main side while ensuring a variety of effects.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a gaming state having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and a bonus state (for example, a bonus state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. ), A main control unit (for example, the main control board 71) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub control unit (for example, the sub control board 72) for controlling the effects related to the game, By starting operation detecting means (for example, start switch 6S, main control board 71) for detecting a starting operation by a player, and by rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. Based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detection means to change the symbol, the order of the stop operation is determined when it is determined as the internal winning combination. In response, a combination of a plurality of symbols including the first symbol combination (for example, bell) or the second symbol combination (for example, bell spilled eyes) includes a push order (for example, F_3 selection bell_1st) that can be stopped and displayed. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability, and a stop provided to correspond to the plurality of reels to stop each reel A stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) for detecting an operation, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation detecting means. Reel stop control means (for example, main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing when the stop operation is detected; Whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means based on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means has been won when the variation of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means When a bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the winning determination unit (for example, the main control board 71) and the internal winning combination determining unit, it is determined that the bonus combination has been won by the winning determination unit. Until the bonus combination is carried out by the bonus carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) carrying over the bonus combination as an internal winning combination and the winning determination unit When it is determined that a winning has been won, a bonus starting means (for example, main control board 71) for starting the bonus state and an instruction information notifying means (for example, information display) for notifying instruction information uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation 14 and a main control board 71), and the instruction information notification means includes a predetermined combination (for example, F_special combination) in addition to the bonus combination in a game in which the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination. 1-3) is determined as an internal winning combination, bonus instruction information indicating a mode of a stop operation for winning the bonus combination is notified, while the push order combination is added to the bonus combination. A push indicating a mode of a stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means without notifying the bonus instruction information when determined as an internal winning combination In the game in which the first combination instruction information is notified and the bonus combination is not determined as an internal winning combination, and the push order combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means. The second instruction information indicating the push order different from the first order information indicating the push order indicating the mode of the stop operation for displaying the information is displayed. When the winning combination is determined, the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the symbol display means, and the variation of the symbols is stopped, while the bonus combination and the push order combination are used as the internal winning combination. When it is determined, the variation of the symbols is stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination cannot be displayed on the symbol display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the push winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the instruction information notified by the instruction information notification unit is the case where the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination together with the pushing forward combination Becomes the push order first instruction information, and when the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination together with the push order, the push order second instruction information is obtained. Both the first push order instruction information and the second push order instruction information indicate the mode of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the instruction information notification is performed. It is possible to grasp whether or not a bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination in addition to the push order combination from the type of notification of the push order combination by means.

[Appendix 10]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, as shown in a patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-075305), a gaming machine that is linked to a mobile phone or a smartphone owned by a player is also known. In such a gaming machine, by registering a player in cooperation with a mobile phone or the like, it is possible to manage a player's unique game history, etc., and to provide individual services that are not conventionally provided. .

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, conventional player machines of the player registration type cannot always be said to be highly convenient for the player, and there has been a demand for a device that further increases the convenience of the player.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to improve convenience in a player registration type gaming machine.

[Means for solving problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that progresses a game by variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns in accordance with the result of an internal lottery, and that irradiates an irradiation light device (for example, irradiation) An optical device B), a movable screen (for example, a screen device C) that displays an image corresponding to the effect by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device, and a position where the movable screen is arranged to be adjustable. Drive device for driving the movable screen (for example, front screen drive mechanism E2 and reel screen drive mechanism F2), history management means for managing game history indicating the result of the game (for example, sub control board 72), and history management A top screen (e.g., top screen 211) that displays a summary game history that is a part of the game history managed by the means, and the history management means manages the top screen A plurality of display screens including a game information screen (for example, game information screens 213, 214, and 215) for displaying a detailed game history including the general game history of the game histories are displayed separately from the movable screen. Display device (for example, first sub display device 201), input receiving means (for example, touch sensor 201a) for receiving input information for controlling display of the display device, and input information received by the input receiving means Control means (for example, sub-control board 72) for controlling the display device, and registration accepting means (for example, sub-control board 72) for accepting registration of a player who performs a game. If the registration accepting means does not accept the registration, the game information screen is not displayed based on the input information, and the registration accepting means If you are ready for recording is characterized in that for switching the display of the display can display device the game information screen based on the input information.

  According to such a gaming machine, if the player registration is not accepted, the game information screen for displaying the detailed game history cannot be displayed on the display device, but if the player registration is accepted, The game information screen can be displayed on the display device. The fact that a more detailed game history can be confirmed leads to an improvement in the convenience of the player. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the convenience can be improved in the player registration type gaming machine.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a display device that displays a game information screen or the like is provided separately from a movable screen that displays an image corresponding to an effect. For example, a game machine that displays a game information screen or the like on a movable screen is also conceivable, but with such a game machine, it is difficult to display a game history during the production, and in fact, with conventional game machines, Only when no game is played, various display screens can be displayed on the movable screen. However, from the viewpoint of the player, there is a case where it is desired to confirm information other than the production during the game, and the conventional game machine that can display the display screen only when the game is not performed is not convenient. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the display device is provided separately from the movable screen, various display screens can be displayed even when the presentation is being performed on the movable screen, which improves convenience. To do.

  In addition, when the video according to the effect is displayed on the movable screen where the position to be operated is operated as in the gaming machine according to the present invention, various information other than the effect cannot be correctly displayed during the operation of the movable screen. There is a fear. In this regard, by displaying various display screens on a display device that is provided separately from the movable screen, even when the movable screen is operating and performing effects with high effects, various information other than effects is displayed. It is possible to display appropriately, and convenience is improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the input receiving means is a touch sensor provided on a display unit of the display device.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the player can input via the touch sensor, the display on the display device can be controlled by an intuitive operation.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a substantially horizontal pedestal (for example, the pedestal 10) and an insertion port that is provided on the side of the substantially horizontal surface of the pedestal to enter a game medium for playing a game. (For example, a medal slot 22 provided on the right side of the pedestal portion 10) and a bet button (for example, a MAX bet button 11 provided on the left side of the pedestal portion 10), and the display device includes: It is characterized in that it is provided in the vicinity of the insertion port and / or the bet button on a surface standing substantially vertically.

  Generally, a gaming machine is provided with a medal slot on the right side when viewed from the player of the pedestal and a bet button and start lever on the left side when viewed from the player. The player operates the right or left side of the pedestal. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a display device is provided on the side (right side or left side) of the surface standing substantially vertically from the pedestal portion, and the display of the display device is controlled based on the touch input detected by the touch sensor. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a display device and an input device (touch sensor) for controlling display are provided at a place where the player's hand is positioned during the game, and the operability of the player is improved. . In particular, since the display device with the touch sensor is provided on the surface standing from the pedestal portion (horizontal plane), the player can operate the display device while placing his / her hand on the pedestal portion. Thereby, not only the operability is improved, but also fatigue due to the operation can be reduced, so that an improvement in operating rate can be expected.

[Appendix 11]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 11 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), in order to prevent a player from losing a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination for players. A gaming machine that notifies a player of advantageous information is known. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation was performed under the control of the sub (sub control) side, but in recent years because the presence or absence of navigation affects the player's profits (so-called “balls”), It is required to perform navigation on the main (main control) side that manages the profits of the player. Here, when navigating on the main side, navigation has a strong meaning of guaranteeing that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current gaming situation.

  However, in such a navigation, there is a problem that the manner of navigation becomes monotonous and the diversity of games is impaired.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing various navigations while appropriately performing navigation that affects profits on the main side.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , A display window 4), a main control unit (for example, main control board 71) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub control unit (for example, sub control board 72) for controlling the effects related to the game, The control unit rotates the reel based on the start operation detecting means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) for detecting the start operation by the player and the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means. When it is determined as an internal winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the symbol change means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for changing the symbol and the start operation detection means. A first symbol combination (for example, F_3 selection bell 1st) capable of stopping and displaying the first symbol combination (for example, bell) or the second symbol combination (for example, bell spilled eyes) according to the stop operation sequence, and internal winning When the combination is determined as the combination, the second combination (for example, F_accuracy) that can stop and display the third symbol combination (for example, triple lip) or the fourth symbol combination (for example, replay) according to the order of the stop operation. An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including Stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation for stopping (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71), internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and stopping by the stop operation detecting means A reel stop control means (for example, main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which an operation is detected; (E.g., a medal payout or RT game state transition according to the combination of the displayed symbols, or a lottery based on the internal winning combination CZ, A privilege granting unit (for example, a main control board 71) for granting a privilege of granting rights to ART and CT, and an instruction information notification unit (for example, an information display) for notifying instruction information uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation 14, the main control board 71), and the sub-control unit performs an effect execution means (for example, the display unit 100, the sub-control board 72) that executes the effect according to the mode of the stop operation. ), And the bonus granting means includes a case where the first symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means in the game in which the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the second symbol combination is When the third combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display means in the game in which the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the fourth combination is displayed. When the same combination is displayed and the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the instruction information notification unit displays the first combination of symbols on the symbol display unit. The instruction information uniquely indicating the order of the stop operation for displaying the symbol, and the effect executing means, the effect indicating the order of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means Run before When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the instruction information notification unit does not notify the instruction information, and the effect execution unit displays the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol on the symbol display unit. An effect indicating the order of the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination is executed.

  In such a gaming machine, navigation that affects profit (privilege) is managed on the main (main control unit) side, while navigation that does not affect profit is managed on the sub (sub control unit) side. Specifically, the first combination that gives a different privilege when the combination of displayed symbols is different (that is, the first combination is displayed when the first symbol combination is displayed and when the second symbol combination is displayed). Navigation is performed by both the instruction information notification means controlled on the main side and the effect execution means controlled on the sub side, and the same privilege is given even if the combination of the displayed symbols is different. The navigation of the second role to be granted (that is, the second privilege is given the same privilege when the third symbol combination is displayed and when the fourth symbol combination is displayed) is the main side This is not performed by the instruction information notification means, but only by the sub-stage production execution means. Here, the navigation controlled on the sub side has a meaning as an effect, can be navigated in a variety of modes, and can realize various game playability. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, navigation that affects profits is appropriately performed on the main side that manages profits, and navigation that does not affect profits is performed on the sub-side with diversity. Can do.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the fourth symbol combination includes all symbols on a predetermined line formed by connecting unit symbol display areas for displaying one symbol of each reel in the symbol display means. A combination of symbols in which a specific symbol is displayed in a unit symbol display area, and when the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the privilege granting unit grants a privilege with a predetermined probability, and the effect executing unit Indicates the order of stop operation for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the symbol display means when the privilege granting means grants a privilege in a game in which the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination On the other hand, in the game in which the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination, when the privilege granting unit does not grant a privilege, the effect is not executed.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination and it is determined that a privilege is to be granted, a navigation system that targets a fourth symbol combination in which specific symbols are aligned on the line ( On the other hand, even if the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the navigation is not performed when it is determined that no privilege is given. Here, since whether or not to grant a privilege is determined before the combination of symbols is displayed, the profit that the player obtains does not change depending on the displayed combination of symbols. By controlling such navigation on the sub-side, for example, an effect such as “Aim for a specific symbol” can be executed according to the type of privilege to be given, and the diversity of games can be ensured. As a result, navigation that affects profits can be appropriately performed on the main side that manages profits, and navigation that does not affect profits can be navigated with diversity on the sub side.

[Appendix 12]
The pachislot machine 1 of appendix 12 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine for informing a player of information advantageous to the player. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in AT machines and ART machines, it is possible to determine whether to execute AT on the sub control circuit side (sub side) according to the internal winning combination determined on the main control circuit side (main side). It was general. Since AT machines (ART machines) have different medal payout rates depending on whether the AT is operating or not, in conventional gaming machines that perform AT lottery on the sub side, the medal payout rate is only on the main side. It was supposed to be managed on the sub side.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine, it is required to appropriately manage the medal payout rate, so it is not preferable to manage the medal payout rate on the sub-side, and in recent years, AT is executed. Management of whether or not to do so is also required to be performed on the main side. However, since the capacity of the storage means (ROM) is limited in the main control circuit, only a limited amount can be allocated for AT management. On the other hand, if the capacity is reduced and the management of AT is made monotonous, the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is impaired.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of sufficiently securing the main-side capacity while performing AT management on the main-side.

[Means for solving problems]
In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a notification target combination (for example, push order combination) that is a notification target combination is determined as a winning combination, a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player (for example, correct push sequence) ) And a normal gaming state (for example, a normal section) in which the advantageous stop operation mode is not notified, and controls the progress of the game. A main control unit (for example, a main control board 71), and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that performs control related to the performance, wherein the main control units are connected to each other so as to communicate with each other. It has a control part (for example, the 1st main control board 71a) and a 2nd main control part (for example, the 2nd main control board 71b), and the 1st main control part contains a plurality of information object roles. The winning combination is determined from the roles, and the second main control unit , And it performs the normal transition from the playing state whether to shift the game state to the notifying gaming state lottery.

  In such a gaming machine, the main control unit has a plurality of control units such as a first main control unit and a second main control unit that are communicably connected, and the first main control unit determines a winning combination. The second lottery (internal lottery) is performed, and a transition lottery is performed in the second main control unit to determine whether or not to shift to the notification gaming state (AT). As a result, in the main control unit (main side) that controls the progress of the game, it is possible to perform both the lottery for the winning combination and the lottery for transition to the notification game state, and the lottery that affects the payout rate of medals. Can be properly managed on the main side. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, each lottery is performed by each of the first main control unit and the second main control unit. Therefore, when the lottery is performed by only one control unit as in the past, Compared with this, a sufficient capacity for lottery can be secured, and as a result, variations of lottery can be increased, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the interest of the game is not impaired.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, setting means (for example, setting key type switch 430, main control board 71) for setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. In the plurality of combinations, there is a setting unquestioned combination determined as a winning combination with the same probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting unit, and a setting value set by the setting unit And the second main control unit performs the lottery in response to the setting unquestioned role being determined as the winning combination, while the setting lottery determined as the winning combination is included. The transfer lottery is not performed in accordance with the determination that the winning combination is determined as a winning combination, and the transition lottery is performed with the same probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the notification gaming state is performed with the same probability regardless of the set value when the setting unquestioned role is determined as the winning role. . Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the degree of expectation related to the transition to the notification gaming state can be made the same for each set value, and the difference in the payout performance is determined as the winning probability of the set difference with a set difference. Can be suppressed. As a result, the difference in the performance for each set value can be provided not in the notification gaming state but in the determination of the winning combination itself, so that the game machine having the notification gaming state can improve the gambling ability. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to play with peace of mind.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second main control unit performs the transition lottery to win with a probability that is uniquely determined for the combination determined by the first main control unit as the winning combination. It is characterized by.

  According to such a gaming machine, the probability of winning the transition lottery is uniquely determined for the winning combination and does not vary. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, even though the same combination is a winning combination, a state where it is easy to win a transition lottery (so-called high probability state) or a state where it is difficult to win a transition lottery (so-called low It is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a player can play with peace of mind without having a state such as (probability state) and without increasing gambling ability.

[Appendix 13]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of appendix 13 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine for informing a player of information advantageous to the player. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

  In addition, in game stores where gaming machines are actually installed, it is common to install external devices such as data counters and hall computers together with gaming machines, for example, installed above the gaming machines. The data counter receives a signal output from the gaming machine and displays the number of games and the number of bonuses.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in AT machines and ART machines, it is possible to determine whether to execute AT on the sub control circuit side (sub side) according to the internal winning combination determined on the main control circuit side (main side). It was general. In addition, in the gaming machine, the signal output to the external device has to be performed from the main side. In gaming machines, signal output from the main side to the sub side is allowed, but signal output from the sub side to the main side is not allowed, so the sub side like conventional AT (ART machine) is not allowed. In the gaming machine that manages AT, the sub-side lottery result is inferred from events that can be recognized on the main side (for example, the transition of RT state or multiple stop operations in a specific pushing order). The result was output to an external device.

  In such a conventional method, the timing for outputting the AT lottery to the external device is delayed by several games from the timing of the actual winning, and depending on the mode of the player's stop operation, the AT winning A signal might be output. From the game store, the accuracy of grasping the behavior of the gaming machine with the hall computer is reduced, and from the player, the game history of the data counter is different from the actual history, so the gaming machine that performs the game There was a problem that it became difficult to select.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can output the result of AT lottery to an external device with high accuracy.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and a transfer lottery (for example, to a specific section) whether or not to shift the gaming state. Transition lottery means (for example, main control board 71) for performing transition lottery), and when the transition lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (for example, the normal section) to the notification gaming state (for example, the specific section). It is advantageous for the player if the game state control means (for example, the main control board 71) and the notification target combination (for example, push order combination) that is the notification target role during the notification game state are determined as the winning combination. When a notification means (for example, main control board 71, instruction monitor 147, sub-control board 72, display unit 100) for notifying the mode of stop operation (for example, the correct answer pressing order) and the transition lottery, the transition lottery In Output means for outputting a signal indicating that the lottery to the outside (for example, the main control board 71, the external common terminal plate 73), characterized in that it comprises a, a.

  In such a gaming machine, when transitioning to the notification gaming state, so-called AT machines or ART machines are realized in order to notify the mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination. be able to. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the result of lottery transfer to the notification gaming state (winning information) is output, and the winning information is output on condition that the lottery is won. Therefore, unlike the conventional gaming machine, the information estimated from other events is not output, and the result of the transfer lottery can be output as it is, so that the result of the transfer lottery can be output with high accuracy. .

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification game state is a game state in which one or a plurality of unit notification games with a predetermined period as one set are performed, and the game state control means is configured to notify the next set of unit notifications. When the execution of the game is permitted, the unit notification game of the next set is started after the end of one set of unit notification game. When the output means wins the transition lottery, it indicates that the transition lottery has been won. When a next unit notification game is started by the game state control means, a signal indicating that a new unit notification game has started is output to the outside, and the bonus start condition is established. On the basis of the bonus start means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting a bonus state advantageous to the player and the bonus condition based on the establishment of the bonus end condition Bonus end means (for example, the main control board 71) for ending the game, and the gaming state control means, when the bonus state is started during the notification gaming state, after the bonus state ends The notification game state is resumed, and the output means outputs a signal to the outside when the first condition is satisfied when the notification game state is resumed with the end of the bonus state, and the first means If the condition is not satisfied, no signal is output to the outside.

  In such a gaming machine, an external signal can be output not only at the time of winning the transfer lottery (so-called first hit) but also at the start of a new set of unit notification games, so that the exact number of sets can be grasped. be able to. Here, depending on the timing of winning the bonus, the bonus state may start in the middle of one set, and when the notification game state is resumed after the bonus is over, the count of the number of unit notification games is shifted. May end up. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the output of a signal to the outside is controlled based on the first condition, it is possible to appropriately manage the count of the number of sets when the bonus state is sandwiched.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first condition is that the unit notification game in which the unit notification game in the notification game state that resumes with the end of the bonus state is executed when the bonus state is started is performed. The game state control means is a unit notification game that is different from a game, and the gaming state control means is configured to execute the bonus state when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the bonus state is started during the notification game state. The unit notification game of another set is resumed at the end of the bonus game, and when the bonus state is started during the notification game state and the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the bonus game is completed at the end of the bonus state. It is characterized by resuming the unit notification game that was executed when the state was started.

  More specifically, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the unit notification game to be restarted when the bonus state is sandwiched is a new set of unit notification game, a signal is output to the outside, and the set If the unit notification game that restarts when the bonus state is sandwiched while counting the number is the same unit notification game as the unit notification game at the start of the bonus, without outputting a signal to the outside , Do not count the number of sets. Thereby, the count of the number of sets when a bonus state is sandwiched can be appropriately managed.

[Appendix 14]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of appendix 14 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine for informing a player of information advantageous to the player. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a notification lamp for notifying that a bonus or the like is advantageous for a player. From the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to know that the player is in an advantageous state from turning on / off the notification lamp, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In this respect, since AT is also in an advantageous state for the player like the bonus, there is a need for a device for notifying the player of the result of lottery transfer to AT.

  However, with a lamp that is simply turned on / off, the presence / absence of a win can be immediately recognized, but it makes the player feel that it is only necessary to turn on the lamp, which is interesting and results in a liquid crystal display device. There was a risk that the game would become monotonous due to the loss of interest in other effects such as.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having various variations regarding the notification of the result of AT lottery.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and a transfer lottery (for example, to a specific section) whether or not to shift the gaming state. Transition lottery means (for example, main control board 71) for performing transition lottery), and when the transition lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state (for example, the normal section) to the notification gaming state (for example, the specific section). It is advantageous for the player if the game state control means (for example, the main control board 71) and the notification target combination (for example, push order combination) that is the notification target role during the notification game state are determined as the winning combination. Notification means (for example, main control board 71, instruction monitor 147, sub-control board 72, display unit 100) for notifying the mode of stop operation (for example, pressing order of correct answers) and notification means for notifying the result of the transition lottery (Example The notification means includes a plurality of light emitting units that are turned on or off, and the light emitting units that are turned on and turned off among the plurality of light emitting units. The transition lottery result is notified by a combination pattern with the light emitting unit.

  In such a gaming machine, when transitioning to the notification gaming state, so-called AT machines or ART machines are realized in order to notify the mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination. be able to. In addition, since the gaming machine according to the present invention has notification means for notifying the result of lottery transition to the notification gaming state, it is possible to inform the player that the player has won a state advantageous to the player. it can. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the result of the transfer lottery can be reported to the player by the lighting pattern of the plurality of light emitting units, the transfer lottery is performed by the lighting pattern of various variations such as a winning pattern and a non-winning pattern. Can report the results. From the player's point of view, if the lighting patterns of multiple light-emitting parts change, it is not possible to immediately know that the winning lottery has been won, but it is possible to understand that the state is different from the normal state. It is possible to have a strong interest in the game, and to have an unprecedented deep gameplay.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification game state includes a plurality of types of notification game states having different degrees of advantage for a player, and the notification means is set to one notification game state in the transition lottery. The plurality of light emitting units are turned on or off in different combinations of patterns when winning and when winning another information game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the lighting pattern differs depending on the type of the notification gaming state, variations in the lighting pattern can be increased. From the player's point of view, as the variation of lighting patterns increases, it becomes difficult to accurately grasp the contents of each lighting pattern, so it will have a strong interest in the subsequent games and deeper games. Can have sex.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification game state includes a plurality of types of notification game states having different degrees of advantage for a player, and the notification means is set to one notification game state in the transition lottery. The plurality of light emitting units are turned on or off in the same combination pattern in the case of winning and in the case of winning in another notification game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the lighting pattern is the same regardless of the type of the notification gaming state, the type of the winning notification gaming state cannot be determined from the lighting pattern. Some skilled players may memorize an advantageous lighting pattern among the lighting patterns of a plurality of light emitting units, but a notification gaming state that is truly advantageous to the player (for example, a long AT such as 50 games) ) And the lighting pattern of a notification game state (for example, a short AT such as one game) that is not very advantageous to the player, the type of the winning notification game state cannot be grasped. And deeper gameplay.

[Appendix 15]
The pachislot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 15 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine for informing a player of information advantageous to the player. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such gaming machines, in addition to the game number management AT machine that manages the AT duration based on the number of games, there are known so-called navigation frequency management AT machines that manage the number of times that information advantageous to the player is notified. It has been. On AT machines with game count management, the duration of AT is guaranteed for a predetermined number of games, but on AT machines with navigation count management, if the target role of navigation is concentrated and won, it will end immediately. , Causing players to feel frustrated.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and in an AT machine (ART machine) for managing the number of times of navigation, a gaming machine that reduces the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation and does not impair the interest during the AT period. The purpose is to provide.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal gaming state (for example, a low lip state) and a high probability replaying state (for example, a high lip state) that has a higher probability of determining that the re-gamer is a winning combination than the normal gaming state. State), and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and the reels are rotated based on the establishment of the start condition, thereby the symbols. The symbol variation means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the first symbol combination (for example, the bell symbol combination) when the winning combination is determined based on the establishment of the start condition ) Or a first combination (for example, “F_3 selection bell A”) that allows stop display for a combination of a plurality of symbols including the second symbol combination (for example, bell spilled eyes), and when the winning combination is determined Third A second combination (for example, the combination “F_Maintenance” that allows stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including a symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols for replay) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols for tumble replay). Lip_123 ”to“ F_maintenance lip_321 ”), and a combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining a winning combination with a predetermined probability among a plurality of combinations, and corresponding to the plurality of reels Stop operation detection means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop by the stop operation detection means Based on the detection of the operation, stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the variation of the symbol, and the variation of the symbol are stopped. Sometimes, when the first symbol combination is displayed, a first quantity of gaming value (for example, nine medals) is given, while when the second symbol combination is displayed, the first quantity is displayed. In a game value giving means (for example, main control board 71) that gives less game value or no game value, and in the high-probability re-game state, when the variation of the symbol is stopped When the third symbol combination is displayed, the gaming state is maintained as the high probability replaying state, while when the fourth symbol combination is displayed, the gaming state is changed from the high probability replaying state to the Whether or not to shift the gaming state to the gaming state control means (for example, the main control board 71) for shifting to the normal gaming state and the notification gaming state (for example, a specific section) for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player The migration lottery of Transition lottery means (for example, the main control board 71), notification game start means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the notification game state upon winning the transition lottery performed by the transition lottery means, and the notification When the first combination is determined as the winning combination during the gaming state, the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination for the number of times indicated by the first combination navigation count (for example, the Bell navigation count) When the second combination is determined as the winning combination during the notification game state, the third symbol combination is displayed for the number of times indicated by the second combination navigation count (for example, the number of Lip Navi). Informing means (for example, main control board 71, instruction monitor 147, sub-control board 72, display unit 100) for notifying the mode of the stop operation necessary for this purpose is provided.

  In such a gaming machine, in the notification gaming state, when the first combination is won, a notification is made so that the first symbol combination having a large value for gaming is displayed, and when the second combination is won, Notification is performed so that the combination of the third symbols for maintaining the probability replay state is displayed. At this time, the notification for the first role is performed for the number of times indicated by the number of times of the first role navigation, and the notification for the second role is performed for the number of times indicated by the number of times of the second role navigation. Notification to each of the combinations can be performed based on the number of individual navigations. As a result, even if either the first role or the second role is concentrated and won in the notification game state, only one of the navigation times is consumed and the other navigation time is consumed. Therefore, the consumption speed of the navigation times can be reduced, and as a result, the interest during the notification game state is not impaired.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a predetermined combination (for example, a combination related to a bonus) is determined as a winning combination by the combination determination means, the predetermined combination is displayed until a symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed. Predetermined carry-over means (for example, main control board 71) that carries over as a winning combination, first addition means (for example, main control board 71) for increasing the number of first role navigations, and increase in the number of second role navigations Second stop means (for example, main control board 71) for causing the stop control means to win the first combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means. When determined as a combination, the variation of the symbol is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed according to the mode of the stop operation, and the predetermined combination carry-over means When the first combination is determined to be a winning combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as a winning combination, the first symbol combination can be displayed and the variation of the symbol is stopped while the second combination is displayed. The change of the symbol is stopped so that the symbol combination cannot be displayed, and the notification means determines that the first combination is determined as the winning combination in the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means. In such a case, the first combination means does not notify the mode of the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination, and the first addition means is carried over as the winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means. In games, the amount of increase in the number of times of the first role navigation is reduced compared to a game in which the predetermined role is not carried over as a winning combination, and the second adding-up means is configured to use the predetermined role carry-over means to In the game which is carried over as winning combination, the predetermined combination is to increase the amount of increase in the second-role navigation times as compared to a game that is not carried over as winning combination, characterized in that.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the state where the predetermined combination is carried over as the winning combination, only the first symbol combination having a large gaming value given when the first combination is won is displayed. In this state, the notification for the first combination is not performed, and the consumption of the number of first combination navigations can be suppressed. In addition, the number of times of the first role navigation and the number of times of the second role navigation are individually increased (added), respectively. On the contrary, the increase amount is increased with respect to the second combination navigation frequency of the second combination that consumes the navigation frequency. Thereby, the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation can be eased, and as a result, the interest during the notification game state is not impaired.

[Appendix 16]
The pachislot machine 1 of Supplementary Note 16 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine for informing a player of information advantageous to the player. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In such gaming machines, in addition to the game number management AT machine that manages the AT duration based on the number of games, there are known so-called navigation frequency management AT machines that manage the number of times that information advantageous to the player is notified. It has been. On AT machines with game count management, the duration of AT is guaranteed for a predetermined number of games, but on AT machines with navigation count management, if the target role of navigation is concentrated and won, it will end immediately. , Causing players to feel frustrated.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and in an AT machine (ART machine) for managing the number of times of navigation, a gaming machine that reduces the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation and does not impair the interest during the AT period. The purpose is to provide.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol that varies the symbol by rotating the reel based on establishment of a start condition. A variable determining means (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) and a combination determining means for determining a winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including a plurality of bonus combinations based on the establishment of the start condition ( For example, a main control board 71), stop operation detection means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, Based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination unit and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection unit, a stop control unit (for example, a motor drive circuit) that stops the variation of the symbol. 39, when the first symbol combination corresponding to the first bonus combination is displayed when the main control board 71) and the variation of the symbol are stopped, the first specific gaming state (for example, MB1 gaming state) Specific game start means (for example, main control board 71) that starts the second specific game state (for example, MB2 game state) when the second symbol combination corresponding to the second bonus combination is displayed. A transition lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) for performing a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a notification gaming state (for example, a specific section) that informs a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player; When the transition lottery is won, a notification game start means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts the notification game state and a notification target combination (for example, a push forward role) that is a notification target role during the notification game state. Determined as a winning role Then, the notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the instruction monitor 147, the sub-control board 72, and the display for notifying the stop operation mode (for example, the correct answer pressing order) advantageous for the player by the number of times indicated by the number of times of navigation. Unit 100), and the combination determination means can determine the notification target combination as a winning combination in the first specific gaming state, while winning the notification target combination in the second specific gaming state. It is characterized by not being determined as.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination during the notification game state, the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified for the number of times indicated by the number of times of navigation. Although this notification target combination may be determined as a winning combination during the first specific gaming state that starts in response to the first bonus combination, the second specific gaming state that starts in response to the second bonus combination The inside is not determined as a winning role. For this reason, when the transition to the first specific gaming state occurs during the notification gaming state, the game is performed while consuming the number of times of navigation, but when the transition to the second specific gaming state is possible during the notification gaming state, navigation is performed. A game can be played without consuming the number of times. Thus, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation can be reduced by the game in the second specific game state, and as a result, the interest in the notification game state is not impaired.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the counting means (for example, the main control board 71) for counting the duration of the notification gaming state and the counting means count for a predetermined period (for example, 1500 games), the navigation Notification game ending means (for example, main control board 71) for ending the notification game state regardless of the number of times, and the counting means is a period of the first specific game state performed during the notification game state. Is counted as the duration of the notification gaming state, while the period of the second specific gaming state performed during the notification gaming state is not counted as the duration of the notification gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the notification gaming state continues for a predetermined period, the notification gaming state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of times of navigation, so that a state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the gambling ability from increasing, and as a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the period of the second specific gaming state is not counted as the duration of the notification gaming state. If the second specific gaming state for suppressing consumption of the number of times of navigation is counted as the duration of the notification gaming state, the period of the notification gaming state is shortened by the second specific gaming state. If you look, it ’s easy to feel frustrated. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the period of the second specific gaming state is not counted as the duration of the notification gaming state, the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

[Appendix 17]
The pachislo machine 1 of appendix 17 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine for informing a player of information advantageous to the player. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in such a gaming machine, a gaming machine that displays a specific symbol (AT starting symbol) such as “7-7-7” at the start of AT (ART) is also known. However, the conventional gaming machine displaying such an AT start symbol only forcibly displays the AT start symbol by pseudo-rotating the reel, and is performed regardless of the player's stop operation. It was. The control for forcibly displaying the AT start symbol in a pachislot machine that requires a pressing operation has no enjoyment of the stop operation performed by the player, and is rather bothersome and detrimental.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of displaying a specific symbol in accordance with a player's stop operation at the start of AT.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol that varies the symbol by rotating the reel based on establishment of a start condition. Based on the change means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the establishment of the start condition, the combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) that determines the winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. ), A stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and determined by the combination determining means Stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71, etc.) for stopping the variation of the symbol based on the winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means. And a transition lottery means (for example, a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a notification gaming state (for example, a specific section) for notifying a mode of a stopping operation advantageous to the player (for example, the correct pushing order). , Main control board 71), right granting means (for example, main control board 71) for granting the right to transition to the notification gaming state upon winning the transition lottery, And a notification game start means (for example, a main control board 71) that shifts the game state to the notification game state when the condition is satisfied, and the stop control means includes the case where the transfer right is granted and the transition The variation of the symbol is stopped in a different manner from the case where the right is not granted.

  According to such a gaming machine, the stop control means basically stops the rotation of the reel based on the winning combination and the stop operation. In a state where the right to transition to the notification gaming state is given, The rotation of the reel is stopped in a manner different from the state where the right to transfer is not granted. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the reel stop control is different between the state in which the right to transition to the notification game state is granted and the state in which the right is not granted. The reel rotation can be stopped so as to display a specific symbol in accordance with the player's stop operation.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a bonus starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting a bonus state when a specific symbol combination is derived as a display result of the stop control of the stop control means, A carry-over means (for example, main control board 71) that carries over a permissible condition for deriving the specific symbol combination when the specific symbol combination is not derived in a unit game in which the deriving of the specific symbol combination is permitted; The winning combination determining means determines a winning combination with a different probability from the other states during the bonus state, and the degree of advantage for the player is different in the notification gaming state, and the winning combination The determination means has a plurality of notification game states with the same probability of determining a winning combination, and the stop control means includes a case where a right to transition to one notification game state is given, and The notification gaming state in a case where transition rights to different other broadcast game state of classification has been granted, characterized in that stopping the variation of the symbols in a different manner.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the reel stop control is made different according to the type of the notification game state of the transfer destination, for example, the notification game state that is more advantageous to the player and the notification game state that is not so are notified. The symbols displayed at the start of the gaming state can be varied. From the viewpoint of the player, since the degree of advantage of the subsequent game differs depending on the combination of symbols displayed at the start of the notification game state, the player has a strong interest in the stop operation at the start of the notification game state. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix 18]
The pachislot machine 1 of appendix 18 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine for informing a player of information advantageous to the player. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a notification lamp for notifying that a bonus or the like is advantageous for a player. From the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to know that the player is in an advantageous state from turning on / off the notification lamp, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In this respect, since AT is also in an advantageous state for the player like the bonus, there is a need for a device for notifying the player of the result of lottery transfer to AT.

  However, with a lamp that is simply turned on / off, the presence / absence of a win can be immediately recognized, but it makes the player feel that it is only necessary to turn on the lamp, which is interesting and results in a liquid crystal display device. There was a risk that the game would become monotonous due to the loss of interest in other effects such as.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not impair the interest of the game regarding the announcement of the result of AT lottery.

[Means for solving problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that uses a gaming value to play a game, and a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed and a start condition is satisfied. Based on the symbol variation means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) that varies the symbol by rotating the reel, and the winning combination is determined based on the establishment of the start condition, A first combination (for example, “F_3 selection”) that allows stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including a symbol combination (for example, a bell symbol combination) or a second symbol combination (for example, a bell symbol combination). Bell ”) and a plurality of symbol combinations including the third symbol combination (for example, the first symbol combination) or the fourth symbol combination (for example, disjoint) when the winning combination is determined. A combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining a winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including a second combination that allows a stop display (for example, “F_3 alternative one combination”); Stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to a plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the winning combination determined by the combination determining means And stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the change in the symbol based on the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, and when the change in the symbol is stopped When the first symbol combination is displayed, a first quantity of gaming value (for example, 9 medals) is given, and when the second symbol combination is displayed, the first symbol combination is less than the first quantity. Second quantity of games When the third symbol combination is displayed without giving a value or any game value, a third quantity of game value equal to or less than the game value used for the game (for example, one medal) When the fourth symbol combination is displayed, a game value giving means (for example, main control) that gives a game quantity of a fourth quantity less than the third quantity or does not give any game value. Board lottery 71) and a transition lottery for performing a transition lottery on whether or not to shift the gaming state to a notification gaming state (for example, a specific section) for notifying a mode of a stopping operation advantageous to the player (for example, the correct pushing order). When the means (for example, the main control board 71) and the transition lottery are won, a first notification gaming state (for example, a notification of an advantageous stop operation mode for the player when the first combination is determined as the winning combination) , ART gaming state) According to the first notification game control means (for example, the main control board 71) and the predetermined condition, without notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player when the first combination is determined as the winning combination , A second notification game control means for performing a second notification game state (for example, a one-piece combination ART game state) for notifying a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player when the second combination is determined as a winning combination ( For example, a main control board 71) and notification means (for example, a status indicator 147b) for notifying that the current game state is the first notification game state or the second notification game state. Features.

  According to such a gaming machine, while in the first notification gaming state, the first combination is notified of a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous for the player, while in the second notification gaming state, The mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified only to the second combination without notification. Here, the situation that is advantageous for the player at the time of the first winning combination is that the first symbol combination to which the first value of the game value exceeding the game value used for the game is given is displayed. Therefore, following the notification for the first combination increases the gaming value possessed by the player. On the other hand, an advantageous situation for the player at the time of the second combination is that the third symbol combination to which a third quantity of game value equal to or less than the game value used for the game is displayed is displayed. Even if the notification for the second combination is followed, the gaming value possessed by the player does not increase. Therefore, the gaming machine according to the present invention has two notification gaming states, a first notification gaming state for performing notification that the gaming value increases, and a second notification gaming state for performing notification that does not increase the gaming value. It will be.

  Here, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a notification means for notifying that the current gaming state is the notification gaming state. However, the notification means indicates that the current gaming state is the first notification gaming state or the second notification state. In order to notify that the game state is in effect, the notification by the notification means is performed even in the first information game state that is truly advantageous, or in the second information game state that is not necessarily advantageous. . As a result, from the notification by the notification means, it is impossible for the player to grasp whether or not the state will shift to a truly advantageous state (first notification gaming state), and the notification by the notification means is displayed on the liquid crystal display. There is no loss of interest in other effects such as devices. Thereby, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being impaired when the AT lottery result is notified by the notification means.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second notification game control means performs a second notification game state when the second combination is determined as a winning combination in a game other than the first notification game state. It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second notification gaming state is not performed over all games other than the first notification gaming state, but is performed only for some games other than the first notification gaming state. If the notification game state (AT) is performed over a long period of time on a pachislot machine, the gambling of the game may be increased, but the second notification is limited to some games other than the first notification game state. By performing the gaming state, it is possible to limit the period of the notification gaming state (the first notification gaming state and the second notification gaming state), and it is possible to prevent the gambling ability from increasing.

[Appendix 19]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of appendix 19 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine for informing a player of information advantageous to the player. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Here, in such an AT machine (ART machine), when a lottery transfer to AT is performed, there is a case where a continuous effect (so-called sign effect) suggesting whether or not the transfer lottery is successful may be performed. However, in conventional gaming machines, the number of medals will basically decrease during this sign production. There was a problem that the interest of the would decline.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not impair the interest during the sign production that suggests the result of AT lottery.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention has a combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and a mode of a stop operation (for example, a correct push order) advantageous to the player. Transition lottery means (for example, main control board 71) that performs transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the first notification gaming state (for example, short ART) or the second notification gaming state (for example, long ART) to be notified. When the lottery for transition to the first notification game state is won, first notification game control means (for example, main control board 71) that performs the first notification game state for the first period (for example, between three games). When the lottery for the transition to the second notification gaming state is won, second notification game control means for performing the second notification gaming state for a second period exceeding the first period (for example, between 53 games) ( For example, the main control board 71) When a notification target role (for example, a push forward role) that is a notification target role is determined as a winning combination during the first notification game state or the second notification game state, a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player ( For example, notifying means (for example, main control board 71, instruction monitor 147, sub control board 72, display unit 100) for notifying correct pressing order, and effect executing means for executing effects (for example, sub control board 72, Display unit 100) and notification means (for example, main control board 71, status indicator 147b) for notifying that the current gaming state is the first notification gaming state or the second notification gaming state. When the effect execution means wins the lottery for transition to the first information game state or the lottery for transition to the second information game state, the effect execution means wins the lottery for transition to the second information game state during the first period. And executes an effect of notifying whether Taka whether the player.

According to such a gaming machine, as a notification gaming state for notifying a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous for the player, a first notification gaming state performed in a first period and a second period row exceeding the first period Whether or not a lottery for transition to the second notification gaming state is won for the first period when winning the lottery for transition to the first notification gaming state or the second notification gaming state. An effect of informing the user is executed. Since the second notification gaming state is performed over a second period that exceeds the first period during which this effect is performed, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first period is indicated as a precursor to the second notification gaming state. It can be in a gaming state. That is, when winning the first notification gaming state, the notification gaming state ends in the first period (with the end of the production), while when winning the second notification gaming state, Since the notification gaming state continues beyond the first period, the notification gaming state can be continued after the end of the production. At this time, during the first period in which this effect is performed in order to notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player, regardless of whether the player is in the first notification game state or the second notification game state. The player can benefit. Thus, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the player can receive a profit during the so-called precursor effect, so the loss of the player during the predictor effect can be suppressed, and as a result, the interest of the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.
In the case of the first notification gaming state or the second notification gaming state, the notification means notifies the player, but from the notification by the notification means, the player is notified of the first notification gaming state or the second notification gaming state. Since it is impossible to grasp which of these is won, it is possible to prevent the presentation result from being known in advance during the sign production.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, setting means (for example, setting key type switch 430, main control board 71) for setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. In the plurality of combinations, there is a setting unquestioned combination determined as a winning combination with the same probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting unit, and a setting value set by the setting unit The transition lottery means performs the transition lottery in response to the setting unquestioned role being determined as the winning combination, while the set difference role is determined. The transfer lottery is not performed according to the determination as a winning combination, and the transition lottery is performed with the same probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the notification game state (the first notification game state or the second notification game state) is determined when the set unquestioned role is determined as the winning combination. Probability is performed with the same probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the degree of expectation related to the transition to the notification gaming state can be made the same for each set value, and the difference in the payout performance is determined as the winning probability of the set difference with a set difference. Can be suppressed. As a result, the difference in the performance for each set value can be provided not in the notification gaming state but in the determination of the winning combination itself, so that the game machine having the notification gaming state can improve the gambling ability. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to play with peace of mind.

[Appendix 20]
The pachislo machine 1 of appendix 20 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine for informing a player of information advantageous to the player. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In gaming machines having such an AT function, there is known a game number management AT machine that manages the duration of AT by the number of games. By the way, in such an AT machine for managing the number of games, if the number of winning combinations (for example, push order bells) to be notified during the AT period is small, there are few medals that can be acquired during the AT period, and Despite this, players sometimes complained.

  In addition, as a gaming machine having an AT function, a so-called navigation frequency management AT machine that manages the duration of an AT by the number of times that information advantageous to the player is notified is also known. Even in such a navigation frequency management AT machine, if the role to be notified is not established, the period of waiting for the occurrence of navigation becomes longer, and the player is in spite of the AT period. There was a risk of boring impressions.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the interest of a game from deteriorating during an AT period.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol that varies the symbol by rotating the reel based on establishment of a start condition. Based on the change means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the establishment of the start condition, the combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) that determines the winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. ), A stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and determined by the combination determining means Stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71, etc.) for stopping the variation of the symbol based on the winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means. And a specific game starting means (for example, main control board 71) that starts a specific gaming state (for example, a bonus state) when a specific symbol combination is displayed when the variation of the symbols is stopped, and a player Transition lottery means (for example, main control board) for performing transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a notification gaming state (for example, a specific section) for notifying the mode of the stopping operation (for example, the correct answer pressing order) 71), notification game control means (for example, main control board 71) for executing the notification game state based on the result of the transition lottery of the transition lottery means, and a role to be notified during the notification game state. When a notification target combination (for example, pushing order) is determined as a winning combination, notification means (for example, main control board 71, finger Monitor 147, sub-control board 72, and display unit 100), and the combination determining means determines the notification target combination as a winning combination during the specific gaming state with a higher probability than in a state other than the specific gaming state. The notification game control means starts the notification game state when the specific game start means is started by the specific game start means in a state where the transition lottery is won.

  In such a gaming machine, when transitioning to the notification gaming state, so-called AT machines or ART machines are realized in order to notify the mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination. be able to. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific gaming state is started in the state where the lottery is won, the notification gaming state is started, that is, the start of the notification gaming state is started. It is time. In this specific gaming state, the notification target role is won with a higher probability than in a state other than the specific gaming state. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the notification gaming state starts together with the specific gaming state, the notification is performed thereafter. It can be expected that the target role will win with a high probability. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult for the notification subject combination to win during the notification game state, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the notification game state.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is characterized in that the notification game control means continues to execute the notification game state even after the specific game state ends.

  In such a gaming machine, since the notification game state continues even after the specific game state in which the notification target combination is easy to win, the specific game state (bonus) can be aimed at while receiving the notification.

[Appendix 21]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of appendix 21 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  Here, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-238924), when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination, a gaming machine that carries over the bonus that has been won until the bonus is won is also known. ing. In addition, in a gaming machine that carries over such a bonus, when a specific small combination is won in the state where the bonus is carried over, a notification that prompts the winning of the specific small combination or bonus may be performed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
From the player's point of view, a specific small combination or bonus can be won by appropriately performing a stop operation in accordance with this notification. However, in the conventional gaming machine, only notification for prompting a winning of a specific small role or bonus is performed. For example, when a bonus notification is performed, a pattern stop pattern when the first reel is stopped Is not a bonus winning when the bonus winning is denied, it is also impossible to win a specific small role that is not notified.

  If neither of the specific small roles or bonuses can be realized, the player may feel lost, and may be offended even though he is in the state of winning the bonus. In particular, a beginner with a low skill of the stop operation is highly likely not to win the notified combination (a specific small combination or bonus), and the beginner may not be able to play the game with peace of mind.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which a player can play with peace of mind.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , Display window 4), design variation means for varying the design by rotating the reel based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, motor drive circuit 39, main control board 71), and establishment of the start condition Based on the order of the stop operation when determined as a winning combination, includes a first symbol combination (for example, a bell symbol combination) or a second symbol combination (for example, a bell spilled symbol combination). Corresponding to the plurality of reels, and a combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining a winning combination with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations including a push order allowing a stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations Stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, the winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop operation detecting means Stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the change of the symbol based on the detection of the stop operation by the symbol, and the symbol display means when the change of the symbol is stopped. When a specific symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols of “C_BB1”) corresponding to a specific combination (for example, “F_BB1”) is displayed, a specific game starting means (for example, a bonus state) is started. For example, when the specific combination is determined as a winning combination by the main control board 71) and the combination determining unit, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display unit. The carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries the specific role as a winning role until the symbol change is stopped by the stop control means according to the push order combination When the first symbol combination is displayed, a profit giving means (for example, the main control board 71) that gives a larger profit than when the second symbol combination is displayed, and an effect executing means (for example, an effect executing means) (for example, Sub-control board 72 and display unit 100), and when the carry forward means is determined as the winning combination in the game in which the carryover means carry over the specific combination, When all the reels are rotating, an effect is provided to notify the order of the stop operation in which the first symbol combination is displayed in the push order, and when one reel stops, the stop is stopped. In the symbol display means for displaying the symbols of the reels, the push order combination symbols constituting the first symbol combination are displayed, and the symbol combination symbols constituting the specific symbol combination are displayed on the symbol display means. If not displayed, the effect of notifying the order of the stop operation is continued, and if both the push order composition symbol and the specific combination symbol are displayed on the symbol display means An effect of informing that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop operation while avoiding the specific combination configuration symbol is executed, and the specific combination configuration pattern is displayed on the design display means, and the design display means When the push order composition symbol is not displayed on the screen, an effect of notifying that the specific combination composition symbol is stopped is displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the pushing order is determined as the winning combination in a game carrying over a specific combination, the first symbol combination (that is, more number of combinations) in the pushing order during the rotation of all reels. An effect of notifying the order of stop operations (in order of pushing correct answers) in which “Profit is granted” is displayed. From the player's point of view, there is a possibility that the first symbol combination that can obtain more profits when the pushing order is won can be displayed by performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when one reel is stopped, the content to be notified is switched based on the symbol displayed on the stopped reel. Specifically, when the pushing order composition symbol is displayed on the stopped reel and the specific combination symbol is not displayed, a specific symbol combination is not displayed when all reels are stopped (that is, Therefore, the specific combination will not win a prize), so that the notification of the correct push order is continued. From the player's point of view, there is a possibility that the first symbol combination that can obtain more profits when winning the push order is displayed by performing the stop operation according to the contents of the notification.

  On the other hand, in the case where both of the push order composition symbol and the specific combination symbol are displayed in the stopped reel, there is a possibility that both the first symbol combination and the specific symbol combination are displayed when all reels are stopped. Therefore, it is notified that the stop operation is performed in the correct push order while avoiding the specific combination component design. From the viewpoint of the player, there is a possibility of displaying the first symbol combination that can provide more profits by winning the push order by performing the stop operation according to the content of this notification. Even if it is low and it is not possible to avoid the specific role composition symbol, the winning of the specific role can be expected.

  On the other hand, when only the specified combination component design is displayed without displaying the push order combination configuration symbol on the stopped reel, an effect of notifying that the specific combination configuration symbol is stopped is executed. To do. Since the first combination of symbols is not displayed when all reels are stopped as long as the pushing order composition symbol is not displayed on the stopped reels, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs notification (during rotation of all reels) (Notification of push order combination) is stopped and the notification is switched to the notification of the specific combination. From the player's point of view, a specific combination winning can be expected by following the switched notification.

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, by switching the content to be notified in accordance with the progress of the game, it is possible to notify the player without losing, and as a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind. it can.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that variably displays a plurality of symbols based on a player's start operation, stops the plurality of symbols based on a player's stop operation, and derives a result display. When a first symbol combination (for example, a bell symbol combination) is derived as a result display, a predetermined profit is given, and as a result display, a second symbol combination (for example, a bell spill pattern) Profit granting means (for example, main control board 71) that gives a profit less than the predetermined profit when the combination is derived, and a specific symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols of “C_BB1”) as a result display Specific game start means (for example, main control board 71) that starts a specific game state (for example, a bonus state) when derived, and unit games that are permitted to derive the specific symbol combination When the specific symbol combination is not derived, a carry-over means (for example, the main control board 71) that carries over an allowable condition for deriving the specific symbol combination, and an effect execution means (for example, an effect) that executes the effect Sub-control board 72, display unit 100), and when the derivation is permitted for any of the first symbol combination, the second symbol combination, and the specific symbol combination, After the start operation, until the first stop operation is received, an effect that informs the mode of the stop operation from which the first symbol combination is derived is executed, and when the first stop operation is received, When the first symbol combination can be derived and the specific symbol combination cannot be derived as a result display, the effect of informing the mode of the stop operation is continued, and Mode of stop operation for deriving the first symbol combination while avoiding deriving the specific symbol combination when neither the first symbol combination nor the specific symbol combination can be derived as a result display When the first symbol combination cannot be derived as a result display and the specific symbol combination can be derived as a result display, the specific symbol combination is stopped. An effect of notifying the mode of operation is executed.

  In such a gaming machine as well, by switching the contents to be notified in accordance with the progress of the game, it is possible to notify the player without losing, and as a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

[Appendix 22]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of appendix 22 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine for informing a player of information advantageous to the player. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in a conventional gaming machine having an AT function, the role of navigation during the AT period is merely for the purpose of increasing medals, so the navigation during the AT period becomes monotonous and the player feels a sense of feeling As a result, there was a risk that the interest of the game would be reduced even during the AT period.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest during a period in which information advantageous to a player is notified.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol that varies the symbol by rotating the reel based on establishment of a start condition. The first symbol combination (for example, the combination of replay symbols) or the second symbol when the winning means is determined based on the change means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the establishment of the start condition. The first combination (for example, “F_Maintenance Lip”) that permits stop display for a plurality of symbol combinations including the symbol combination (for example, the combination of RT1 transition lip), and the first combination when the winning combination is determined. Allow stop display for multiple symbol combinations including 3 symbol combinations (eg, bell symbol combinations) or 4th symbol combination (eg, bell spilled symbol combinations) A combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including two combinations (for example, "F_3 selection bell") with a predetermined probability, and provided corresponding to the plurality of reels Stop operation detection means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop by the stop operation detection means Based on the detection of the operation, in the stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the change in the symbol, and in the first gaming state (for example, the RT2 gaming state), the variation in the symbol. When the first symbol combination is displayed, the gaming state is maintained in the first gaming state, and when the second symbol combination is displayed, the gaming state is changed to the first gaming state. The game state control means (for example, the main control board 71) for shifting from the game state to the second game state (for example, the RT1 game state) and the third symbol combination are displayed when the variation of the symbol is stopped And a first quantity of gaming value (for example, nine medals), and when the fourth symbol combination is displayed, a gaming value less than the first quantity is given or any gaming value is also given. Necessary for displaying the first symbol combination when the first combination is determined as the winning combination when the predetermined value is satisfied with the game value adding means (for example, the main control board 71) which is not provided. A first notification gaming state (for example, Lip Navi AT) in which the information of the stop operation is notified and no information is notified even if the second combination is determined as the winning combination is performed during the first gaming state. 1 notification state control means (for example, main The control board 71), in the first gaming state, when the winning lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) that makes the transition lottery with a higher frequency than in the second gaming state, the winning lottery means When the second combination is determined as the winning combination, the second notification gaming state (for example, Bell Navi AT) for notifying the stop operation information necessary for displaying the third symbol combination is performed. 2 notification state control means (for example, main control board 71).

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first notification gaming state, information on a stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination at the time of the first winning combination is notified. Here, among the symbol combinations corresponding to the first combination, the first symbol combination maintains the first gaming state where the frequency of performing the lottery to be played is high even if displayed, while the second symbol combination is displayed. If it is done, the gaming state is shifted (falls) to the second gaming state where the frequency of performing the lottery is low. Therefore, it can be said that the first notification gaming state is a notification gaming state in which notification is performed to maintain the first gaming state where the frequency of the transition lottery is high.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a second notification gaming state other than the first notification gaming state, and in this second notification gaming state, the third symbol combination is displayed at the time of the second winning combination. The information of the stop operation necessary for this is notified. Here, among the symbol combinations corresponding to the second combination, the third symbol combination is a symbol combination to which a lot of game media (first quantity) is given when displayed, and the fourth symbol combination is When displayed, it is a symbol combination to which a small amount of game media is given (or no game media is given). Therefore, it can be said that the second notification gaming state is a notification gaming state in which notification for receiving provision of a game medium is performed.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention has the notification game states having different roles, that is, the first notification game state and the second notification game state. For the player, the meaning of the notification varies depending on the type of the notification game state, so that the notification in the notification game state does not become monotonous and prevents the interest in the notification game state from deteriorating. it can.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second combination is won during the first notification gaming state, no information is notified, so that an increase in game media can be suppressed during the first notification gaming state. Become. In gaming machines, it is necessary to balance the profits of the player and the game store. However, if the period of increase in the game media is long, the profit that the player obtains will be excessive. It is necessary to suppress. In a normal gaming machine, the notification game state is a period in which the game medium increases, so in order to balance profits, it is difficult to shift to the notification game state. If the period of a game state is suppressed, interest will fall. In this regard, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a notification game state of a second notification game state in which game media increase and a first notification game state in which an increase in game media is suppressed. It is possible to realize a gameability that is easy to shift to a notification game state while balancing profits.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, setting means (for example, setting key type switch 430, main control board 71) for setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. ), And among the plurality of combinations, a specific combination (for example, “RT3 transition lip” determined as a winning combination with a probability corresponding to the current gaming state regardless of the setting value set by the setting means) In the first gaming state, the combination determining means determines the specific combination as a winning combination with a first probability, while in the second gaming state, the combination determining unit determines the specific combination based on the first probability. The transition lottery means wins with the same probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means in response to the specific winning combination being determined as the winning combination. Perform the transfer lottery, and Technical state control means, with a probability corresponding to the set value the setting unit has set, characterized in that to shift the game state from the second game condition in the first game condition.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a specific combination determined as a winning combination is won regardless of the set value, lottery for transition to the second notification gaming state is performed. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the second notification gaming state at the time of the specific combination winning can be made the same for each set value. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the transition to the first gaming state in which the specific combination is easy to win is performed with a probability according to the setting value, for example, the setting value that is easy to transition to the first gaming state And a setting value that is difficult to shift, and a feature for each setting value can be obtained regarding the transition to the second notification gaming state.

[Appendix 23]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of appendix 23 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In such a gaming machine, various gaming properties are realized by providing a relatively unfavorable gaming state and a relatively advantageous gaming state for the player, and controlling the transition between these gaming states. Yes. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that provides a gaming state (AT) advantageous to the player by notifying the player of this is disclosed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In the gaming machine, in order to balance the profits of the player and the game store, it is required to appropriately manage the transition between the advantageous gaming state and the unfavorable gaming state. For example, a gaming machine that hardly changes to an advantageous gaming state but continues to an advantageous gaming state for a long period of time after entering the advantageous gaming state has a high euphoria and is not preferable. It is necessary to appropriately balance the transition frequency of the game and the duration of the advantageous gaming state.

  From the standpoint of a gaming store, we would like to identify gaming machines whose gaming state balance has been significantly impaired, but in the past, only simple information such as the insertion and withdrawal of medals used in gaming has been accepted from gaming machines. It was not always sufficient to grasp a gaming machine in which the balance of the state was significantly impaired.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping that the gaming balance is impaired.

[Means for solving problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal gaming state (for example, a normal section) and a specific gaming state (for example, a specific section) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state, A first counter (for example, main control board 71) that counts the total number of games indicating the number of games in all gaming states, and a second counter (for example, main control) that counts the number of specific games indicating the number of games in the specific gaming state Board 71), a calculation means (for example, main control board 71) for calculating a specific section ratio indicating the ratio of the specific number of games to the total number of games, and the specific section ratio calculated by the calculation means It is characterized by comprising notifying means (for example, external concentration terminal board 73, main control board 71) for notifying predetermined information to an external device when the ratio is equal to or greater than a predetermined ratio.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the ratio of the specific number of games to the total number of games exceeds a predetermined ratio, the external device is notified to that effect. Thereby, at the game store side, it is possible to easily grasp a gaming machine having a remarkably high ratio of a state advantageous to the player (specific game state).

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a third counter (for example, the main control board 71) that counts a total number indicating the number of game values given in all gaming states, and given in the specific gaming state. A fourth counter (for example, the main control board 71) that counts the number of grants in a specific game indicating the number of game values that have been played, and the calculating means occupies the total number of grants during the specific game A ratio value indicating a ratio of the number of grants is calculated, and the notifying unit notifies predetermined information to an external device when the ratio value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the ratio of the number of grants during a specific game to the total number of grants exceeds a predetermined value, the external device is notified of that fact. Normally, in gaming machines, not only in a state that is advantageous to the player but also in a state that is disadvantageous to the player, game value is given by winning a small role or the like. A state in which the ratio of the number of grants in a specific game to the total number of grants is high means that a lot of game value is given in an advantageous state and almost no game value is given in an unfavorable state. It is shown and there is a risk of increasing euphoria. Therefore, in such a case, the gaming machine according to the present invention notifies the external device of a predetermined notification to the external device. Thereby, at the game store side, it is possible to easily grasp a gaming machine having a remarkably high ratio of a state advantageous to the player.

  Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification means sends the predetermined information to an external device regardless of the calculation result of the calculation means until the total number of games counted by the first counter reaches a predetermined number. However, it is characterized by not outputting.

  According to such a gaming machine, until the total number of games reaches the predetermined number, the predetermined information is not notified to the external device even if the proportion of the state advantageous to the player is extremely high. In a situation where there are not many games after the game machine is installed, the proportion of the advantageous state greatly moves up and down, so there is a possibility that notification is made even when it is not necessary. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since notification is not performed until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, unnecessary notification is not performed.

[Appendix 24]
The pachislot machine 1 according to appendix 24 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine for informing a player of information advantageous to the player. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In gaming machines having such an AT function, there is known a game number management AT machine that manages the duration of AT by the number of games. By the way, in such an AT machine for managing the number of games, if the number of winning combinations (for example, push order bells) to be notified during the AT period is small, there are few medals that can be acquired during the AT period, and Despite this, players sometimes complained.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the interest of a game from deteriorating during an AT period.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol that varies the symbol by rotating the reel based on establishment of a start condition. Based on the change means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the establishment of the start condition, the combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) that determines the winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. ), A stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and determined by the combination determining means Stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71, etc.) for stopping the variation of the symbol based on the winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means. When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a notification game start means (for example, main control board 71) that starts a notification game state (for example, a specific section), and a notification target that is a role of a notification target during the notification game state When a combination (for example, pushing order) is determined as a winning combination, notifying means (for example, main control board 71, instruction monitor 147) for notifying a mode of stopping operation (for example, correct pushing order) advantageous to the player. The sub-control board 72, the display unit 100), and a notification game end means (for example, the main control board 71) for ending the notification game state when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the notification game start means Counting means (for example, main control board 71) for counting the number of continuations indicating the number of unit games since the start of the state, and notification means for notifying that the current gaming state is the notification gaming state For example, a main control board 71 and a status indicator 147b) are provided, and the notification game ending unit is configured such that, during the notification game state, the counting unit is in a state where the notification by the notification unit is performed more than a guaranteed number of times. When the number of continuations to be counted reaches a predetermined number of times, the notification gaming state is terminated on the condition that the number of continuations reaches the predetermined number of times, and the notification by the notification means is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notification gaming state. If the number of continuations counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number in a situation where the notification means is not, then the notification gaming state is terminated on the condition that the notification by the notification means has reached the guaranteed number of times, and the notification means When the notification game state is ended, the notification that the current game state is the notification game state is ended.

According to such a gaming machine, the notification game state basically ends when the number of continuations in the notification game state reaches a predetermined number, but the notification target role is not notified for the guaranteed number of times. Even if the number of times of continuation reaches the predetermined number of times, it will not end, and after that, it continues until the notification of the notification target role is performed for the guaranteed number of times. Become. From the player's point of view, even if the number of winning roles of the notification target role is small, the guaranteed number of notifications will be performed, so the game can be performed with peace of mind, and the interest of the game can be enjoyed during the notification game state. It can prevent that it falls.
Note that the notification game state is notified by the notification means, so if the notification game state has not ended even if the number of continuations reaches the predetermined number of times, the player continues the notification game state from the notification content of the notification means. You can grasp what you are doing. This can prevent the game from being ended inadvertently during the notification game state.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of winning combinations are allowed to be stopped for a plurality of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination when determined as the winning combination. A second combination that allows a stop display for a combination of a plurality of symbols including the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination when determined as a winning combination (for example, a push order that guarantees the number of times of navigation) When a combination (for example, a pressing combination that does not guarantee the number of times of navigation) is included and the variation of the symbol is stopped, the first symbol combination is displayed when the first symbol combination is displayed. Thus, when the second symbol combination is displayed, the game value less than the first quantity is given or no game value is given, and when the third symbol combination is displayed, the first quantity is displayed. The second game price less than On the other hand, when the fourth symbol combination is displayed, a game value giving means that gives less game value than the second quantity or does not give any game value (for example, the main control board 71). ), And when the first combination is determined as the winning combination, the informing means notifies the stop operation necessary for displaying the first symbol combination, and the second combination When the winning combination is determined as a winning combination, the mode of the stop operation necessary for displaying the third symbol combination is notified, and the notification game ending unit is configured to perform the notification by the notification unit during the notification game state. When the number of continuations counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number in a situation where the notification for the first combination is performed more than the guaranteed number of times, regardless of the number of notifications performed for the second combination, The number of continuations is a predetermined number The notification game state is terminated on the condition that the number of continuations counted by the counting means in the situation where the notification to the first hand by the notification means is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state. When the predetermined number of times is reached, regardless of the number of notifications made to the second combination, thereafter, the notification gaming state is terminated on condition that the notification by the notification means has reached the guaranteed number of times. It is characterized by.

  In the gaming machine described above, it is supposed that at least the guaranteed number of notifications are made during the notification gaming state, while the gaming machine according to the present invention guarantees the notification for the guaranteed number of times for the first combination, The second combination is not guaranteed for the number of guarantees. Here, according to the notification for the first combination, a first quantity of game media is provided, and according to the notification for the second combination, a second quantity of game media that is less than the first quantity is provided. In such a gaming machine, a guaranteed number of notifications are guaranteed for the first combination to which a lot of game media are given, and a guaranteed number of notifications are guaranteed to the second combination to which a small number of game media are assigned. Not.

  In recent gaming machines, in order to balance profits, a combination in which medals do not increase or decrease, a combination in which medals decrease, or a combination in which the increase in medals is extremely small (for example, three combinations in which the number of bets matches the number of payouts) In some cases, a single combination with a smaller number of bets than the number of payouts, a four-piece combination with a slightly larger number of payouts than the number of bets, and the like are notified during the notification game state. Even if such a role follows the notification, the number of medals does not increase or decrease (or is small). Therefore, the player need not guarantee the number of notifications during the notification game state. On the other hand, for a combination in which medals increase (for example, nine combinations with more payouts than bets), the total number of medals (game media) given during the notification game state is affected. Therefore, for the player, it is preferable that the number of notifications is guaranteed during the notification game state.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the number of notifications is guaranteed for the first combination to which many game media are given, and the number of notifications is not guaranteed to the second combination to which a small number of game media are given. For example, even if the notification for the second combination is sufficiently performed until the number of continuations in the notification gaming state reaches the predetermined number, the notification for the first combination is not performed for the guaranteed number of times. The notification game state is continued without ending. For the player, the number of notifications of the first role is guaranteed to affect the total number of game media given during the notification game state, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the game It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

[Appendix 25]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of Appendix 25 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine for informing a player of information advantageous to the player. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Among such gaming machines having an AT function, gaming machines having a chance zone (CZ) that is easy to shift to an AT are also known. There are also known gaming machines that can be selected. However, the method of selecting CZ is monotonous and is not necessarily a friendly method for the player, and there is room for further improvement.

  The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that realizes a CZ selection method that is kind to a player.

[Means for solving problems]
In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a notification target combination (for example, push order combination) that is a notification target combination is determined as a winning combination, a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player (for example, correct push sequence) ) That has a notification gaming state (for example, a specific section) and a normal gaming state (for example, a normal section) that does not notify the mode of the advantageous stop operation. A combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining a combination, and granting a right to shift to a lottery state in which a transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the notification game state is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Means (for example, main control board 71), selection accepting means (for example, main control board 71) for receiving selection of one lottery state from among a plurality of lottery states in a state where the right to transfer is granted, By the selection receiving means When the selection of the lottery state is accepted, or when a predetermined operation is performed without accepting the selection of one lottery state, the lottery state start means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the lottery state, and the lottery In the state, when the transition lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted from the lottery state to the notification gaming state, and when the duration of the lottery state exceeds the end period, the gaming state is shifted from the lottery state to the normal gaming state. Game state control means (for example, main control board 71), the number of advantageous games, which is the sum of the number of unit games in the lottery state and the number of unit games in the notification game state continuously performed from the lottery state Counting means (for example, the main control board 71), and notification game end means (for example, for ending the notification game state when the number of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined number) (for example, Control board 71), and the plurality of lottery states include a plurality of lottery states with different end periods, and the lottery state start means accepts selection of one lottery state by the selection acceptance means. If the given lottery state is started and a predetermined operation is performed without accepting the selection of the one lottery state, the shortest end period is shortest among the plurality of lottery states. The lottery state is started.

  When such a gaming machine shifts to the lottery state, an AT (notification game state) having a so-called CZ (lottery state) is performed in order to perform a lottery transition to the notification game state that notifies the mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player. Machine and ART machine can be realized. Here, if a state advantageous to the player is continued for a long period of time, there is a risk that the gambling of the game will be increased, so in recent pachislot machines, the state advantageous to the player It is demanded to keep the duration of the period constant. In the so-called AT machine (ART machine), it can be said that the AT period is in an advantageous state, but the CZ period is also a period during which the AT easily shifts to an advantageous AT and is preferably included in the advantageous state. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the number of advantageous sections which is the sum of the number of unit games in the lottery state (CZ) and the number of unit games in the notification game state (AT) continuously performed from the lottery state. However, when the predetermined number of times is reached, the notification gaming state is terminated, and the period in which the advantageous state continues is suppressed to a certain period.

  In such a gaming machine, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a player can select one lottery state from among a plurality of lottery states having different end periods. From the player's point of view, the lottery states (CZ) with different game characteristics can be freely selected, so that the player can enjoy the game properties preferred by the player. However, as described above, this lottery state period is also an advantageous period. In a gaming machine to be handled, it is preferable that a shorter lottery state is easy to select. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the player selects his / her own intention, the selected lottery state is started, while the player proceeds without making a selection. The shortest lottery state having the shortest end period that is considered to be more preferable for the player is started. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is easy to start the shortest lottery state that is considered preferable for the player, so that it is possible to realize a method for selecting the lottery state (CZ) that is kind to the player.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the selection receiving means selects a lottery state indicated by instruction information indicating one lottery state among a plurality of lottery states when the selection is received. The selection information is received, and the instruction information indicates the shortest lottery state in an initial state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the lottery state is selected based on the lottery state pointed to by the instruction information (cursor), but the instruction information indicates the shortest lottery state that is considered preferable for the player in the initial state. Selected in Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is easy to select the shortest lottery state that is considered preferable for the player, so that it is possible to realize a method for selecting the lottery state (CZ) that is kind to the player.

[Appendix 26]
The pachislot machine 1 according to attachment 26 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine for informing a player of information advantageous to the player. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, if the setting is changed during the AT period, the AT is cleared. Therefore, from the game shop side, the AT is maintained only when the setting is maintained (ie, left unchanged). However, the options for store management were limited.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of various selections regarding maintenance / clearance of an AT.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention determines the winning game combination means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining the winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and the notification gaming state (for example, a specific section) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. A notification operation start means (for example, the main control board 71) to be started and a notification target combination that is a notification target combination during the notification game state are determined as a winning combination, and a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player ( For example, a notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the instruction monitor 147, the sub control board 72, the display unit 100) for notifying the correct answer pressing order and a predetermined end condition are satisfied, the notification game state is ended. A notification game ending means (for example, main control board 71) and a setting means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, setting key type switch 430, main Control board 71) and when a new set value is set by the setting means during the notification gaming state, the gaming state is maintained in the notification gaming state, and a predetermined initialization operation is performed during the notification gaming state. When the game is performed, the game control means (for example, the main control board 71) for ending the notification game state is provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a notification target combination is determined as a winning combination, a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player is notified during the notification gaming state, so a so-called AT machine or ART machine is used. Can be realized. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the initialization operation is performed during the notification game state, the notification game state is ended (cleared), but a new set value is set during the notification game state. The game state is maintained in the notification game state. From the gaming store side, it is possible to select whether to maintain / clear the notification gaming state while changing the set value. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, there are various options for the gaming store side regarding the management of the gaming machine. Can be given.

[Appendix 27]
The pachislot machine 1 according to attachment 27 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In such a gaming machine, various gaming properties are realized by providing a relatively unfavorable gaming state and a relatively advantageous gaming state for the player, and controlling the transition between these gaming states. Yes. For example, in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), information advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss the winning combination determined as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that provides a gaming state (AT) advantageous to the player by notifying the player of this is disclosed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In the gaming machine, in order to balance the profits of the player and the game store, it is required to appropriately manage the transition between the advantageous gaming state and the unfavorable gaming state. For example, a gaming machine that hardly changes to an advantageous gaming state but continues to an advantageous gaming state for a long period of time after entering the advantageous gaming state has a high euphoria and is not preferable. It is necessary to appropriately balance the transition frequency of the game and the duration of the advantageous gaming state.

  From the standpoint of a gaming store, we would like to identify gaming machines whose gaming state balance has been significantly impaired, but in the past, only simple information such as the insertion and withdrawal of medals used in gaming has been accepted from gaming machines. It was not always sufficient to grasp a gaming machine in which the balance of the state was significantly impaired.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping that the gaming balance is impaired.

[Means for solving problems]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal gaming state (for example, a normal section) and a specific gaming state (for example, a specific section) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state, A first counter (for example, main control board 71) that counts the total number of games indicating the number of games in all gaming states, and a second counter (for example, main control) that counts the number of specific games indicating the number of games in the specific gaming state Board 71), a calculation means (for example, main control board 71) for calculating a specific section ratio indicating a ratio of the specific game count to the total game count, and a position difficult to be visually recognized by the player, A display means (for example, a ratio display 422, a main control board 71) for displaying the specific section ratio is provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, the store clerk of the game store confirms the ratio of the specific section displayed on the display means, so that the ratio of the state advantageous to the player (specific game state) is out of balance. It can be easily grasped. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to easily grasp that the balance of the game is impaired on the game store side. Further, since the display means is provided at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, the display means can be prevented from being seen by the player.

  Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display means displays the specific section ratio in a first display mode when the specific section ratio is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, and the specific section ratio is less than the predetermined value. In this case, the specific section ratio is displayed in the second display mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the specific section ratio is equal to or higher than the predetermined ratio, the specific section ratio is displayed in a different display mode, so that the game store can grasp at a glance that the game balance is lacking. it can.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a third counter (for example, the main control board 71) that counts a total number indicating the number of game values given in all gaming states, and given in the specific gaming state. A fourth counter (for example, the main control board 71) that counts the number of grants in a specific game indicating the number of game values that have been played, and the calculation means is a ratio of the number of grants in a specific game to the total number of grants And the display means switches between the specific section ratio and the ratio value for display.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display means also displays the ratio of the number of grants in the specific game to the total number of grants (the ratio of the accessory). Usually, in a gaming machine, a game medium is given by winning a small role or the like not only in a state advantageous to the player but also in a disadvantageous state for the player. A state in which the ratio of the number of grants in a specific game to the total number of grants is high indicates that a lot of game media is given in an advantageous state and almost no game media is given in a disadvantageous state. There is a risk of increasing euphoria. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the clerk of the game shop can grasp the gaming machine having a remarkably high ratio of the advantageous state for the player by displaying the bonus rate on the display means.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the specific section ratio and the accessory ratio are switched and displayed on the display means, it is not necessary to separately provide a display means for displaying each ratio. Thus, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that already has a display means inside the gaming machine, it is only necessary to be able to switch and display the specific section ratio and the accessory ratio in the display means, which is a slight from the software side. It is only necessary to make a change, and even in the case of a gaming machine that currently does not have a display means inside the gaming machine, only one display means needs to be newly added, and a minimum change is sufficient.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the display means displays the ratio value in a first display mode when the ratio value is equal to or greater than a specific value, and when the ratio value is less than the specific value, The ratio value is displayed in the second display mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the ratio of the number of grants in a specific game to the total number of grants exceeds a predetermined ratio, the ratio value is displayed in a different display mode, so that the game balance is lacking. It can be grasped at a glance at the amusement store side.

[Appendix 28]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of appendix 28 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as shown in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-057332), a player such as information for establishing an internal winning combination so as not to miss a role determined to be an internal winning combination in recent years. There is known a gaming machine for informing a player of information advantageous to the player. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and has an AT function. A gaming machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine.

  In addition, in game stores where gaming machines are actually installed, it is common to install external devices such as data counters and hall computers together with gaming machines, for example, installed above the gaming machines. The data counter receives a signal output from the gaming machine and displays the number of games and the number of bonuses.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the information that the hall side (data counter or hall computer) can grasp based on the external signal output from the gaming machine is limited to the number of games and the number of bonuses. In recent years, further improvement of external signal output has been demanded because it is impossible to accurately grasp the situation of the gaming machine.

  The present invention has been made based on such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which the hall side can grasp more accurate information.

[Means for solving problems]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol that varies the symbol by rotating the reel based on establishment of a start condition. Based on the change means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the establishment of the start condition, the combination determining means (for example, the main control board 71) that determines the winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability. ), A stop operation detecting means (for example, stop switch 7S, main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and determined by the combination determining means Stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71, etc.) for stopping the variation of the symbol based on the winning combination and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means. And a notification for starting a notification game state (for example, a specific section) for notifying a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player based on establishment of a notification game start condition (for example, winning a lottery for shifting to a specific section). Based on the establishment of the game start means (for example, the main control board 71) and the notification game end condition (for example, the number of games, the difference number, the number of times of navigation), the notification game end means (for example, the main control) ends the notification game state. Board 71), counting means (for example, main control board 71) for counting the duration of the notification gaming state, and output means (for example, main control board 71) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside, The notification game end means ends the notification game state when the counting means counts a predetermined period (for example, 1500 games), regardless of whether the notification game end condition is satisfied, Serial output means, if the notification gaming state by counting result of said counting means is terminated, and outputs a predetermined signal to the outside.

According to such a gaming machine, the notification game state basically ends when the notification game end condition is satisfied, but when the duration period reaches a predetermined period, the notification game state waits for the notification game end condition to be satisfied. Quit without In recent years, there is a need for a mechanism in which the notification gaming state does not continue for a long period of time, because if the notification gaming state continues for a long period of time, gambling is unnecessarily increased. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the duration of the notification game state reaches a predetermined period, the notification game state is forcibly ended without waiting for the notification game end condition to be satisfied (limit processing). It is possible to prevent the euphoria from increasing unnecessarily.
In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when such limit processing is performed, the fact is output to the outside, so the hall side grasps that the limit processing has been performed in the gaming machine. New information that could not be grasped conventionally can be grasped.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, based on the establishment of the bonus start condition, the bonus start means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting a bonus state advantageous to the player, and the establishment of the bonus end condition, Bonus end means (for example, the main control board 71) for ending the bonus state, and the counting means, when the bonus state is started during the notification gaming state, the period during the bonus state Is also counted as the duration of the notification gaming state, and the output means counts the predetermined period during the bonus state in the notification gaming state, and externally when the bonus state ends, A predetermined signal is output.

  According to such a gaming machine, since it is possible to grasp the fact when the limit processing is performed during the bonus state on the hall side, it is possible to grasp the situation of the gaming machine more accurately.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification game ending means is configured so that the notification means ends when the notification of the stop operation mode advantageous to the player is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notification game state. When the period is counted, the notifying gaming state is ended, and the counting means counts the predetermined period in the situation where the notification of the stop operation mode advantageous to the player is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the notifying gaming state. Then, the notification gaming state is terminated on the condition that the number of times of notification of a stop operation mode advantageous to the player reaches the guaranteed number of times.

  According to such a gaming machine, the limit processing is basically performed when the notification gaming state continues for a predetermined period, but when the advantageous notification is not performed for the guaranteed number of times during the notification gaming state, the predetermined limit processing is performed. Even if the period continues, since it does not end and continues until advantageous notification is performed for the guaranteed number of times, in the notification gaming state, the notification is performed at least for the guaranteed number of times. From the player's point of view, since the notification is performed for the guaranteed number of times, the game can be performed with peace of mind, and the interest of the game can be prevented from being reduced during the notification game state.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the output means may be external when a predetermined number of times the counting means has counted the predetermined period within a specific period (for example, from power-on to power-off). A specific signal is output.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a limit process is performed a predetermined number of times within a specific period, a specific signal (for example, an error signal) is externally combined with a signal indicating that the limit process has been performed. Output to the device. Thereby, for example, when the limit processing is performed a number of times that cannot normally be considered during one day, the fact can be grasped on the hall side.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachi-slot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4L, 4C, 4R ... Display window, 7L, 7C, 7R ... Stop button, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub-control board, 100 ... Display unit

Claims (2)

Multiple reels with multiple symbols,
A symbol changing means for changing the symbol by rotating the reel based on the establishment of a start condition;
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a combination determining means for determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations with a predetermined probability;
A stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel;
Based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination unit and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection unit, stop control unit for stopping the variation of the symbol,
Specific game starting means for starting a specific gaming state when a specific symbol combination is displayed when the variation of the symbol is stopped;
Transition lottery means for performing a transition lottery on whether or not to shift the gaming state to a notification gaming state for notifying a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player;
Based on the result of the transition lottery of the transition lottery means, notification game control means for executing the notification game state,
A notification means for notifying a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous for a player when a notification target role that is a notification target role is determined as a winning combination during the notification game state;
With
The combination determining means determines the notification target combination as a winning combination with a higher probability than the state other than the specific gaming state during the specific gaming state,
The notification game control means starts the notification game state when the specific game state is started by the specific game start means in a state where the transition lottery is won.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The notification game control means continues to execute the notification game state even after the specific game state ends.
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images